900 TC8

Temperature Controllers
USER MANUAL
Bulletin 900-TC8, 900-TC16, & 900-TC32
Series B
Important User Information
Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication,
those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must
satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that
each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements,
including any applicable laws, regulations, codes and standards.
The illustrations, charts, sample programs and layout examples shown in
this guide are intended solely for purposes of example. Since there are many
variables and requirements associated with any particular installation,
Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability (to include
intellectual property liability) for actual use based upon the examples shown
in this publication.
Rockwell Automation publication SGI-1.1, Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid-State Control (available
from your local Allen-Bradley sales office), describes some important
differences between solid-state equipment and electromechanical devices
that should be taken into consideration when applying products such as
those described in this publication.
Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication, in whole or
part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, is prohibited.
Safety Precautions
Safety Signal Words

This manual uses the following signal word to mark safety precautions for the
Bulletin 900-TC8, 900-TC16, and 900-TC32 Temperature/Process
Controllers.
These precautions provide important information for the safe application of
the Temperature/Process Controller. You must make sure to follow the
instructions provided in all safety precautions.:
ATTENTION
Identifies information about practices or circumstances

that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage
or economic loss
Attention statements help you to:

identify a hazard
avoid a hazard
recognize the consequences
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful

application and understanding of the product.
Trademark List
900Builder and 900BuilderLite are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
European Communities (EC) Directive Compliance

If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within the
European Union and EEA regions. It has been designed and tested to meet
the following directives.
EMC Directive
This product is tested to meet the Council Directive 89/336/EC
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) by applying the following standards,
in whole or in part, documented in a technical construction file:
EN 61326 EMC Requirements Electrical Equipment for Control,
Measurement and Laboratory Use
This product is intended for use in an industrial environment.
Low Voltage Directive

This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73/23/EEC Low Voltage,
by applying the safety requirements of EN 61010-1 Safety Requirements
for Electrical Equipment for Control, Measurement and Laboratory Use
General Requirements. For specific information, see the appropriate
sections in this publication, as well as the Allen-Bradley publication
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines For Noise
Immunity, Publication 1770-4.1.
This equipment is classified as open equipment and must be mounted in an
enclosure during operation to provide safety protection.
Table of Contents
Important User Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Signal Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
European Communities (EC) Directive Compliance . . . . . . . . .
Low Voltage Directive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
Table of Contents
Preface
Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-i

Meanings of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-i
Series B Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-ii
Series B Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-ii
900-TC8x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-ii
900-TC16x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-ii
900-TC32x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-ii
Terminal Arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-iv
Body Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-v
900-TC8, 900-TC16, & 900-TC32 Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-vi
Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-vi
Communications Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-vii
Other Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-viii
Option Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-ix
How to Read Display Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-x
Chapter 1
Bulletin 900 Input & Output
Overview
I/O Configurations & Main Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Main Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Controller Hardware Versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
900-TC8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
900-TC16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
900-TC32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Front Panels & General Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Display Meanings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Operation Indicators 1,2,3... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Basic Keypad Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Chapter 2
Preparations
1-1
Hardware Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Approximate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Wiring and Installation Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Panel Mounting 900-TC8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the 900-TC8 Controller with the Optional Units . . .
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-4
2-7
2-9
Publication 900-UM007D-EN-E - January 2011
1-2
Table of Contents
Panel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulletin 900 Wiring Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring Guidelines and Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Direct PC Communications Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
2-15
2-17
2-18
2-30
2-30
Chapter 3
Configuration & Basic Operation
How Function Groups Are Configured and Operating the Keys on the
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Selecting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Changing Parameters/Loading Values into Controller Memory. 3-7
Communications Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Setting Up Communications Parameter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Initial Setup Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Configuring the Input Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Selecting C/F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Temperature Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Configuring the SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Changing the SP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Selecting PID Control or ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
2-PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
ON/OFF Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Configuring the Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Control Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Direct/Reverse Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Assigned Output Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Auxiliary Output Opening or Closing in Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Executing the ON/OFF Control Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
ON/OFF Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
ON/OFF Control Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
AT (Auto-Tuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
ST (Self-Tuning). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Conditions that Start Self-Tuning (SRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Self-Tuning (ST) Stable Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
RT (Robust Tuning). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Manual PID Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Alarm Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Alarm Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Alarm Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Table of Contents
1-3
PV Change Rate Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Precaution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Heater Burnout Alarm (HBA), Heater Short Alarm (HSA), and Heater
Overcurrent Alarm (HOA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
HBA, HSA, and HOA Alarm Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Installing Current Transformers (CT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
How to Calculate Heater Current Detection Values . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Application Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Heater Burnout Alarm (HBA) Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
HS Alarm Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Heater Overcurrent Alarm Set-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Moving to the Advanced Setting Function Group . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Configure Overcurrent Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Set-up of the No. 3 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
MV Display for Heating and Cooling Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
System Setup/Operational Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
Chapter 4
Parameter Adjustments &
Application Considerations
Shifting Input Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

1-Point (Uniform) Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
2-Point Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
How to Calculate Input Shift Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Using the 1-Point Shift Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Using the 2-Point Shift Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Alarm Functions/Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Alarm Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Standby Alarm Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Alarm Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Summary of Alarm Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Configuration of Scaling Upper-Limits and Scaling Lower-Limits for
Analog Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Executing the Heating and Cooling Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Dead Band (Heating and Cooling Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Setup of Heating and Cooling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Using the Event Input Feature 900-TC8 & 900-TC16 . . . . . . . . 4-16
Multi-SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Selecting Multi-SP by Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Multi-SP Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Executing RUN/STOP Controller Mode Change. . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Switching Between Auto and Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Controlling the Start of the Simple Program Function . . . . . . . 4-23
Control by Inverting Direct/Reverse Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
1-4
Table of Contents
Switching 100% AT Execute/Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Switching 40% ATExecute/Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Setting Change Enable/Disable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Alarm Latch Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the SP Upper- and Lower-Limit Values. . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Point Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Point Limit Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Executing the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Rate of Change
SP Ramp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP Ramp Application Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Move to the Advanced Setting Function Group . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Key Protect Function Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PV Color Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PV Color Change Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Break Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Break Alarm (LBA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual MV Limit Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Transfer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Output Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Simple Program Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simple Program Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation at the Program End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Adjustment Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MV at Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MV at PV Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Rate of MV Variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the PF Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor/Setting Item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor/Setting Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counting Control Output ON/OFF Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Output ON/OFF Count Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying PV/SV Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-24
4-25
4-25
4-25
4-26
4-26
4-26
4-27
4-27
4-29
4-29
4-30
4-31
4-33
4-33
4-39
4-39
4-42
4-44
4-44
4-47
4-47
4-53
4-53
4-54
4-62
4-62
4-66
4-66
4-69
4-75
4-75
4-75
4-76
4-77
4-80
4-82
4-83
4-83
4-87
4-87
4-90
Table of Contents
1-5
Chapter 5
Parameter Functions & Definitions Conventions Used in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
About the Parameter Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Protect Function Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Move to Protect Function Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Operation/Adjustment Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Initial Setting/Communications Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Setting/Configuration Change Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
PF Key Protect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Parameter Mask Enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Password to Move to Protect Function Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Operation Function Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
PV (Process Value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
PV/SP Process Value/Set Point No. 1 Display
PV/SP Process Value/Set Point No. 2 Display (900-TC8) . 5-8
No. 3 Display (900-TC8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Auto Manual Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Multi-SP (Set Point 03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Set Point During SP Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Heater Current 1 Value Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Leakage Current 1 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Leakage Current 2 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Program Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Soak Time Remain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
RUN/STOP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Alarm Value 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Alarm Value 2 (900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Alarm Value 3 (900-TC8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Upper-Limit Alarm Value 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Lower-Limit Alarm Value 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Lower-Limit Alarm Value 2 (900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Lower-Limit Alarm Value 3 (900-TC8 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
MV Monitor (Heating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
MV Monitor (Cooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Adjustment Function Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Adjustment Function Group Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
AT Execute/Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Communications Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Leakage Current 1 Monitor (900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
1-6
Table of Contents
Leakage Current 2 Monitor (900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . .

Heater Burnout Detection 1 (900-TC8, 900-TC16). . . . . . . . . .
Heater Burnout Detection 2 (900-TC8, 900-TC16). . . . . . . . . .
HS Alarm 1 (900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HS Alarm 2 (900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Point 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Point 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Point 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Point 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Input Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upper-Limit Temperature Input Shift Value,
Lower-Limit Temperature Input Shift Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proportional Band, Integral Time, Derivative Time . . . . . . . . .
Cooling Coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dead Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Reset Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hysteresis (Heating)
Hysteresis (Cooling). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soak Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wait Band. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MV at Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MV at PV Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP Ramp Set Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MV (Manipulated Variable) Upper-Limit,
MV (Manipulated Variable) Lower-Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MV Upper-Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MV Lower-Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MV (Manipulated Variable) Change Rate Limit, . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extraction of Square Root Low-cut Point,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor/Setting Item Level (900-TC8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor/Setting Item Display 1 to 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Control Function Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PV/MV (Manual MV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Setting Function Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaling Upper-Limit, Scaling Lower-Limit, Decimal Point . . . .
Temperature Units (C/F) Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Point Upper-Limit, Set Point Lower-Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PID ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard or Heating/Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ST Self-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Period (Heat) ,Control Period (Cool) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct/Reverse Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Type for Alarm 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-31
5-32
5-33
5-33
5-33
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-35
5-36
5-37
5-38
5-38
5-39
5-40
5-40
5-41
5-41
5-42
5-42
5-43
5-43
5-44
5-45
5-45
5-46
5-47
5-48
5-50
5-52
5-53
5-54
5-55
5-55
5-56
5-57
5-57
5-58
5-59
Table of Contents
1-7
Alarm Type for Alarm 2 (900-TC8 & 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

Alarm Type for Alarm 3 (900-TC8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Alarm 1 Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Transfer Output Type (900-TC8, 900-TC16). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Transfer Output Upper-Limit
Transfer Output Lower-Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Linear Current Output (900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Number of Multi-SP Uses (900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Event Input Assignment (* 1 and 2) (900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . 5-66
Extraction of Square Root Enable (900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . 5-68
Move to Advanced Setting Function Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
Advanced Setting Function Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Parameter Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Multi-SP Uses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
SP Ramp Time Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Standby Sequence Reset Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Auxiliary Output * Open in Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . .(* = 1 to 3) 5-73
HB ON/OFF (900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Heater Burnout Latch (900-TC8, 900-TC16). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Heater Burnout Hysteresis (900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
ST (Self-Tuning) Stable Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
AT Calculated Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
AT Hysteresis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Limit Cycle MV Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Input Digital Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Additional PV Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
Manipulated Variable (MV) Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
Automatic Display Return Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Alarm 1 Latch, Alarm 2 Latch, Alarm 3 Latch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Protect Function Group Move Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
Input Error Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
Cold Junction Compensation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
MB Command Logic Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
PV Color Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
PV Stable Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Alarm 1 ON Delay, Alarm 2 ON Delay, Alarm 3 ON Delay . . 5-85
Alarm 1 OFF Delay, Alarm 2 OFF Delay, Alarm 3 OFF Delay 5-86
Input Shift Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
MV at Stop and Error Addition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Auto/Manual Selection Addition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Robust Tuning (RT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
Heater Short Alarm (HSA) Use (900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . 5-88
Heater Short Alarm (HSA) Latch (900-TC8, 900-TC16). . . . . . 5-89
1-8
Table of Contents
Heater Short Alarm (HSA) Hysteresis

(900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
Loop Break Alarm (LBA) Detection Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Loop Break Alarm (LBA) Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Loop Break Alarm (LBA) Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Control Output 1 Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Control Output 2 Assignment (900-TC8 & 900-TC16) . . . . . . 5-93
Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment (900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . 5-94
Auxillary Output 3 Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
Character Select LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Soak Time Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Alarm SP Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
Manual MV Limit Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
PV Rate of Change Calculation Period. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Heater Overcurrent Use (900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
Heater Overcurrent Latch (900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
Heater Overcurrent Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
(900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
PF Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
Monitor/ Setting Item * (*: 1 to 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102
PV/SP Display Screen Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
MV Display Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
PV Decimal Point Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
PV Status Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
SV Status Display Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
Display Refresh Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
Control Output 2 ON/OFF Count Monitor
(900-TC8 & 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count Alarm Set Value
(900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
Control Output 2 ON/OFF Count Alarm Set Value
(900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
ON/OFF Counter Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
Move to Calibration Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
Communications Setting Function Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
Protocol Setting
Communications Unit No.
Communications Baud Rate
Communications Data Length
Communications Stop Bits
Communications Parity
Send Data Wait Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
Table of Contents
1-9
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting & Error
Indication
Error Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Range Exceeded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AD Converter Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Value Exceeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater Burnout Alarm (HBA)
Heater Short Alarm (HSA)
Heater Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-5
Appendix A
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Heater Burnout Alarm (HBA), Heater Short Alarm (HSA), and
Heater Overcurrent Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
900-CPOEM1 USB-Serial Conversion Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Current Transformer (CT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Approximate External Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Sensor Input Setting
and Indication Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Control Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Appendix B
Parameter Operations List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Function Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Setup Function Group Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
Parameter Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17
Appendix C
Calibration
Parameter Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Registering Calibration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
User Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Calibrating Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Registering Calibration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Calibrating Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Calibrating 050 mV Analog Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Calibrating Platinum Resistance Thermometers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
Calibrating Analog Input (e.g., 420 mA Analog Input) . . . . . . . . C-14
Calibrating an Analog Current Input (900-TC8 & 900-TC16) . C-14
1-10
Table of Contents
Calibrating an Analog Voltage (e.g., 15V DC) Input

(900-TC8 & 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
Checking Indication Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
Checking Accuracy of a Thermocouple or Non-Contact
Temperature Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
Checking Indication Accuracy of a Platinum Resistance
Thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-19
Analog Input (900-TC & 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
Appendix D
Glossary
Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Index
Preface
Conventions Used in This

Manual
Meanings of Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in parameter names, figures, and in text
explanations. These abbreviations mean the following:
Table P.A
Symbol
Term
PV
Process value
SP
Set point
SV
Set value
AT
Auto-tuning
ST
Self-tuning
HB
Heater Burnout
HS
Heater Short
EU
Engineering unit
OC
Overcurrent
LBA
Loop Burnout Alarm
A heater short indicates that the heater remains ON even when the control output from the Temperature
Controller is OFF because the SSR has failed or for any other reason.
EU stands for Engineering Unit. EU is used as the minimum unit for engineering units such as C, m, and g.
The size of EU varies according to the Input Type.
For example, when the input temperature setting range is 200+1300C, 1 EU is 1C, and when the input
temperature setting range is 20.0+500.0C, 1 EU is 0.1C.
For analog inputs, the size of EU varies according to the decimal point position of the scaling setting, and 1 EU
becomes the minimum scaling unit.
Note: For additional definitions of terms used in this manual, refer to

Appendix D, Glossary.
P-i
Publication 900-UM007C-EN-E - January 2011
P-ii
Preface
Series B Controllers
Series B Upgrades
Series B controllers have the following upgrades.
900-TC8x
Although the upgraded controllers are compatible with the previous
controllers, terminal arrangements have been changed. Terminal sizes and
panel mounting depth have not been changed.
Other changes are outlined in the following tables. Refer to the relevant pages
in the manual for details.
900-TC16x
The upgraded controllers are basically compatible with the previous
controllers. Terminal arrangements, terminal sizes, and panel mounting depth
have not been changed.
900-TC32x
Model numbers have changed accompanying the introduction of universal
input capability. The default setting of the input type parameter of the
900-TC32x (models with resistance thermometers) has been changed from a
Pt100 resistance thermometer to a K thermocouple. Make sure the setting of
the input type parameter agrees with the temperature sensor that is being used.
The terminal block has also been changed, which means the wiring methods
and terminal arrangement are different.
Preface
P-iii
Table P.B
Series A
900-TC16
Series B
ALM1
ALM1
ALM2
ALM2
ALM3
ALM3
HA
HA
OUT1 STOP
OUT1 STOP
OUT2 CMW MANU
OUT2 CMW MANU
ALM indicator was changed to SUB indicator

SUB1 SUB2
ALM1 ALM2
HA
HA
ALM3
SUB3
900-TC8
OUT1
OUT2 STOP
CMW
MANU
OUT1 STOP
OUT2
Number of displays: 2 (PV and SV)
CMW
CMW
MANU
Number of displays: 3 (PV, SV, and MV)

ALM indicator was changed to SUB indicator.
CMW STOP OUT
STOP OUT
SUB1
MANU
900-TC32
Display Segments PV: 7 segments, SV: 7
segments
Character Heights PV: 7 mm, SV: 3.5 mm
Display Segments PV: 11 segments, SV: 11

segments
Character Heights PV: 7.5 mm, SV: 3.6 mm
Changes to Display Contents AL LED indicator
eliminated, LED indicators and key indicator added
A 2-level display is configured when shipped from the factory. A 3-level display is activated if parameters are
initialized.
P-iv
Preface
Terminal Arrangements
Table P.C Terminal Arrangements
Series A
Series B
Voltage output
14
15
Control Output 2
12 VDC, 21 mA
Long-life relay
output
14
15
Control Output 2
250 VAC, 3 A
(Resistive load)
900-TC8
18
19
B
B
14
One CT
Two CTs
+
CT1
15
15
16
TC/Pt universal input Analog input
Control Output 2
CT2
CT2
mA
Control Output 2
14
CT1
16
17
One CT
Two CTs
17
DO NOT
USE
18
DO NOT
USE
19
19
DO NOT
USE
mA
20
DO NOT
USE
DO NOT
USE
TC/Pt universal input
Analog input
Terminals 16...20 were changed and 1...15 were not.

900-TC16 ---
No change for terminal layout

RS-495
Communications B(+)
A(-)
7
1
Input
Power
Supply
900-TC32
DO NOT
USE
10
11
4
Control
Output 1
Universal
+ TC/Pt Input
12
6
Auxillary
Output 1
100 to 240 VAC

24 VAC/DC (no polarity)
Number of terminals: 9 (1 to 9)
Input terminals: 7 to 9
RS-485 communication terminals: 5 & 6
A
DO NOT
USE
Number of terminals: 14 (1 to 14)

Input terminals: 10 to 12
RS-485 communication terminals: 7 & 8
Preface
P-v
Body Removal
Table P.D Body Removal
Series A
Series B
Removal using hooks
Removal using screws
900-TC8
900-TC16 ---
No change for body removal
900-TC32 ---
No change for body removal
900-TC8, 900-TC16, &

900-TC32 Ratings
Table P.E 900-TC8, 900-TC16, & 900-TC32 Ratings
Series A
---
The following types of thermocouple input

were added: W and PLII.
Input range for E thermocouple: 0...600 C
Input range increased for E thermocouple:

-200...600 C
Thermocouple: 0.5% PV or 1C,

whichever is greater) 1 digit
Platinum resistance thermometer:
(0.5%PV or 1C, whichever is
greater) 1 digit
Analog input: 0.5% FS digit

(0.2%PV or .08C, whichever is
greater) 1 digit
Input sensor types for thermocouple inputs
Input accuracy
Series B
P-vi
Preface
900-TC8, 900-TC16, &

900-TC32 Ratings
Table P.E 900-TC8, 900-TC16, & 900-TC32 Ratings
Series A
Series B
---
The following types of thermocouple input

were added: W and PLII.
Input range for E thermocouple: 0...600 C
Input range increased for E thermocouple:

-200...600 C

(0.5%PV or 1C, whichever is
greater) 1 digit

(0.2%PV or .08C, whichever is
greater) 1 digit
Influence of signal source resistance
Thermocouple: 0.1C/ (except B,

R, S), 0.2C/ (B, R, S)
0.4C/
Thermocouple: 0.1C/ (for all

specifications)
0.1C/
Current outputs
Current output resolution, approx.:

2,700
Current output resolution, approx.:

10,000
250 VAC, 1A (900-TC16 & 900-TC32)
250VAC, 3A (900-TC16)
250VAC, 2A (900-TC32)
Input sensor types for thermocouple inputs
Input accuracy
Alarm outputs
Characteristics
Table P.F Characteristics
Series A
Series B
---
PV Status Display
PF Key Added
Front Panel
(900-TC8)
PF Key
Inputs
---
PV/SP display selection for

three-level display
---
Square root extraction (for models

with analog inputs)
Preface
P-vii
Table P.F Characteristics
Outputs
Controls
Alarms
Other
Communications
Characteristics
Series A
Series B
---
Control output ON/OFF count

alarm
---
MV change rate limiter
---
40% AT
---
Automatic cooling coefficient

adjustment for heating/cooling
control
---
PV rate of change alarm
---
OC alarm (only for models with

heater burnout detection)
---
Inverting direct/reverse operation

using event inputs or
communications commands
Table P.G
Series A
Series B
Double word access only
Word access and double

word access
Communication
Service
---
Composite Read from

Variable Area and
Composite Write to
Variable Area
Communications
buffer size
40 bytes
217 bytes
Baud rate
38.4 kbits/s max. (900-TC08, 900-TC16)

57.6 kbits/s max.
19.2 kbits/s max. (900-TC32)
External
communications
RS-485/RS-232C external
communications and communications
via 900BuilderLite cannot be used at
the same time.
Communication
Access Size
RS-485/RS-232C external
communications and
communications via
900BuilderLite can be
used at the same time.
P-viii
Preface
Other Upgrades
Table P.H
Series A
Mounting Bracket
(900-TC8 only)
Series B
Modified section
Note: The mounting bracket for the Series A

models cannot be used for Series B models.
Terminal Cover for 900-TC16
Note: The terminal covers for the Series A

Terminal Cover for 900-TC8
Note: The terminal covers for the Series A

Preface
P-ix
Option Units
(Series B Controller Compatible One Option Unit per Controller)
This unit provides communications event input etc. functionality.
Table P.I
Bulletin No.
Name
900-TC8
(Series B)
Communications Unit
900-TC16
(Series B)
Function
Cat. No. (Series)
RS-232C communications
900-TC8232 (B)
RS-485 communications
900-TC8COM(B)
Event Input Unit
Event Input
900-TC8EIM(A)
Communications and 1-Phase Heater Burnout Unit

and Heater Short
RS-485 communications with

single-phase heater burnout (open) and
heater short-circuit failure detection
900-TC16NCOM(B)
Event Input Unit with 1-Phase Heater Burnout and

Heater Short
Event Input with single-phase heater

burnout (open) and heater short-circuit
failure detection
900-TC16NEIM(B)
Event Input Unit
Event Input
900-TC16NACEIM(B)
Communications Unit
RS-485 communications
900-TCNACCOM(B)
Communications and 3-Phase Heater Burnout and

Heater Short Unit
RS-485 communications with 3-phase

heater burnout (open) and heater
short-circuit failure detection
900-TC16NCOMP3(B)
Communications and Second Voltage (SSR) Output

Unit
RS-485 communications and a second

voltage (SSR) output
900-TC16NCOMV2(B)
1-Phase Heater Burnout and second voltage (SSR)

output
1-Phase Heater burnout (open) and

heater short-circuit failure detection
with a second control voltage (SSR)
output
900-TC16P1V2(B)
Enables direct RS-232 connection to personal computer using 900BuilderLite software. A Cat. No. 900-CP1X cable or equivalent is
also required.
Provides two event inputs. Allows selecting up to 4 different pre-configured set points, controller Run/Stop or Auto/Manual mode,
from 2 external inputs.
Heater burnout is not available for 0...20 or 420 mA analog output style 900-TC16 controllers such as the 900-TC16AC.
To obtain 57.6 k baud rate, Series B communication units must be used with any Series A or Series B 900-TC8 controller catalog
number.
Series B option units must be used with Series B 900-TC16 controllers. Series A option units cannot be used with Series B controllers
and vice versa.
Series B provides 57.6 K baud rate.
P-x
Preface
How to Read Display

Symbols
The following table shows the relationship between the symbols exhibited on
the controllers front panel displays to alphabet characters.
Table P.J 11 Segment Display Selection
Symbol
A B C D E F G H I
J K L M
Alphabet
Symbol
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Alphabet
The Character Select parameter in the Advanced Setting function group can be
turned OFF to display the following 7-segment characters.
Table P.K 7 Segment Characters
Symbol
A B C D E F G H I
J K L M
Alphabet
Symbol
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Alphabet
Chapter
Bulletin 900 Input & Output Overview
I/O Configurations & Main

Functions
Figure 1.1 900-TC8 I/O Configuration
Temperature Input
or Analog Input
Control
Section
Control Output
Heating
Control Output
Cooling
CT1 Input
CT2 Input
Control Ouput 1
Heating/Cooling
Control Ouput 2
Auxillary Output 3
Auxillary Output 3
Auxillary Output 2
Auxillary Output 2
Auxillary Output 1
HB Alarm
Event Inputs
2 Channels
Set point input functions
from external digital switches:
RUN/STOP
Program Start
Auto/Manual
Auxillary Output 1
HS Alarm
Overcurrent Alarm
Input Error
Simple Program
END Output
QQ303T
Communications
Function
1-1
1-2

Temperature Input
or Analog Input
Control
Section
Control Output
Heating
Control Output
Cooling
Control Ouput 1
Control Ouput 2
Heating/Cooling
CT1 Input
CT2 Input
Auxillary Output 2
Auxillary Output 2
Auxillary Output 1
Event Inputs
2 Channels
HB Alarm
Auxillary Output 1
Set point input functions

from external digital switches:
RUN/STOP
Program Start
Auto/Manual
HS Alarm
Overcurrent Alarm
Input Error
Simple Program
END Output
Communications
Function
QQ303T
1-3

Temperature
Input
Control
Section
Control Output
(Heating)
Control Output
(Cooling)
Alarm 1
Control
Output 1
Heating/
Cooling
Standard
Auxillary
Output 1
Input Error
Program End
Output
Communications
Function
Bulletin 900-TC8, 900-TC16, and 900-TC32 temperature controllers allow the

user to:
Select from thermocouple and platinum RTD temperature sensors, plus
non-contact temperature sensor and analog voltage or current inputs.
Individually assign the function for each output by changing the
configured values of the following parameters: Control Output 1,
Assignment, Control Output 2 Assignment, Aux 1 Assignment, Aux 2
Assignment , and Aux 3 Assignment (900-TC8).
Select heating and cooling control in addition to standard control
Select AT (Auto-Tuning) and ST (Self-Tuning) as tuning functions
Use multi-SP, switch between automatic and manual operation,
start/reset the simple program function, and initiate the RUN/STOP
function according to event input.
Use the Heater Burnout Alarm (HBA) and Heater Short Alarm (HSA)
function.
Use the communications function (for units equipped with the optional
communications function modules)
Calibrate sensor input
Configure the color of the PV display to switch between amber, red, and
green, making the process status easy to understand at a glance.
The Bulletin 900-TC32 Temperature Controller does not support this function
1-4
Features
Watertight construction (equivalent to IP66 indoor use).
Conform to cULus/IEC safety standards and EMC standards.
Main Functions
The following introduces the main functions of the Bulletin 900-TC8,
900-TC16, and 900-TC32 temperature controllers. For details on each
function and how to use them, refer to Chapter 3 and onward.
Input Sensor Types The following input sensors can be connected
for temperature input:
Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W, PL11
Infrared non-contact temperature sensor type: Type K thermocouple
(1070XC), K (60120XC), K (115165XC), K (160260XC)
Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100, JPt100
Analog millivolt input: 050 mV
High level analog inputs:
Current input:420 mA DC, 0 to 20 mA DC
Voltage input:15V DC, 05V DC, 010V DC
Control Output Control output is either an On/Off
electro-mechanical relay (EMR) ON/OFF triac output (AC only),
On/Off voltage (input to solid-state relay) output, or analog current
(DC: 4...20 mA or 020 mA) output , Refer to Table 1.B or 1.D.
Triac Relay Outputs use semiconductors for switching when
closing andopening the AC voltage circuit, thereby eliminating relay
chatter and arcing and improving durability versus an EMR. However, if
high levels of noise or surge are imposed between the output terminals,
short-circuit faults may occasionally occur. If the triac output becomes
permanently shorted, there is the danger of fire due to overheating of
the heater element. To avoid this danger, design safety into the system,
including measures to prevent excessive temperature rise and fire. Take
countermeasures such as installing a surge absorber. As an additional
safety measure, provide error detection in the control loop. Use the
Loop Break Alarm (LBA) and Heater Short Alarm (HSA) that are
provided for Bulletin 900 temperature controllers.
The Bulletin 900-TC32 Temperature Controller does not support this function
1-5
Figure 1.4 Triac Diagram
Triac
Relay Output
Varistor
Inductive
Load
1
Varistor
2
Select a surge absorber that satisfies the following conditions.
1-6
Table 1.A Surge Absorber Selection

Voltage Used
Varistor Voltage
100120V AC
240270V
200240V AC
440470V
Surge Resistance
1000 A minimum
Always connect an AC load to the triac relay output. The output will not
turn OFF if a DC load is connected.
Alarms Alarms are supported on the Bulletin 900 temperature
controllers. You can configure the alarm type and alarm value, or Upper
and Lower-Limit alarms.
If necessary, a more comprehensive alarm function can be achieved by
configuring the Standby Sequence, Alarm Hysteresis, Close in
Alarm/Open in Alarm and Alarm Latch ON/OFF parameters.
When the input error output is configured to ON, Alarm Output 1
turns ON when an input error occurs.
Control Adjustment Optimum PID constants can be configured
easily by using the AT (Auto-Tuning) and ST (Self-Tuning) parameters.
Event Input When the optional event input unit is mounted, the
following functions can be achieved by event input:
Multiple set point selection (multi-SP max. 4 points), RUN/STOP
mode change switching between automatic and manual operation, and
starting/stopping the simple program. Refer to Table 1.C and 1.E.
HBA and HS Alarms The Heater Burnout Alarm (HBA) and
Heater Short Alarm (HSA) and heater overcurrent function is
supported by selecting the appropriate controller (900-TC8) or option
module (900-TC16). Refer to Table 1.B for the TC8 and Table 1.E for
the TC16.
Communications Function Personal computer (PC)
communicationsare supported when the option communications unit is
mounted on the temperature controller. Refer to Table 1.C and 1.E.
Note: The PC must have 900BuilderLite software installed.
Note: 900-TC protocol is an integrated general-purpose serial
communications protocol.
Note: Modbus is a communications control method conforming to the RTU.
Mode of Modicon Inc.'s Modbus Protocol.
Note: The 900-TC16 and 900-TC32 do not support the RS-232C interface.
Controller Hardware
Versions
1-7
The following tables provide a list of controller base features with associated
Cat. Nos.
1-8
900-TC8
Table 1.B Controller Versions
DIN Size
(mm)
No. of
Alarms
Sensor Input
Type
Power
Supply
Voltage
Control
Output 1
Type
Control
Output 2
Type
Supports
Heater Burnout
Alarm
Cat. No. for

Enhanced
900-TC8 Line
Relay On/Off
NA
Yes (1-Phase)
900-TC8RGTH1Z25
NA
No
900-TC8RGTZ25
Volt On/Off
(SSR)
No
900-TC8RVGTZ25
NA
Yes (3-Phase)
900-TC8RGTH3Z25
NA
Yes (1-Phase)
900-TC8VGTH1Z25
NA
No
900-TC8VGTZ25
Triac On/Off
(3 A)
No
900-TC8VYGTZ25
Volt On/Off
(SSR)
No
900-TC8VVGTZ25
NA
Yes (3-Phase)
900-TC8VGTH3Z25
NA
No
900-TC8ACGTZ25
Triac On/Off
(3 A)
No
900-TC8ACYGTZ25
Volt On/Off
(SSR)
No
900-TC8ACVGTZ25
NA
Yes (1-Phase)
900-TC8RGTH1U25
NA
No
900-TC8RGTU25
Volts On/Off
(SSR)
NA
Yes (1-Phase)
900-TC8VGTH1U25
NA
No
900-TC8VGTU25
Analog
NA
No
900-TC8ACGTU25
Relay On/Off
NA
Yes (1-Phase)
900-TC8RABH1Z25
NA
No
900-TC8RABZ25
NA
Yes (1-Phase)
900-TC8VABH1Z25
NA
No
900-TC8VABZ25
Triac On/Off
(3 A)
No
900-TC8VYABZ25
NA
No
900-TC8ACABZ25
Volts On/Off
(SSR)
100240V
AC
Thermocouple
or RTD
Analog
1/8th DIN
(48 x 96 x 78)
Relay On/Off
24V AC/DC
Analog
Current and
Voltage
100
240V AC
Volts On/Off
(SSR)
Analog
Note: To implement the HBA and HSA function, a current transformer (Cat.
No. 900-CT1 or 900-CT2) is required. A current transformer is NOT
provided with the controller.
Note: When the heating and cooling function or the HBA or HSA is used,
one of the alarm outputs will be disabled for each function used.
1-9
Table 1.C Controller Option Units

Event Out Comms Cat. No. for Enhanced Option Units Series
Option Unit
RS232
900-TC8232B
RS485
900-TC8COMB
Yes
900-TC8EIMA
900-TC16
Table 1.D Controller Versions
DIN Size
(in mm)
Number of
Alarms
Sensor Input
Type
Power Supply
Voltage
Control Output
Type
Cat. No for Enhanced

900-TC16 Line
100240V AC
Relay On/Off
900-TC16RGTZ25
Triac On/Off (3 A)
900-TC16YGTZ25
Volts On/Off (SSR)
900-TC16VGTZ25
Analog Current
900-TC16ACGTZ25
Relay On/Off
900-TC16RGTU25
Volts On/Off (SSR)
900-TC16VGTU25
Analog Current
900-TC16ACGTU25
Relay On/Off
900-TC16RABZ25
Triac On/Off (3 A)
900-TC16YABZ25
Volts On/Off (SSR)
900-TC16VABZ25
Analog Current
900-TC16ACABZ25
Relay On/Off
900-TC16RABU25
Volts On/Off (SSR)
900-TC16VABU25
Analog Current
900-TC16ACABU25
Thermocouple or
RTD
24V AC/DC
1/16th DIN
100240V AC
Analog Current and

Voltage
24V AC/DC
1-10
Table 1.E Controller Option Units

Heater
Burnout
Event Out Comms
Voltage (SSR)
Control Output 2
Cat. No. for Enhanced

Option Units
Series
1-Phase HB
RS485
900-TC16NCOM
RS485
900-TC16NACCOM
1-Phase HB
Yes
900-TC16NEIM
Yes
900-TC16NACEIM
3-Phase HB
RS485
900-TC16NCOMP3
RS485
Yes
900-TC16NCOMV2
1-Phase HB
Yes
900-TC16P1V2
Series B option units must be used with Series B controllers. DO NOT use series B option units
with Series A controllers.
900-TC32
Table 1.F Controller Versions
DIN Size
(in mm)
1/16th DIN
Number of
Alarms
Sensor Input
Type
Thermocouple
or RTD
Power Supply
Voltage
Control Output
Type
Comm Function
(RS-445)
Cat. No for Enhanced

900-TC32 Line
100240V AC
Relay On/Off
Yes
900-TC32CRGTZ25
Volts On/Off (SSR)
Yes
900-TC32CVGTZ25
Relay On/Off
No
900-TC32RGTZ25
Volts On/Off (SSR)
No
900-TC32CVGTZ25
Relay On/Off
Yes
900-TC32CRGTZ25
Volts On/Off (SSR)
Yes
900-TC32CVGTZ25
Relay On/Off
No
900-TC32RGTZ25
Volts On/Off (SSR)
No
900-TC32CVGTZ25
24V AC/DC
Front Panels & General

Functions
1-11
Figure 1.5 Bulletin 900-TC8
Operation Indicators
SUB1 SUB2
HA
SUB3
PV
Temperature Unit
No.1 Display
SV
OUT1 STOP
MV
OUT2 CMW MANU
No.2 Display
No.3 Display
Up Key
Mode Key
PF
A/M
Function Group Key
Function Key/
Auto/Manual Key
Down Key
Temperature Unit
No. 1 Display
No. 2 Display
Up Key
Function Group Key
Mode Key
Down Key
1-12
Display Meanings
SUB1 SUB2
HA
SUB3
OUT1 STOP
OUT2 CMW MANU
Display
Meaning
No. 1
Displays the Process Value or Parameter Type during configuration. Lights for
approximately 1 second during startup.
No. 2
Displays the Set Point, parameter operation read value, manipulated variable,
or during configuration, the value of the displayed (No. 1 display) parameter.
No. 3
(900-TC8 only)
Displays MV, soak time remaining, or multi SP. Lights for approximately 1
second during startup. A 2-level display is configured when shipped from the
factory. A 3-level display is activated if parameters are initialized.
1-13
Operation Indicators 1,2,3...

Operation
Indicator
Definition
Function
SUB 1
Sub 1
Lights when the function configured for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter
is ON.
SUB2
Sub 2
900-TC8 and 900-TC16 Only:

Lights when the function configured for the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameter
is ON.
SUB3
Sub 3
900-TC8 Only:
Lights when the function is configured for the Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment
parameter is ON.
HA
Heater Burnout, Heater Short Alarm, Heater

Overcurrent Detection Output Display

Lights when a heater burnout, heater short alarm, or heater overcurrent occurs.
OUT1
Control Output 1
Lights when the control output function assigned to control output 1 turns ON. For a
current output, however, OFF for a 0% output only.
OUT2
Control Output 2

Lights when the control output function assigned to control output 2 turns ON. For a
current output, however, OFF for a 0% output only.
STOP
Operation Stopped
Lights when operation is stopped. During operation, this indicator lights when
operation is stopped by an event or by key input using the RUN/STOP function.
CMW
Communications Writing
Lights when communications writing is enabled and is not lit when it is disabled.
MANU
Manual Mode
Lights when the auto/manual mode is configured to manual mode.
Key
Lights when setting change protect is ON (i.e., when the up and down Keys are
disabled by protected status.
Temperature Unit
The temperature unit is displayed when the display unit parameter is configured to a
temperature. Indication is determined by the currently selected Temperature Unit
parameter value. When the parameter value is configured for C, c is displayed, and
when configured for F, f is displayed. The display flashes during self-tuning (ST)
operation.
c or f
1-14
Basic Keypad Functions

The following describes the basic functions of the front panel keys.
Key
Definition
Function
Function (Auto/Manual)
900-TC8 Only:
This is a function key. When it is pressed for at least 1 second, the function configured in the PF
Setting parameter will operate. Example: When A-M (auto/manual) is selected in the PF Setting
parameter (initial value: A-M), the key operates as an auto/manual switch, switching between
Auto Mode and Manual Mode. If the key is pressed for more than 1 second (regardless of key
release timing), the mode will switch.
Function Group Select
Press this key to select the desired function group. The groups are selected in the following order:
Operation function group Adjustment function group, Initial Setting function group
Communications Setting function group.
Mode Select
Press this key to select the various parameters within each function group. The selection of
parameters can be reversed by holding this key down.
Up
Each press of this key increments values displayed on the No. 2 (SV) display. Holding down this
key continuously increments values.
Down
Each press of this key decrements values displayed on the No. 2 (SV) display. Holding down this
key continuously decrements values.
PF
A/M
+
+
or
+
Key Combination
This key combination settings the Bulletin 900 to the Protect function group. For details on the
Function Group and Mode Select Protect function group, refer to Chapter 5 , Parameter Functions & Definitions.
Key Combination
Function Group and Up or
Function Group and Down
To restrict changing parameter values and to prevent accidental or incorrect operations, these
keys require simultaneously pressing of the
key along with the
or
key.
The
key applies only to the parameter configured for the Password to Move to Protect
function group . Refer to Chapter 5 for more detailed information on this function group.
Chapter
Preparations
Hardware Installation
Approximate Dimensions
The recommended panel thickness for mounting the 900-TC16 and 900-TC32
is 1 to 5 mm and the 900-TC8 is 1 to 8 mm.
Note: Dimensions are in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended to be used
for manufacturing purposes.To convert millimeters to inches, multiply
by 0.0394.
Figure 2.1 900-TC8
6.0
Allen-Bradley
79.2
900-TC8
112
20
Front View
Side View
Back View
Figure 2.2 900-TC16

48 48
900-TC16
44.8 44.8
Allen-Br
Allen-Bradley
2-1
Publication 900-UM007D-EN-E- January 2011
2-2
Preparations
Figure 2.3 900-TC32

2
99
48
44.8
35
10
11
12
24
22
1
Panel Cutout Dimensions

Dimensions are in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended to be used for
manufacturing purposes.
Figure 2.4 900-TC8
(48 x number of units -2.5)
45
92
120 min.
92
60 min.
Preparations
2-3
Figure 2.5 900-TC16

60 min.
(48 x number of units -2.5)
45
60
min.
45
45
Figure 2.6 900-TC32
2-4
Preparations
Horizontal group-mounting of two or more temperature controllers, or

mounting temperature controllers above each other may cause heat to
build up inside the temperature controllers. This will shorten their
service life. When mounting temperature controllers like this, consider
forced cooling measures, such as a cooling fan.
If forced air cooling is used, limit cooling to the terminal block. Rapid
variation or transients in temperature at the terminal block may result in
a measurement error.
System Wiring and Installation Guidelines
ATTENTION
Risk of Electrical Shock

Devices are Open Type, Listed Process Control
Equipment and must be mounted in an enclosure.
More than one disconnect switch may be required to
de-energize the equipment before servicing.
Signal inputs are SELV, limited energy.
To reduce risk of fire or electrical shock, do not
interconnect the outputs of different Class 2 circuits.
Disconnect all power (including field device) before
installing and/or servicing.
Do not touch the controllers wiring terminals while
the power is ON. Doing so may cause an electric
shock.
Preparations
ATTENTION
2-5
Do not allow metal fragments or lead wire scraps to

fall inside the Bulletin 900 Controller. These may cause
electric shock, fire, or malfunction.
Never disassemble, repair, or modify the Bulletin 900
Controller with line or field device power applied.
Doing so may cause electric shock, fire, or
malfunction.
Do not use the Bulletin 900 Controller in flammable
and explosive gas atmospheres.
Use the Bulletin 900 Controller within the rated supply
voltage. Not doing so may cause controller damage or
fire.
Configure all controller settings according to the
control target of the Bulletin 900 Controller. If the
settings are not appropriate for the control target, the
controller may operate in an unexpected manner,
resulting in damage to the product or personal injury.
To maintain safety in the event of a product
malfunction, always take appropriate safety measures,
such as installing an alarm on a separate line to prevent
excessive temperature rise. If a malfunction prevents
proper control, an accident may result.
Do not wire unused terminals.
Make sure to observe correct polarity when wiring the
controller terminals.
Power supply, input, output, and communication
terminals (for models with communications) have
basic insulation between them.
When double insulation is required, apply
supplemental insulation defined in IEC 60664 that is
suitable for the maximum operating voltage with
clearances or solid insulation.
2-6
Preparations
ATTENTION
Do not use the Bulletin 900 Controller in the following

places which might exceed its specifications:
Places subject to dust or corrosive gases (in
particular, sulfide gas, and ammonia gas)
Places subject to high humidity, condensation, or
freezing
Places subject to direct sunlight
Places subject to vibration and large shocks
Places subject to splashing liquid or oily atmosphere
Places directly subject to heat radiated from heating
equipment
Places subject to intense temperature changes
To allow heat to escape, do not block the area around
the Bulletin 900 Controller. Ensure that enough space
is left for the heat to escape. Do not block the
ventilation holes on the casing.
Cleaning: Do not use paint thinner or the equivalent.
Use standard grade alcohol to clean the Bulletin 900
Controller.
Use within the following temperature and humidity
ranges:
Temperature: 10+55 C
Humidity: 2585% (with no icing or condensation)
If the Bulletin 900 Controller is installed inside a
control panel, the ambient temperature must be kept to
under 55 C, including the temperature around the
controller.
If the Bulletin 900 Controller is subjected to heat
radiation, use a fan to cool the surface of the controller
to under 55 C.
Never place heavy objects on, or apply pressure to the
Bulletin 900 Controller as it may cause it to deform and
deteriorate during use or storage.
Preparations
ATTENTION
2-7
Store within the following temperature and humidity

ranges:
Temperature: 25+65 C
Humidity: 2585% (with no icing or condensation)
Avoid using the Bulletin 900 Controller in places near a
radio, television configured, or wireless installation.
These devices can cause radio disturbances which may
adversely affect the performance of the Bulletin 900
Controller.
Panel Mounting 900-TC8

How to Attach the Bulletin 900-TC8 on the Panel
Figure 2.7 900-TC8
Upper Panel
Mounting
Adaptor
Gasket material for
NEMA 4X (waterproof)
material
Lower Panel
Mounting
Adaptor
Control
Panel
1. If water-proofing is required, ensure the gasket material is inserted

between the front of the controllers case and the control panel.
2. Insert the Bulletin 900-TC8 into the mounting hole in the panel
(18 mm panel thickness).
3. Pull the upper and lower panel mounting adapters along the
Bulletin 900-TC8 body from the rear of the case up to the panel, and
fasten temporarily.
2-8
Preparations
4. Tighten the upper and lower adapter mounting screws alternately with
only one turn of the screwdriver at a time to maintain an even torque
balance. Tighten the screw until the ratchet mechanism operates.
5. To allow heat to escape, do not block the area around the
Bulletin 900-TC8 Temperature Controller. (Ensure that enough space is
left for the heat to escape.) Do not block the ventilation holes on the
casing.
6. Allow as much space as possible between the Bulletin 900-TC8 and
devices that generate powerful high-frequency noise (e.g.,
high-frequency welders, high-frequency sewing machines) or surges.
7. Install the controller so that it is horizontal (can read the display
properly).
Note: When group mounting two or more Bulletin 900-TC8s, make sure that
the surrounding temperature does not exceed the allowable operating
temperature given in the specifications.
Mounting the Terminal Cover

To attach the terminal cover to the terminal block, slightly bend the terminal
cover, as shown below. The terminal cover cannot be attached in the opposite
direction.
Figure 2.8 900-TC8 Mounting the Terminal Cover
Enlarged Illustration of Terminal Section
Slightly bend the

terminal cover
in the direction shown
by the arrows.
Preparations
2-9
900-TC8 (Series B) Case Removal while Panel-Mounted

The control unit can be removed from its case whether or not it is mounted on
the control panel. This allows you to perform maintenance or to add option
units without opening the control panel enclosure or removing the terminal
compartment.
Figure 2.9 900-TC8 (Series B) Case Removal while Panel-Mounted
Tool Insertion
Holes
Top View
Rear
Case
(1)
Front
Panel
Gap
(2)
(3)
(1)
IMPORTANT
Flat-blade Screwdriver
(Unit: mm)
0.4
2.0
5.0
Ensure controller and I/O power is OFF before removing

the internal mechanism. When you remove the internal
mechanism from the housing, never touch electric
components inside or subject the internal mechanism to
shock.
1. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the two tool insertion holes (one on
the top and one on the bottom) to release the hooks.
2. Insert the flat-blade screwdriver in the gap between the front panel and
the rear case (two on the top and two on the bottom), and use it to pry
and pullout the front panel slightly. Then, pull out on the front panel
gripping both sides. Be sure not to impose excessive force on the panel.
Setting Up the 900-TC8 Controller with the Optional Units

If RS-232, RS-485 communications inputs are required, mount the RS-232
communications unit (Cat. No. 900-TC8232), the RS-485 communications
unit (Cat. No. 900-TC8COM), or the event input unit (Cat. No.
900-TC16EIM) in the Bulletin 900-TC8 controller. These units provide optical
isolation (approx. 32V DC) between the controller electronics and field input.
2-10
Preparations
Table 2.A
Name
Cat. No.
(Series)
Communications board
900-TC8COM (B) RS-485 Communications support
Event input unit
Function
900-TC8232 (B)
RS-232 Communications support
900-TC8EIM (A)
Event input support
One (1) unit per controller. This series of option units are compatible with Series A or Series B controllers.

How to Attach the Bulletin 900-TC16 on the Panel
To prevent electrostatic damage to the board, make sure you are properly
grounded before installing it. Follow the steps below.
Figure 2.10
(1)
(2) (3)
Location for Boards:

900-TC8EIM: Event Input
900-TC8232: RS-232
900-TC8COM: RS-485
1. Insert the controller through the hole in the panel from the front, and
push the panel mounting adapter on from the rear. Push the adapter up
to the back of the panel ensuring that the controller is pushed all the way
in, removing any gap between the controller, panel, and adapter. Finally,
use the two screws on the adapter to secure the unit in place. The
recommended panel thickness is 15 mm.
2. To mount the Bulletin 900-TC16 so that it is waterproof, insert the
waterproof packing on the Bulletin 900-TC16. The Bulletin 900-TC16
cannot be waterproofed when it is group-mounted in the horizontal
fashion.
3. Maintain the specified mounting space between each controller.
Preparations
2-11
4. Tighten the two screws on the adapter against the panel. Tighten the
two screws alternately keeping the torque to approximately
0.290.39 Nm (2.573.45 lb-in.).
5. To allow heat to escape, do not block the area around the
Bulletin 900-TC16 Temperature Controller. (Ensure that enough space
is left for the heat to escape.) Do not block the ventilation holes on the
casing.
6. Allow as much space as possible between the Bulletin 900-TC16 and
devices that generate powerful high-frequency noise (e.g.,
high-frequency welders, high-frequency sewing machines) or surges.
7. Install the controller so that it is horizontal (can read the display
properly).
How to Attach the 900-TC16 Wiring Terminal Block Cover

Figure 2.11
Panel
Safety Terminal
Block Cover
Rear Case
Terminal Block
Panel Mounting
Adaptor
Front Case
Make sure that the UP mark on the adapter is facing up, and then fit the
terminal cover into the holes on the top and bottom. The Bulletin 900-TC16 is
provided with a protective terminal block cover (finger protection per
VDE 0106).
Setting Up the 900-TC16 Controller with the Optional Units

If RS-485 communications, Event Input, second Control Output, or Heater
Burnout functions are required, mount the appropriate option unit in the
Bulletin 900-TC16 controller.
900-TC16 Option Units

Table 2.B below provides the list of available options.
2-12
Preparations
Table 2.B
Function
Heater Burnout
& Heater Short
Event
Input
Comms.
Voltage (SSR)
Control Output 2
900-TC16 Option
Module Cat.
No.(Series)
1-Phase HB
RS485
900-TC16NCOM (B)
RS485
900-TC16NACCOM (B)
1-Phase HB
Yes
900-TC16NEIM (B)
Yes
900-TC16NACEIM (B)
3-Phase HB
RS485
900-TC16NCOMP3 (B)
RS485
Yes
900-TC16NCOMV2 (B)
1-Phase HB
Yes
900-TC16P1V2 (B)
One (1) option unit per controller.

The option unit provides optical isolation (approximately 32V DC) between the controller electronics and the
field input. Series B option units must be used with Series B controllers and vice versa.
Installing the Option Unit/Board in the Controller

Figure 2.12
(1)
(4)
(2)
Flat-blade Screwdriver
Units: mm
20 min.
(1)
(3)
Note: When you remove the internal mechanism from the housing, never
touch electric components inside or subject the internal mechanism to
shock.
Preparations
2-13

Mounting to the Panel
Figure 2.13
Note: For waterproof mounting, waterproof packing must be installed on the

controller. Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several
controllers. Waterproof packing is not necessary when there is no need
for the waterproofing function.
1. For waterproof mounting: Install waterproof packing on the
controller.
2. Insert the 900-TC32 into the mounting hole in the panel.
3. Push the adapter from the terminals up to the panel, and temporarily
fasten the 900-TC32
4. Tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter. Alternately tighten the
two screws little by little to maintain a balance. Tighten the screws to a
torque of 0.29 to 0.39 Nm.
2-14
Preparations
The body of the controller can be replaced by removing the terminal block
from the 900-TC32.
Figure 2.14
1. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the tool holes (one on the top and
one on the bottom) to release the hooks. Do not apply excessive force.
2. Pull the terminal block out while the hooks are released.
Preparations
Bulletin 900 Wiring

Terminals
2-15
Figure 2.15 900-TC8 (Series B) Terminal Arrangement
Option Units
Communications
100 to 240 VAC

24 VAC/VDC (no polarity)
Control output 1
Relay output
250 VAC, 5A
(resistive load)
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
12 VDC, 40 mA
Current output
0 to 20 mA DC
4 to 20 mA DC
Load: 600 max.
11
12
13
14
Input power supply
Control output 1
Event Inputs
EV2
EV1
CT1/CT2 Control Output 2
+
CT1
15
12 VDC, 21 mA
CT2
16
17
DO NOT
USE
18
DO NOT
USE
Auxiliary output 2
Triac output
250 VAC, 3 A
(resistive load)
19
10
20
DO NOT
USE
DO NOT
USE
mA
Auxiliary output 1
Auxiliary output
1, 2, 3
Control output 2
-
Auxiliary output 3
Control output 2
Voltage output
(for driving SSR)
900-TC8232 900-TC8COM
900-TC8EIM
RS-485
RS-232C
Event inputs
11
SD
11
B (+)
11
EV2
12
RD
12
12
EV
13
SG
13
DO NOT USE 13 CT1/CT2
B
TC/Pt universal input
DO NOT
USE
Analog input
A heater burnout alarm, heater short alarm,

heater overcurrent alarm, or input alarm is
sent to the output to which the alarm 1
function is assigned.
Relay outputs
250 VAC, 3 A
(resistive load)
Figure 2.16 900-TC16 Terminal Arrangement

Relay output
250V AC, 3 A
(Resistive load)
Auxiliary output (Relay output)
+
B
11
11
RS-485
EV1
EV2
12
13
Do not
connect.
12
13
EV1
EV2
14
CT1
900-TC16NACEIM
12
13
14
15
10
12
13
+
B
900-TC16NCOM
100 to 240V AC
24V AC/DC (no polarity)
11
11
Do not
connect.
12
13
12
14
15
12
13
14
14
Control Output 2
15
11
Control Output 2
13
CT1
15
11
Do not
connect.
CT2
14
B
RS-485
RS-485
CT1
15
Auxiliary output (Relay

Auxiliary output 2 output), 250V AC, 1 A
(Resistive load)
Auxiliary output 1, HBA/HS

alarm/input error
Input power supply
RS-485
14
15
11
Control output 1
Voltage output
A
+
12V DC, 21 mA
mA
B
Current output
4 to 20 mA DC
V
0 to 20 mA DC
B
Load 600 max.
+
+
Analog input TC/Pt
Multi-input
11
15
Do not
connect.
Voltage output
12V DC, 21 mA
12
13
14
CT1
15
900-TC16NEIM 900-TC16NACCOM 900-TC16NCOMP3 900-TC16NCOMV2 900-TC16PIV2
2-16
Preparations
Figure 2.17 900-TC32 Terminal Arrangement
Control Output 1
Relay Output 250 VAC, 2 A
(resistive load)
Voltage Output
12 VDC, 21 mA
(for driving SSR)
Auxillary Output 1
Relay Output 250 VAC, 2 A
(resistive load)
RS-495
Communications B(+)
A(-)
DO NOT
USE
DO NOT
USE
10
Input
Power
Supply
Control
Output 1
+
11
12
6
Auxillary
Output 1
Universal
TC/Pt Input
Preparations
2-17
Wiring Guidelines and Precautions

ATTENTION
Do not wire unused terminals.

Make sure to observe correct polarity when wiring the
controller terminals.
To reduce induction noise, separate the high-voltage or
large-current power lines from other lines, and avoid
parallel or common wiring with the power lines when
you are wiring to the terminals. We recommend using
separating pipes, ducts, or shielded lines.
Allow as much space as possible between the
Bulletin 900 Controller and devices that generate
powerful high-frequency noise (e.g., high-frequency
welders, high-frequency sewing machines) or surges.
Separate input leads and power lines in order to protect the

Bulletin 900-TC8, 900-TC16, 900-TC32, and its low voltage sensors
(e.g., thermocouple) lines from external noise.
For 900-TC32: Use a shielded AWG24 to AWG18 (cross-sectional area
of 0.205 to 0.823 mm2) twisted-pair cable. The stripping length is
6 to 8 mm.
We recommend using solderless lugs when wiring to the

Bulletin 900-TC8 and 900-TC16 screw terminals. However, if lugs are
not used, the controllers screw terminals will accept two solid or
stranded wires (no mixing) between 24 (0.205 mm2)...14 (2.081
mm2)AWG. Wire strip length 5...6 mm.
For 900-TC8 & 900-TC16: Tighten the terminal screws properly.
Tighten them to a torque 0.740.9 Nm (6.68 lb-in.) Loose screws
may cause malfunction. For 900-TC32: Tighten the terminal screws to a
torque of 0.5 Nm
Use the type of solderless lugs referenced in Figure 2.18 for your proper
Bulletin type.
2-18
Preparations
Figure 2.18 Wiring
7.2 mm max.
7.2 mm max.
Wiring
Power Supply
The controller requires an external power source for operation. For the
900-TC8 connect to terminals 1 and 2 and for the 900-TC16 connect to
terminals 9 and 10. The following table shows the specifications.
Table 2.C
Input Power Supply
Bulletin 900-TC8
Bulletin 900-TC16
100240V AC, 50/60 Hz
10VA
7.5VA
24V AC, 50/60 Hz
5.5VA
5VA
24V DC (not polarity sensitive)
4W
3W
ATTENTION
!
Use a power supply matched to the power specifications of

the Bulletin 900 Controller. Also, make sure that rated
voltage is attained within 2 seconds of turning the power
ON.
Preparations
2-19
When mounting a noise filter on the power supply, make sure to first check the
filters voltage and current capacity, and then mount the filter as close as
possible to the Bulletin 900 Controller. Reinforced insulation is applied to the
power supply I/O sections.
Wiring Input/Sensor Devices

Connect sensors to the terminals as follows according to the Input Type and
controller.
4
5
Thermocouple
Platinum resistance
thermometer
+
mA
V
+
Analog input
900-TC16 Input Sensor Wiring
18
19
20
Thermocouple
18
18
19
19
20
20
Platinum resistance
thermometer
mA
V
+
Analog input
900-TC8 Input Sensor Wiring
Input/Sensor Wiring Considerations

When the thermocouple leads are extended, make sure to use shielded
thermocouple extension wire matched to the type of thermocouple.
For a thermocouple, make sure to follow the polarity color code convention.
If there is a large error in the measurement values, make sure that the correct
sensor type is configured and for thermocouples that input compensation has
been properly configured.
RTDs can be either 2- or 3-wire types. If a 3-wire type is used, the controller
provides lead wire resistance compensation up to 5 resistance. If using 24
AWG lead wire, this is approximately 59 m of wire. Use larger gauge wire if
longer length is required.
For RTDs, the controller source is approximately 1 mA of current.
If a cooling fan is used in the panel enclosure, prevent only the terminal
block from being cooled when using thermocouples. Otherwise, this may
result in a measurement error.
2-20
Preparations
To reduce induced electrical noise, the leads on the temperature controllers

terminal block must be wired separately from large-voltage/large-current
power leads. Also, avoid wiring leads in parallel with power leads or in the
same wiring path. Other methods such as separating conduits and wiring
ducts, or using shield wire are also effective and recommended.
Wiring Control Output 1

The following diagrams show the available outputs and their internal
equalizing circuits.
Figure 2.19
+v
+v
+
L
GND
Relay
Voltage (SSR)
Analog Current
900-TC8 Control Output 1

+V
+V
1
+
L
2
Relay
GND 2
Voltage (SSR)
+v
+
L
+
L
Analog Current
Preparations
2-21
The following tables show the specifications for each output type.
Table 2.D 900-TC8
Output Type
Output 1 Specifications
Relay
250V AC, 5 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 100,000

operations
Voltage (PNP)
PNP type, 12V DC +15%/20%, 40 mA (with short-circuit

protection). Series B 12V DC 15%.
Current
DC 4 20 mA/DC 020 mA, resistive load: 600 max.

Resolution: Approx.10,000
Table 2.E 900-TC16

Output Type
Relay

operations
Triac (AC) relay
250V AC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 1,000,000

operations
Voltage (PNP)
PNP type, 12V DC 15%, 21 mA (with short-circuit protection)
Current
DC 420 mA/DC 020 mA, resistive load: 600 max.

Resolution: Approx. 10,000
Table 2.F 900-TC32

Output Type
Relay

operations
Voltage (PNP)
2-22
Preparations
Output Wiring Considerations

Do NOT connect a DC load to the Triac (AC) relay.
The PNP voltage (SSR) output (Control Output 1) is not electrically
isolated from the controllers internal circuits. SSR Control Output 2 of
the 900-TC16 is also not isolated. However, SSR Control Output 2 of
the 900-TC8 is isolated. When using a grounded thermocouple, do not
connect any control output terminals to earth ground. If the control
output terminals are connected to earth ground, errors will occur in the
measured temperature values as a result of ground loop leakage current.
For 900-TC8 & 900-TC16: The 4...20 and 020 mA analog output is
electrically isolated from the other controller circuits as follows:
Analog Output to Sensor Input: 500V AC 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
Analog Output to Alarm Output: 2000V AC 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
Analog Output to Input Power Supply: 2000V AC 50/60 Hz for 1
minute
The life expectancy of the electro-mechanical relay outputs vary greatly
with the switching capacity and other switching conditions. Always use
the output relays within their rated load and electrical life expectancy. If
an output relay is used beyond its life expectancy, its contacts may
become fused or burned.
Use the Bulletin 900 Controller within the rated load. Not doing so may
cause damage or fire.
Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that
generate noise (in particular, motors, transformers, solenoids, magnetic
coils, or other equipment that have an inductance component).
About 4 seconds are required for control and/or alarm outputs to turn
ON when the power is initially turned ON to the controller. Take this
into consideration when the temperature controller is incorporated into
a sequence circuit.
For 900-TC8 & 900-TC16: Triac (AC) relay outputs use
semiconductors for switching when closing and opening the circuit,
thereby eliminating relay chatter and arcing and improving durability
compared to an electro-mechanical relay output. However, if high levels
of electrical noise or surge are imposed between the output terminals,
short-circuit faults may occasionally occur. If the output becomes
permanently shorted, there is the danger of fire due to overheating of
the heater. Design safety into the system, including measures to prevent
excessive temperature rise and fire. Take countermeasures such as
installing a surge absorber. As an additional safety measure, provide
error detection in the control loop. (Use the Loop Burnout Alarm
Preparations
2-23
(LBA) and Heater Short Alarm (HSA) that are provided for the Bulletin
900 Controller.)
Figure 2.20
Varistor
Triac (AC)
relay output
Inductive
load
1
Varistor
2

Table 2.G
Voltage Used
Varistor Voltage
Surge Resistance
100120V AC
240270V
1,000 A min.
200240V AC
440470V
Control Output 2
For 900-TC8 & 900-TC16: Output 2 is applied from terminals 11 and
12 or 14 and 15 with the 900-TC16, and from pins 14 and 15 with the
900-TC8. The following diagrams show the available outputs and their
equal internal circuits.
Figure 2.21
+v
+v
or
+v
GND
GND
Voltage
Voltage
L
GND
Relay
Voltage
Option Unit: 900-TC16P1V2

Option Unit: 900-TC16NCOMV2
The following table shows the specifications for each output type.
Table 2.H 900-TC8
Output Type
Triac (AC) relay
250V AC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 1,000,000

operations
Voltage (PNP)
PNP type, 12V DC +15%/20%, 21 mA (with short-circuit

protection)
2-24
Preparations
Table 2.I 900-TC16

Output Type
Voltage (PNP)
Always connect an AC load to a Triac (AC) relay output. The output will
not turn OFF if a DC load is connected.
A voltage output (control output) is not electrically isolated from the
internal circuits. Therefore, when using a grounded thermocouple, do
not connect any of the control output terminals to earth ground. If
control output terminals are connected to ground, errors will occur in
the measured temperature values as a result of ground loop leakage
current. With 900-TC8, however, voltage output (Control Output 2) is
functionally isolated from the internal circuits.
Control Output 2 of the 900-TC16 is a voltage output (SSR driver) only,
and outputs across terminals 11(+) and 12(-), or 14(+) and 15(-).
Control outputs 1 and 2 (voltage outputs) are not isolated.
Triac (AC) relay outputs use semiconductors for switching when closing
and opening the circuit, thereby eliminating relay chatter and arcing and
improving durability compared to an electro-mechanical relay output.
However, if high levels of electrical noise or surge are imposed between
the output terminals, short-circuit faults may occasionally occur. If the
output becomes permanently shorted, there is the danger of fire due to
overheating of the heater. Design safety into the system, including
measures to prevent excessive temperature rise and fire. Take
countermeasures such as installing a surge absorber. As an additional
safety measure, provide error detection in the control loop. (Use the
Loop Burnout Alarm (LBA) and Heater Short Alarm (HSA) that are
provided for the Bulletin 900.)
Figure 2.22
Varistor
Triac (AC)
relay output
Inductive
load
1
Varistor
2
Preparations
2-25

Table 2.J
Voltage Used
Varistor Voltage
Surge Resistance
100120V AC
240270V
1,000 A min.
200240V AC
440470V
Wiring Auxiliary Outputs (1, 2, and 3)

On the 900-TC8, Auxiliary Output 1 (SUB1) is output across terminals
9 and 10, Auxiliary Output 2 (SUB2) is output across terminals 7 and 8,
and Auxiliary Output 3 (SUB3) is output across terminals 5 and 6.
When the HBA or the HS Auxiliary is used with the 900-TC8,
Auxiliaries are output across terminals 9 and 10.
On the 900-TC8, when heating/cooling control is used, Auxiliary
Output 3 becomes control output (cooling).
7 and 8, and Auxiliary Output 2 (SUB2) is output across terminals 6
and 8.
5 and 6.
On the 900-TC32, when heating/cooling control is used, auxiliary
output 1 becomes control output (cooling).
When the HB, the HS, or heater overcurrent alarm is used with the
900-TC16, alarms are output across terminals 7 and 8.
On the 900-TC16, when heating/cooling control is used, Auxiliary
Output 2 becomes control output (cooling).
When the Input Error Output parameter is configured to ON, the
output assigned to Alarm Output 1 turns ON when an input error
occurs.
For models that have a Heater Burnout Alarm (not supported by
900-TC32), an OR of the alarm 1 function and the HB/HS or heater
overcurrent alarm is sent to the output assigned to the alarm 1 function
(auxiliary output 1). If ALM1 is to be used for HBA only, configured the
Alarm 1 type to 0 and do not use Alarm function 1.
The following diagrams show the internal equalizing circuits for Alarm
Outputs 1, 2, and 3.
2-26
Preparations
Figure 2.23
SUB3
SUB2
SUB2
5
SUB1
900-TC8 Alarms
SUB1
SUB1
900-TC16 Alarms
900-TC32 Alarms
Note: ALM1, 2, 3 can be output to auxiliary output 1, 2, 3 or changed with the

Advanced Function level.The auxiliary relay specifications are as follows:
Table 2.K
900-TC8 and 900-TC16
SPST-NO 250V AC 3 A
900-TC32
SPST-NO 250V AC 2 A
Current Transformer (CT) Input

To determine if your controller supports the heater burnout function, refer to
Table 1.B for 900-TC8 or Table 1.E for 900-TC16. If the heater burnout
parameter function is used, connect a current transformer (CT) across the
terminals indicated in the following drawings in Figure 2.24.
Figure 2.24
13
CT1
14
14
CT
CT2
CT1
15
15
900-TC16 with
Single-phase
Burnout Option
900-TC16 with
Three-phase
Burnout Option
CT
900-TC8-@@@H1
SIngle-phase
Burnout
CT2
900-TC8-@@@H3
Three-phase
Burnout
Preparations
2-27
Wiring the Event Input

When the appropriate option event input unit is mounted in the Bulletin
900-TC8 or 900-TC16 controller, an event input function is available by wiring
to the controllers terminals as shown in the following diagrams.
Figure 2.25
A Do NOT apply an external voltage source to the Event Input Terminals
11
12
EV1
13
EV2
EV1
EV2
900-TC8
Contact Event
Input
900-TC16
Contact Event
Input
Use event inputs under the following conditions:

The output current from the controller is approximately 7 mA @ 5V.
Contact input ON: 1 K max., OFF: 100 K min.
Non-contact input ON: residual voltage 1.5V max., OFF: leakage
current 0.1 mA max.
Polarities using non-contact input are as follows:
Figure 2.26
900-TC16
EV1
A
EV2
EV1
A
EV2
900-TC8
A Do NOT apply an external voltage source to the Event Input Terminals
2-28
Preparations
RS-232C Communication to a Personal Computer Bulletin 900-TC8 Only

By using the appropriate option communications unit in the Bulletin 900-TC8
or 900-TC16 Controller, you can communicate with a personal computer.
Figure 2.27 Communication Unit Connection Diagram
RS-232C
No.
PC
SD(TXD)
11
SD
RD(RXD)
12
RD
RS(RTS)
13
SG
CS(CTS)
DR(DSR)
SG
ER(DTR)
FG
9 Pin
(RS232C)
900-TC8
RS232C for 900-TC8 only.
The RS-232C connection is one-to-one (PC to one Bulletin 900-TC8). The

maximum cable length for RS-232 is 15 m. An optional 3 m RS-232C interface
cable (Cat. No. 900-CP1x) is available as an extension cable if necessary. If you
make your own cable, use shielded, twisted pair cable (AWG 28 or larger).
Note: To configure the 900-TC8 using RS232 communication optional
software (900BuilderLite) is available.
RS-485 Communication to a Personal Computer

When the optional RS-485 communications unit is mounted in the Bulletin
900-TC8, 900-TC16, or 900-TS32, RS-485 communication with a personal
computer is possible. Connect the RS-485 communications cable across
controller terminals 11 and 12 for 900-TC8 or 900-TC16. Connect the RS-485
communications cable across controller terminals 7 and 8 for 900-TC32.
Specify both ends of the transmission path, including the personal
computer as the end node (that is, connect termination resistors to both
ends).
The minimum terminal resistance is 54 . (See Figure 2.28.)
Preparations
2-29
Figure 2.28 Communication Unit Connection Diagram

900-TC8 & 900-TC16
PC with
RS232 to RS485
converter
such as
900-CONV
Shielded Cable
+
Controller No. X
FG
A<B : 1 mark
A>B : 0 space
Controller X + 1
RS-485
No Abbr.
12 A ()
11 B (+)
RS-485
No Abbr.
12 A ()
11 B (+)
Terminator (120, 1/2 W)
900-TC32
PC with
RS232 to RS485
converter
such as
900-CONV
Shielded Cable
+
Controller No. X
FG
A<B : 1 mark
A>B : 0 space
Controller X + 1
RS-485
No Abbr.
8
A ()
7
B (+)
RS-485
No Abbr.
8 A ()
7 B (+)
Terminator (120, 1/2 W)
The RS-485 connection can either be one-to-one or one-to-N. Up to

32 units including the personal computer can be connected one-to-N.
For 900-TC8 & 900-TC16: Use shielded, twisted pair cable
(2414AWG), and keep the total length to 500 m or less. For
900-TC32: Use shielded, AWG24 to AWG18 twisted pair cable.
Figure 2.29
Cross-sectional area
of conductor
AWG24: 0.205mm 2
AWG14: 2.081mm 2
To use a PC on an RS-485 link/network connection, a

Bulletin 900-CONV RS-232-to-RS-485 or equivalent converter is
required.
2-30
Preparations
Figure 2.30
900-TC8
900-TC16
900-TC8
and/or TC16
PC
RS-232
RS-485
900-CONV
Note: The PC must have 900BuilderLite software installed to

configure/monitor the Bulletin 900-TC8, 900-TC16, and/or 900-TC32
on an RS-485 network.
Using the Direct PC

Communications Port
The direct PC communication port, available on the Series A and Series B

Bulletin 900-TC, 900-TC16, and 900-TC32 Controllers, enables direct PC to
controller communications without the use of a communication option unit. A
900-CPOEM1 USB to serial conversion cable is required. The cable is
approximately 1 meter in length and connects to your PCs USB port and the
controllers direct communication port (refer to Figure 3).
900BuilderLite is used with the cable to configure the 900-TC8, 900-TC16, or
900-TC32 controller.
900 BuilterLite version 1.1 for Series A controllers and Version 1.2 for Series B controllers.
Procedure
Use the following procedure to connect the Temperature Controller to the
personal computer using the USB-Serial Conversion Cable. The USB-Serial
Conversion Cable is used to communicate with the COM port of the personal
computer. To perform communications using USB-Serial Conversion Cable,
configured the communications port (COM port) number to be used for the
software to the COM port assigned to the Cable.
Preparations
2-31
Hardware Installation
EXAMPLE
Figure 2.31 Temperature Controller Connection Method

Personal Computer
USB Port
900-CPOEM1 Cable
Communications Port
for Support Software
Bottom View of Temperature Controllers

Communications
Port for Support
Software
Communications
Port for Support
Software
Communications Port
for Support Software
900-TC32
900-TC16
900-TC8
1. Turn ON the power to the Temperature Controller. Note: If the cable is

connected when the power to the Temperature Controller is OFF,
power will be supplied from the personal computer and impose a load
on the internal circuits of the Temperature Controller.
2. Connect the cable.
Connect the personal computers USB port with the Support Software
port on the Temperature Controller using the Cable. Note: Hold the
connector when inserting or disconnecting the cable.
3. Install the driver.
Note: The driver is available free of charge from the Bulletin 900 Temperature
Controller Website:
www.ab.com/industrialcontrols/products/relays_timers_and_temp_
controllers/single_loop_temp_heater_controllers/900tc.html. Refer to
the menu on the right and click on Get Software for Serial Conversion
Cable.
Install the driver to enable the cable to be used with the personal
computer.
900 BuilterLite version 1.1 for Series A controllers and Version 1.2 for Series B controllers
2-32
Preparations
Driver Installation
When the cable is connected with the personal computer, the personal
computers operating system detects the product as a new device. At this time,
install the driver using the installation wizard. For details on installation
methods, refer to the users manual for the 900-CPOEM1-Serial Conversion
Cable.
When setting 900 BuilderLite for direct communication the port parameters of
the direct communication port are fixed as shown in Table 2.L. Set the
Bulletin 900 BuilderLite communication parameters to match those in
Table 2.L
Table 2.L Fixed Port Parameters
Parameter
Value
Communication Unit #
01
Communication Baud Rate
38.4 (Kbps)
Communication Data Length
7 (bits)
Communication Stop Bits
2 (bits)
Communication Parity
Even
Chapter

Figure 3.1 900-TC8
Temperature Unit
No. 1 Display
No. 2 Display
Up Key
Function Group Key
Down Key
Mode Key
Figure 3.2 900-TC16
SUB1 SUB2
HA
SUB3
PV
Temperature Unit
No.1 Display
SV
OUT1 STOP
MV
OUT2 CMW MANU
No.3 Display
Up Key
Mode Key
PF
Function Group Key
No.2 Display
A/M
Function Key/
Auto/Manual Key
Down Key
3-1
3-2
Figure 3.3 900-TC32
How Function Groups Are

Configured and Operating
the Keys on the Front Panel
3-3
Parameters are divided into control categories, each called a function group.
Each of the items/values that can be configured in these function groups is
called a parameter. The function groups on the Bulletin 900 controller are
divided into the following:
Figure 3.4 Function Group Configuration
Power ON
Start in manual mode.
Start in automatic mode.

Press the O Key or the
PF Key for at least 1 s.
(See note 4.)
Press the
O Key less than 1 s.
a-m
Manual
mode
(See
note
3.)
Adjustment
Function Group
Operation
Function Group
Press the O Key

for at least 3 s while
a-m is displayed.
(a-m will flash after
1st second.)
PF Key
(See note 5.)
Manual Control
Function Group
Press the
O Key for
at least 1 s.
Control stops.
(See
note 1.)
25
25
100
Press the O Key for at

least 3 s. (Display will flash
after 1st second.)
100
Protect Function Group
Communications Setting
Initial Setting
Function Group
Function Group
Press the
O Key for less than 1 s.
Press the O Key

for at least 1 s.
Press the
O +M
Keys for at
least 1 s.
Item Function Group
(See note 4.)
Press the PF Key

for at least 1 s.
PF Key
(See note 5.)
Monitor/Setting
Press the
O+M
Keys for at
least 3 s.
c
(Display
will flash
after 1st
second.)
Note The time taken to move

to the protect function group can
be adjusted by changing the "Move to protect function group time" setting.
Input password while

amoV is displayed. (Set
value 169)
Advanced Function
Setting Function Group
Input password.
Control in progress
Control stopped
Calibration
Function Group
(See
note 2.)
Not displayed for some models

Function Group change
Note
(1) You can return to the operation function group by executing a software reset.
(2) You cannot move to other function groups by operating the keys on the front panel
from the calibration function group. You must turn OFF the power supply.
(3) From the manual control function group, key operations can be used to move to the
operation function group only.
(4) When the PF Setting is configured to A-M in models with a PF Key (900-TC8)
(5) When the PF Setting is configured to PFDP in models with a PF Key (900-TC8)
3-4
Table 3.A Control Categories

Function Group
Control In Progress
Control Stopped
Protect
Operation
Adjustment
Manual Control
Monitor/Setting Item
Initial Setting
Advanced Setting
Calibration
To activate the Advanced Setting function group, set the Protect function group of the Initial/Communications
Protect to 0.
Indicates items that can be configured.
Of these control categories, the Initial Setting, Communications Setting,

Advanced Setting, and Calibration function groups can be used only when
control has stopped. Note that controller outputs are stopped/reset when any
of these four function groups are selected.
Protect Function Group To move to this function group,
simultaneously press the O and M keys for at least 3 seconds in the
Operation, Adjustment, or Monitor/Setting Item function group. This
function group is used to prevent unwanted or accidental modification
of parameters. Protected parameters will not be displayed, and so the
parameters in that function group cannot be modified.
3-5
Note: The key pressing time can be altered to your requirements. Refer to the
Move to Protect function group Time parameter in the Advanced
Setting function group.
Operation Function Group This function group is displayed when
you turn the power ON. You can move to the Protect, Initial Setting,
and Adjustment function groups from this point. This function group is
typically selected during operation. During operation, the process value
(PV), and manipulated variable (MV) can be monitored, and the SP,
Alarm Value, and Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm parameters can be
monitored and modified.
Adjustment Function Group To move to this function group,
press the O key for less than 1 second from the Operation function
group. This function group is used to enter configuration values and
offset values for control. This function group contains parameters for
AT (Auto-Tuning), communications writing enable/disable, hysteresis,
multi-SP, Heater Burnout Alarm (HBA), Heater Short Alarm (HSA),
and PID constants. You can move to the top parameter of the Initial
Setting, Protect, and Operation function groups from here.
Monitor/Setting Item Function Group (900-TC8) To switch to
the Monitor/Setting Item function group press the PF key from the
Operation or Adjustment group. The parameter(s) configured for
Monitor/Setting Item 1 to 5 can be displayed. You can move from the
Monitor/Setting Item to the Operation of Initial Setting function
groups. Only the 900-TC8 supports this function group.
Manual Control Function Group When the O key is pressed for
at least 3 seconds from the Operation function groups auto/manual
switching display, the Manual Control function group will be displayed.
(The MANU indicator will light.) When the PF setting is configured to
A-M (auto/manual) and PF key is pressed for more than 1 second in the
Operation or Adjustment function group the Manual Control group will
be displayed (900-TC8 only).This is the function group for changing the
MV in manual mode. To return to the Operation function group, press
the O key for at least 1 second.
Initial Setting Function Group To move to the Initial Setting
function group from the Operation or the Adjustment function group,
press the O key for at least 3 seconds. The PV display flashes after 1
second. This function group is for specifying the Input Type and
selecting the control method, control period, setting direct/reverse
action, and setting the alarm types. You can move to the Advanced
Setting or Communications Setting function group from this function
group. To return to the Operation function group, press the O key for
at least 1 second. To move to the Communications Setting function
group, press the O key for less than 1 second. (When moving from the
Initial Setting function group to the Operation function group, all the
indicators will light
3-6
Note: Pressing the O key for at least 3 seconds in the Operation

function groups auto/manual switching display will move to the Manual
Control function group, and not the Initial Setting function group.
Advanced Setting Function Group To move to the Advanced
Setting function group, set the Initial Setting/Communications Protect
parameter in the protect function group to 0 and then, in the Initial
Setting function group, input the password (169). From the Advanced
Setting function group, it is possible to move to the Calibration function
group or to the Initial Setting function group. This function group is for
setting the display auto-return time, event input assignments, standby
sequence, and alarm hysteresis, and it is the function group for moving
to the user calibration.
Communications Setting Function Group To move to the
Communications Setting function group from the Initial Setting group,
press the O key once (for less than 1 second). When using the
communications function, set the communications conditions in this
group. Communicating with a personal computer (host computer)
allows set points to be read and written, and Manipulated Variables
(MV) to be monitored.
Calibration Function Group To move to the Calibration function
group, input the password (1201) from the Advanced Setting group. The
Calibration function group is for offsetting error in the input circuit.
You cannot move to other function groups from the Calibration group
by operating the keys on the front panel. To cancel this function group,
turn the power OFF then back ON again.
3-7
Selecting Parameters
Within each function group, the parameter is changed in order (or in reverse
order) each time the M key is pressed. (In the Calibration function group,
however, parameters cannot be changed in reverse order.) For details, refer to
Parameter Functions & Definitions on page 5-1.
Figure 3.5 Parameters
Moves in order after M key
is pressed (if key is
released within 1 s).
While the M key is being held

down, the parameter will move
each second in reverse order.
Parameter 1
M
Parameter 2
Parameter 2
After M key has
been held down
for 2 s.
M
Parameter 3
After M key
is pressed
Parameter 3
Hold down the M key
during this interval.
After M key has

been held down
for 1 s.
Parameter 4
Changing Parameters and Loading Values into Controller Memory

If you press the M key at the final parameter, the display returns to the top
parameter for the current function group.
To change parameter value or configuration (setup), modify the setting by
using the U or D key, and either leave the setting alone/unchanged for at
least 2 seconds or press the M key. This loads the present value displayed into
the controllers memory.
When another function group is selected, the parameter and value on the
display are the ones currently loaded into controller memory.
When you turn the controller power OFF, ensure that the values are loaded
into memory by pressing the M key. The values and parameters setups are
sometimes not changed (loaded) by merely pressing the U or D key.
3-8
Communications Function
The Bulletin 900 temperature controller can be provided with a

communications function that allows you to check and set controller
parameters from a personal computer that has configuration and/or
monitoring software installed. If the communications function is required,
mount the appropriate option unit (refer to Table 1.C or 1.E) for the Bulletin
900 temperature controller.
Follow the procedure below to move to the Communications Setting function
group.
1. Press the O key for at least 3 seconds to move from the Operation
function group to the Initial Setting function group.
2. Press the O key for less than 1 second to move from the Initial Setting
function group to the Communications Setting function group.
3. Select the parameters as shown below by pressing the M key.
4. Press the U or D key to change the parameter setting.
Figure 3.6 Communications Setting Function Group
psel
Protocol setting
cwf
u-no
bps
Communications baud rate
9.6
len

Communications data length
sbit
bits
Communications stop
prty
Communications parity
even
sdwt
Send data wait time
20
M
The Communication Data Length and Communication Stop Bits parameter is displayed only when 900-TC
communications are selected from the Protocol Setting parameter.
3-9
Setting Up Communications Parameter Data

Set the Bulletin 900 controller communication parameter specifications so that
they match the communication parameter setup for the personal computer,
using configuration/monitoring software such as 900BuilderLite. In a
multidrop (RS-485) 1:N configuration, match the setting data except for the
communications unit numbers on all 900-TC controllers. All Controllers must
have unique communications unit numbers.
Table 3.B
Parameter
Symbol Configurable (Monitor) Value
Selection Symbols
Default Unit
Protocol setting
psel
900-TC or Modbus
cwf, mod
900-TC
None
u-no
099
None
Communications baud rate
bps
1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6
9.6
kbit/s
Communications data
length
len
7, 8
Bits
Communications stop bits
sbit
1, 2
Bits
Communications parity
prty
None, Even, Odd
Even
None
Send data wait time
sdwe
099
20
ms
Initial Setup Examples
1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6
None, Even, Odd
The Communication Data Length and Communication Stop Bits parameter is displayed only when 900-TC
communications are selected from the Protocol Setting parameter.
The O and M keys are used to switch between configuration menus, and the
amount of time that you hold the keys down determines which configuration
menu you move to. This section describes two typical examples.
EXAMPLE
Figure 3.7 Explanation of Examples

Changing Parameters
in-t
0
in-h
100 M
in-l
0 M
cntl
onof
A
image means that there are parameters.
Continue pressing the M key to change parameters
until you reach the intended parameter.
Changing Numbers
C
cntl
onof
25
0
Numeric data and selections in each

screen can be changed by using the
U and D keys.
3-10
Figure 3.8 Typical Example 1

Input type:
5 (K thermocouple,
200C to 1,300C)
Control method: ON/OFF control
Alarm type:
2 (upper limit)
Alarm value 1: 20C (deviation)
Set point:
100C
Setup Procedure
Power ON
Power ON
Operation
function
group
Initial Setting
function group
25 PV/SP
0
Press the O key for

at least 3 s.
Control stops.
Initial Setting
function group
Set input
specifications
Check input type.
Set control
specifications
Check that
control method is
ON/OFF control.
in-t
Input type: 5
cntl
onof
alt1
Check alarm type.
onof
PID
pid
control:
M
Set alarm type
ON/OFF
control:
Alarm 1 type: 2
M
Press the O key for
at least 1 s.
Control starts.
Operation
function group
Use the U and
D keys to set the
SP to 100C.
Operation
function
group
Set alarm values
25
100
PV/SP:
r-s
Confirm that
control is running.
Use the U and
D keys to set the
alarm value to 20C.
Running
run Stopped:
M
al-1
20
run
stop
Alarm value 1: 20
Start operation
100
Start operation.
3-11
Figure 3.9 Typical Example 2

Input type:
9 (T thermocouple,
200C to 400C)
Control method: PID control
PID constants found using
auto-tuning (AT).
Alarm type:
2 upper limit
Alarm value 1: 30C
Set point:
150C
Setup Procedure
Power ON
Power ON
Operation
function group
C
25
PV/SP
Press the O key for

at least 3 s.
Initial Setting
function
group
Control stops.
Initial Setting
function group
Use the U and
D keys to
select the input
type.
in-t
Set control
specifications
Use the U and

D keys to select
PID control.
cntl
st
Set alarm type
Use the U and

D keys to set ST
to OFF.
To execute on
ST:
To cancel off
ST:
cp
Control period
20
(heat)
Set input
specifications
pid
off
M
Check the
control period.
AT execution
(When PID
control is
selected)
25
150
Set alarm value
alt1
2
M
For PID, set pid.
pid
When ON, self-tuning

operates.
It is recommended that 20 seconds

be set for a relay output and 2
seconds for an SSR voltage output.
Alarm 1 type:
The set point

flashes during
auto-tuning (AT)
execution.
After AT is
stopped
at
off
at
Control starts.
Operation
function group
Use the U and
D keys to set
the SP to 150C.
25
PV/SP:
150
26
150
During AT
execution
Operation
function
group
onof
Press the O key for

at least 1 s.
PV/SP
after AT is
stopped
ON/OFF
control:
PID
control:
20 (Unit: Seconds)
M
Check the
alarm type.
Adjustment
function
group
Input type:
Adjustment
function group
Press the O key

(for less than 1 s).
at
Execute AT.
To execute on
AT:
off To cancel
AT:
Operation
function group
Confirm that the
set point is
150C.
150
off
To execute AT (auto-tuning), select

on: (AT execute), and to cancel AT,
select off: (AT cancel).
Press the O key

(for less than 1 s).
25
PV/SP
150
on
M
Confirm that
control is
running.
Use the U and
D keys to set
the alarm value
to 30C.
r-s
run
M
al-1
30
Running
Stopped
run
stop
Alarm
value 1
30
Start operation.
Start operation
3-12
Configuring the Input Type
The Bulletin 900-TC8, 900-TC16, and 900-TC32 controller support three

input/sensor types: (1) platinum resistance thermometer (RTD), (2)
thermocouple, and (3) non-contact temperature sensor. The Bulletin 900-TC8
and 900-TC16 controller support a fourth input/sensor type, analog inputs.
Program/configure the Input Type matched to your sensor using the Input
Type parameter (See Table 3.C). The Bulletin 900-TC8, 900-TC16, and
900-TC32 general controller specifications support two general types of
Global Temperature (GT) inputs: (1) platinum resistance thermometer input
and (2) thermocouple Input Types (refer to Table 3.C). The Bulletin 900-TC8
and 900-TC16 controller support a third a third GT input, analog inputs (refer
to Table 3.D). Check the cat. no. of your Bulletin 900 components at purchase
to ensure it matches your input requirements (refer to Tables 1.B and 1.D).
Input Type
Example Operation Procedure: Setting the Input Type to Thermocouple
Type K (20.0500.0C) (See Table 3.C, List of Global Temperature (GT)
Input Types)
Figure 3.10 Operation Function Group
C
25
0
Figure 3.11 Initial Setting Function Group
in-t
Input type
2. Press the U key to configure the Set Value for the type of sensor you
are using. Entering the Set Value will configure the controller for the
applicable Input Type and range. Example: When you use K
thermocouple (20.0+500.0C), enter 6 as the Set Value (refer to
Table 3.C).
Note: The selected Set Value is loaded into controller memory if you do not
operate the keys on the front panel for 2 seconds after changing the
parameter, or by pressing the O or M keys. This applies to changing
all values and/or parameters.
Figure 3.12 Set Value
in-t
3-13
Table 3.C List of Global Temperature (GT) Input Types
ControllerType
with
Thermocouple
and Resistance
Thermometer
(RTD)
Multi-input
Input Type
Specifications
Set Value
Input Temperature Setting Range
Platinum Resistance
Thermometer (RTD)
Pt100
200850 (C)/3281,562 (F)
199.9500.0 (C)/327.8932.0 (F)
0.0100.0 (C)/32.0212.0 (F)
199.9500.0 (C)/327.8932.0 (F)
0.0100.0 (C)/32.0212.0 (F)
2001,300 (C)/3282,372 (F)
20.0500.0 (C)/-4.0932.0 (F)
100850 (C)/1481,562 (F)
20.0400.0 (C)/-4.0752.0 (F)
200400 (C)/328752 (F)
10
199.9400.0 (C)/327.8752.0 (F)
11
-200600 (C)/-3001,100 (F)
12
100850 (C)/1481,562 (F)
13
200400 (C)/328752 (F)
14
199.9400.0 (C)/327.8752.0 (F)
15
2001,300 (C)/3282,372 (F)
16
01,700 (C)/323,092 (F)
17
01,700 (C)/323,092 (F)
18
1001,800 (C)/2123,272 (F)
1070C
19
090 (C)/32194 (F)
60120C
20
0120 (C)/32248 (F)
115165C
21
0165 (C)/32329 (F)
140260C
22
0260 (C)/32500 (F)
Millivolt input
050 mV
23
Either of the following ranges, by scaling:

1,9999,999
199.9999.9
Thermocouple
24
02,300 (C)/03,200 (F)
PL II
25
01,300 (C)/02,300 (F)
JPt100
Thermocouple
K
J
T
Infrared (non-contact)
temperature sensor
The non-contact infrared sensor must be configurable for a Type K thermocouple output within either of the
four specified ranges. For example, in Omron ES1B or Calex EL Series (Convir) infrared sensor.
The default is 5 (shaded).

If an RTD is mistakenly connected while a setting for other than a
platinum resistance thermometer is in effect, the controller error code
s.err will be displayed. To clear the s.err display, check the wiring
and then turn the controller power OFF and back ON.
3-14
Table 3.D Analog Input Types (not supported by 900-TC32)

Input Type
Models with Current input
Analog Input
Voltage input
Specifications
Set Value
Process Input Setting Range
420 mA
020 mA
15V
05V
Either of the following ranges can be used by scaling

1,9999,999
199.9999.9
19.9999.99
1.9999.999
010V
The default is 0 (shaded).
Selecting C/F
Temperature Units
The Bulletin 900 controller allows you to select either C or F as the
temperature unit.
Configure the temperature units in the Temperature Unit parameter of Initial
Setting function group.
Note: The default is C.
Example Operation Procedure: Select C
C
30
Figure 3.14 Initial Setting
in-t
Input type
3-15
2. Select the Temperature Unit parameter by pressing the M key. Press the
U or D key to select either C (c) or F (f).
Figure 3.15 Temperature Unit Parameter
d-u
Temperature unit
3. To return to the Operation function group press the O key for at least
1 second.
C
20
The Operation function group is displayed when the Bulletin 900 controller is
turned ON. The upper display (No. 1) shows the process value (PV), and the
lower display (No. 2) shows the set point (SV or SP).
Configuring the SP
Changing the SP
The set point cannot be changed when the Operation/Adjustment Protection
parameter is set to 3. For details, refer to page 4-33, Using the Key Protect Function
Group.
To change the set point, press the U or D key in the PV/SP parameter
(Operation function group), and load/program the desired value. The new set
point is loaded/programmed into memory 2 seconds after you have specified
the new value.
For 900-TC8 and 900-TC16 only: The Multi-SP parameter is used to switch
between two or four pre-configured set point values. Refer to page 4-16, Using
the Event Input Feature 900-TC8 & 900-TC16 for details.
Example Operation Procedure
In this example, the set point will be changed from 0200C.
1. Normally, the PV/SP parameter is displayed. The current set point is 0
C.
Figure 3.17
C
30
3-16
2. Press the U or D key until the set point displayed is 200C. To load
the value into the controller memory, either press the O key or wait
2 seconds.
Figure 3.18
C
30
200
Selecting PID Control or

ON/OFF Control
Overview
The Bulletin 900 Controller supports two control methods: (1) 2-PID control
and (2) ON/OFF control. The control method is selected by the PID
ON/OFF parameter in the Initial Setting function group. When this
parameter is configured to pid, 2-PID control is set, and when configured to
onof, ON/OFF control is set.
Note: The default is ON/OFF control.
2-PID Control
Controller configured/selected P, I, and D (Proportional, Integral, and
Derivative) control parameters are set by the AT (Auto-Tuning) and ST
(Self-Tuning) parameters, or by manual (user) setup. For manual (user) PID
control, set the PID constants in the Proportional Band (P), Integral Time (I),
and Derivative Time (D) parameters. For more details refer to page 3-30.
ON/OFF Control
In the ON/OFF control method, the control output (MV) is turned ON when
the process value (measured temperature, flow, etc.) is lower than the current
set point, and the control output is turned OFF when the process value is
higher than the current set point. This is known as reverse operation. Direct
operation refers to control where the manipulated variable is increased
according to the increase in the process value. Refer to page 3-25 for more
details.
Configuring the Output

Parameters
3-17
Control Period
The Control Period parameter is used in the PID control method and allows
you to adjust the minimum amount of time between ON cycles of the
ON/OFF output (MV). This is sometimes referred to as timed proportional
PID control.
Figure 3.19 Control Period Parameter
Control
period
(OUT1)
Control
period
(OUT2)
A shorter period may provide better ON/OFF control performance. We

recommend setting the control period to 20 seconds or more. In the case of
electromechanical relay outputs, doing this will improve its life expectancy. If
you are using an ON/OFF voltage output (SSR) setting, a shorter time will not
drastically impact the life of the SSR, since it is rated by the number of ON
hours. If necessary, readjust the Control Period by trial operation to meet the
needs of your application.
You can configure the individual control period values in the Control
Period (HEAT) and Control Period (COOL) parameters (Initial Setting
function group). Note: The default is 20 seconds.
The Control Period (COOL) parameter can be used only in the heating
and cooling control method.
When Control Output 1 is used as an analog current output, the Control
Period (HEAT) parameter cannot be used.
Note: The Control Period parameter allows what is typically called Time
Proportioning ON/OFF Control to be done in the 2-PID method.
Direct/Reverse Operation
Figure 3.20 Direct/Reverse Operation
orev
Direct operation refers to control where the manipulated variable (MV) is
increased according to the increase in the process value (PV). Alternatively,
reverse operation refers to control where the manipulated variable (MV) is
decreased according to the increase in the process value (refer to Figure 3.21).
Direct/reverse operation can be used in ON/OFF or PID control.
3-18
Figure 3.21 Direct/Reverse Operation

Manipulated variable (MV)
Manipulated variable (MV)

100%
100%
0%
0%
High temperature
Low temperature Set value (SP)
High temperature
Low temperature Set value (SP)
Direct operation
Reverse operation
For example, when the process value (PV) temperature is lower than the set
point (SP) temperature in a heating control system, the manipulated variable
(OUT1) increases (ON) by the difference between the PV and SP values.
Accordingly, this becomes reverse operation in a heating control system, or
alternatively, direct operation in a cooling control system.
Direct/reverse operation is set in the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter
(Initial Setting function group).
Note: The Direct/Reverse Operation parameter default is reverse operation.
EXAMPLE
Operation Procedure
In this example, the Input Type, Temperature Unit, Direct/Reverse Operation,
and Control Period (HEAT) parameters will be monitored.
The setup of parameters is as follows:
Input Type = 5: K thermocouple
Temperature Unit = c: C
Direct/Reverse Operation = or-r: reverse operation
Control Period (HEAT) = 20 seconds
3-19
Figure 3.22
C
30
2. The Input Type is displayed. When you are monitoring/configuring the

Input Type for the first time, the set value is 0: K type thermocouple
default. (0 is set if you have a platinum resistance thermometer
compatible controller. To select a different sensor, press the U or D
keys. This changes the Set Value (refer to Table 3.A) to match your
desired sensor input.
Figure 3.23
in-t
Input type
3. Select the Temperature Unit parameter by pressing the M key. Note:

The default is c: C. To configure f: F, press the U key.
Figure 3.24
d-u
Temperature unit
4. Select the Control Period (OUT1) parameter by pressing the M key.

Note: The default is 20.
Figure 3.25
Control period
cp (heat)
20
5. Select the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter by pressing the M key.

Note: The default is or-r: reverse operation. To configure or-d:
direct operation, press the U key.
Figure 3.26
Direct/reverse
orev operation
or-r
3-20
1 second.
Figure 3.27
C
30
PV/SP
7. Select the Move to Advanced Setting function group parameter by

pressing the M Key.
Figure 3.28
amov
Move to
Advanced Setting
Function Group
Assigned Output Functions

The control and auxiliary outputs of the 900-TC8, 900-TC16, and
900-TC32 can be individually assigned a function by using the Control
Output Assignment parameter in the Advanced Settings function group.
The default function assignment for each output is shown in Table 3.E.
Table 3.E Default Fuction Assignment
Parameter Name
Symbol
Initial Status
Control Output 1
Assignment
out 1
Control Output (heating)
Control Output 2
Assignment
out 2
Not assigned
Auxiliary Output 1
Assignment
sub 1
Alarm 1
Auxiliary Output 2
Assignment
sub 2
Alarm 2
Auxiliary Output 3
Assignment (900-TC8 only)
sub 3
Alarm 3
Note: Each output is automatically initialized as shown below by

changing the control mode
Note: Control Output 2 Assignment and Auxillary Output 2
Assignment are not supported by 900-TC32.
3-21
Table 3.F 900-TC8 and 900-TC16

Without Control Output 2
Parameter
Name
Symbol
With Control Output 2
Heating/
Cooling
Standard
Standard
Heating/
Cooling
Control Output 1
Assignment
out 1
Control output
(heating)
Control
output
(heating)
Control
output
(heating)
Control
output
(heating)
Control Output 2
Assignment
out 2
Not assigned
Not
assigned
Not
assigned
Control
output
(cooling)
Auxiliary Output
1 Assignment
sub 1
Alarm 1
Alarm 1
Alarm 1
Alarm 1
Auxiliary Output
2 Assignment
sub 2
Alarm 2
Control
Alarm 2
output
(cooling)
Alarm 2
There is no control output 2 and no parameter assignment is displayed for that output.
The Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter becomes the program end output unless the Program
Pattern parameter is configured to OFF.
For the 900-TC8, the Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment parameter is set as the control output for cooling.
(The Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameter is set for alarm 2).
Table 3.G 900-TC32

Parameter Name
Symbol
Standard
Heating/Cooling
Control Output 1
Assignment
out 1
Control output
(heating)
Control output
(heating)
Auxiliary Output 1
Assignment
sub 1
Alarm 1
Control output
(cooling)
The Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter becomes the program end output unless the
Program Pattern parameter is configured to OFF.
Alarms
It will be specified in this section when an alarm must be assigned (i.e., when
an alarm must be set) for the Control Output 1 or 2 Assignment parameters,
or for the Auxiliary Output 1 or 3 Assignment parameters. For example, if
alarm 1 is set for the Control Output 1 Assignment parameter, then alarm 1
has been assigned.
EXAMPLE
Operating Procedure
The following example configures the following control and auxiliary out
assignments: Control Output 1: Control Output (Heating); Control Output 2:
3-22
Control Output (Cooling); Auxiliary Output 1: Alarm 1; Auxiliary Output 2:

Alarm 2
Figure 3.29
C
25
PV/SP
100
2. Select the Standard or Heating/Cooling Control Mode parameter by

pressing the M key.
Figure 3.30
in-t
Input type
Figure 3.31
Standard or
5-hc heating/cooling
stnd
3. Press the U key to set the parameter to h-c (Heating/Cooling)

Control Mode.
Note: The following output assignments do not need to be set because
they are set automatically as defaults by changing the control mode, but
they are shown here as a reference for checking the assignments for each
output.
Figure 3.32
5-hc
h-c

pressing the M key.
amov
Move to Advanced
5. Press the D key to enter the password (169), and move from the
Initial Setting function group to the Advanced Setting function group.
Figure 3.33
3-23
6. Select the Control Output 1 Assignment parameter by pressing the M

key.
Figure 3.34
Control output 1
out1 assignment
o
7. Press the U or D key to set o.

(The default is o.)
Figure 3.35
out1
o
8. Select the Control Output 2 Assignment parameter by pressing the M

key.
Figure 3.36
Control Output 2
out2 Assignment
c-o
9. Press the U or D key to set c-o.

(When h-c is selected for the Standard or Heating/Cooling Control
Mode parameter, the setting will be c-o.)
Figure 3.37
out2
c-o
10. Select the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter by pressing the M

key.
Figure 3.38
Auxiliary Output
sub1 1 Assignment
alm1
11. Press the U or D key to set alm1.

(The default is alm1.)
Auxiliary Output
sub1 1 Assignment
alm1
3-24
12. Select the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameter by pressing the M

key.
Figure 3.39
sub2
Auxiliary Output
2 Assignment
alm2
13. Press the U or D key to set alm2.

(The default is alm2.)
Figure 3.40
sub2
Auxiliary Output
2 Assignment
alm2
14. Press the O key for at least 1 second to move from the Advanced
Setting to the Initial Setting function group.
Figure 3.41
in-t
Input type
15. Press the O key for at least 1 second to move from the Initial Setting
function group to the Operation function group.
Figure 3.42
C
25
100
PV/SP
Auxiliary Output Opening or

Closing in Alarm
3-25
Note: Refer to Page 5.73, Auxiliary Output * Open in Alarm (* = 1 to 3), for
definition and furhter explanation of open in and close in alarm.
When close in alarm is configured, the status of the auxiliary output is
output unchanged. When open in alarm is configured, the status of
the auxiliary output function is reversed before being output.
Each auxiliary output can be configured independently.
These configurations are made in the Auxiliary Output 1 to 3 Open in
Alarm parameters (Advanced Setting function group).
The default is n-o: Close in Alarm.
When open in alarm is configured for the alarm 1 output, the open in
alarm status is also applied to heater burnout, HS alarm, heater
overcurrent, and input error outputs.
Table 3.H Open In Alarm
Open in Alarm
Executing the ON/OFF

Control Method
Auxiliary Output
functions 1...3
Auxiliary Output
Indicators
(SUB1...SUB3)
ON
ON
Lit
OFF
OFF
Not lit
Overview
In the reverse operation ON/OFF control method, the control output (MV)
turns OFF when the controlled temperature (PV) reaches the user-defined set
point. When the control output (MV) turns OFF, the controlled temperature
begins to fall and the control output turns ON again. This operation is
repeated at a certain point. At this time, how much the temperature must fall
before the control output turns ON again is determined by the Hysteresis
(HEAT) parameter. Also, how much the manipulated variable must be
adjusted in response to the increase or decrease in the process value is
determined by the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter.
ON/OFF Control Parameters

Switching between the 2-PID control method and ON/OFF control method
is carried out by the PID ON/OFF parameter (Initial Setting function group).
When this parameter is configured to pid, 2-PID control is selected, and
when configured to onof, ON/OFF control is selected.
3-26
The default is onof.
Hysteresis
In the ON/OFF control method, hysteresis is used to provide a
margin/differential for switching the control output ON when the controlled
temperature moves away from the required set point. The Hysteresis
parameter is used to give stability to the output around the set point.
The hysteresis value for HEAT control output and COOL control output
functions are configured in the Hysteresis (HEAT) and Hysteresis (COOL)
parameter functions respectively. In standard heating or cooling control, the
HEAT Hysteresis setting is used as the hysteresis setting (Adjustment function
group) regardless of the control mode, heating control or cooling control.
Figure 3.43 Reverse Operation
Heat Hysteresis
ON
OFF
PV
Set point
3-Position Control
In the heating and cooling control method, a dead band (an area where both
control outputs are 0) can be configured for either the heating or cooling side
of the set point. This makes 3-position control possible.
Figure 3.44 Reverse Operation with 3-Position Control
Dead band
Hysteresis (OUT2)
Hysteresis (OUT1)
ON
Heating
side
Cooling
side
OFF
PV
Set point
3-27
Table 3.I Parameters

Symbol Parameter Name and Group Location
Application
s-hc
Standard or Heating/Cooling: Initial Setting

function group
For specifying the control

method
cntl
PID ON/OFF: Initial Setting function group

method
orev
Direct/Reverse Operation: Initial Setting function

group

method
c-db
Dead Band: Adjustment function group
Heating/cooling control
hys
Hysteresis (heating): Adjustment function group
ON/OFF control
chys
Hysteresis (cooling): Adjustment function group
ON/OFF control
ON/OFF Control Setup

To execute ON/OFF control, configure the PID ON/OFF parameter.
EXAMPLE
Operation Procedure: Configuring the PID ON/OFF and Hysteresis Parameters

In this example, first check that the PID ON/OFF parameter is set to onof
in the Initial Setting function group. The Setpoint and Hysteresis parameters
will also be adjusted.
Figure 3.45
C
25
PV
100
2. Display the Input Type parameter in the Initial Setting function group.
Figure 3.46
in-t
Input type
3-28
3. Select the PID ON/OFF parameter by pressing the M key.

Figure 3.47
cntl
PIDON/OFF
onof
4. Check that the configured control method parameter is onof

(Note: ON/OFF is the default).
5. To return to the Operation function group, press the O key for at least
1 second.
Setting the SP
Operating Procedure
In the second part of this example, the set point is modified to 200. The set
value (i.e., the SP) is shown on the controllers bottom display.
1. Select the Process Value/Set Point parameter in the Operation function
group.
Figure 3.48
C
25
PV/SP
100
2. Use the U and D keys to change the SP. (In this example, it is
configured to 200.)
The new set value can be loaded into controller memory by pressing the
M key, or it will go into effect after 2 seconds have elapsed. Next, set
the hysteresis.
Figure 3.49
C
25
200
3-29
Setting the Hysteresis

Operating Procedure
The third part of the example is to configure the hysteresis to 2.0C.
1. Press the O key to move from the Operation function group to the
Adjustment function group.
Figure 3.50
Figure 3.51
25
PV
200
2. The Adjustment function group Display parameter will be displayed in

the adjustment function group.
Figure 3.52
1.adj
Adjustment
Display
3. Select the Hysteresis (Heating) parameter by pressing the M key.

Figure 3.53
C
hys
Hysteresis
(heating)
1.0
4. Press the U and D keys to set the hysteresis (2.0 in this example).
Either press the M key or wait for at least 2 seconds after setting the
hysteresis value to load the new value into controller memory.
Figure 3.54
C
hys
2.0
1 second.
3-30
Determining PID Constants AT (Auto-Tuning)

(AT, ST, Manual Setup)
Figure 3.55
Overview
When you configure the controller to execute Auto-Tuning, the optimum PID
constants for the current set point during program execution are
automatically configured by the controller forcibly changing the manipulated
variable (MV) to calculate the characteristics (called the limit cycle method) of
the control target.
Either 40% AT or 100% AT can be selected depending on the width of MV
variation in the limit cycle. In the AT Execute/Cancel parameter, specify
at-2 (100% AT) or at-1 (40% AT). To cancel AT, specify off (AT cancel).
Only 100% AT can be executed for heating and cooling control.
AT cannot be executed when control has stopped or during ON/OFF
control.
The results of AT are reflected in the Proportional Band (P), Integral Time
(I), and Derivative Time (D) parameters in the Adjustment function group.
The result of a controller AT cycle can be viewed/monitored from the
Proportional Band (P), Integral Time (I), and Derivative Time (D) parameters
in the Adjustment function group.
Figure 3.56 PID
Adjustment Level
C
Proportional
Band
Integral
Time
233
(0
Derivative
Time
40
AT Description and Display Consideration

AT (Auto-Tuning) is started when you configure either at-2 (100%) or
at-1 (40% AT).During execution of AT, the No. 1 display for the AT
Execute/Cancel parameter blinks (refer to Figure 3.57). When AT ends, the
AT Execute/Cancel parameter turns OFF, and the No. 1 display stops
blinking.
Figure 3.57 AT Execute/Cancel Parameter
AT Execute/Cancel
at
off
at
on
No. 1 display
3-31
If you move to the Operation function group during AT execution, the No. 2
display blinks to indicate that AT is still in the process of being executed.
Figure 3.58
PV/SP
25
25
100
100
No. 2 display
AT execution in progress
Note: Only the Communications Writing, RUN/STOP, AT

Execution/Cancel, and Program Start parameters can be changed
during AT execution. Other parameters cannot be changed
AT Calculated Gain
The AT Calculated Gain parameter sets the gain when PID values are
calculated using AT. When you need to enhance response, decrease the set
value. When you need to enhance stability, increase the set value.
AT Hysteresis
The AT Hysteresis parameter configures the hysteresis when switching ON
and OFF for the limit cycle operation during auto-tuning.
Limit Cycle MV Amplitude
The Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter configures the MV amplitude for
limit cycle operation during auto-tuning.
Note: This parameter is disabled for 100% AT.
40% AT
The width of the MV variation in the limit cycle can be changed in the Limit
Cycle MV Amplitude parameter, but the AT execution time may be longer for
100% AT. The limit cycle timing varies according to the deviation (DV) at the
start of auto-tuning execution is less than 10% FS
Figure 3.59 Limit Cycling Times
Deviation 10% FS
PV
Deviation < 10% FS

PV
Limit Cycle MV
Amplitude 40%
Limit Cycle MV
Amplitude 40%
SP
SP
Deviation:
10% FS
Deviation:
10% FS
Time
AT started
AT ended
Time
AT started
AT ended
3-32
100% AT
Operation will be as shown in the following diagram, regardless of the
deviation (DV) at the start of AT execution. To shorten the AT execution time,
select 100% AT.
Note: The Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter is disabled at 100% AT.
Figure 3.60 Operation
PV
Limit Cycle MV
Amplitude 100%
SP
Time
AT started
AT ended
EXAMPLE
Operation Procedure: Execute 40% Auto-Tuning (AT)

Figure 3.61 Adjustment Function Group
AT Execute/
at Cancel
off
1. Press the O Key to move from the Operation function group to the
Figure 3.62
at
at-1
2. Press the U Key to select at-1. The No. 1 display for AT

Execute/Cancel will flash during AT execution.
Figure 3.63
at
off
3-33
3. off will be displayed when AT ends.

Figure 3.64
25
PV
4. To return to the operation function group, press the O Key.

Note: The newly configured value or parameter is loaded into controller
memory if you do NOT operate any key on the front panel for at least
2 seconds or by pressing the O or M key.
Note: When control characteristics are already known, either from experience
or from a previous AT cycle, the PID parameters can be configured
directly from the keypad to adjust control. PID parameter values are set
in the Proportional Band (P), Integral Time (I), and Derivative Time
(D) parameters in the Adjustment function group.
ST (Self-Tuning)
Figure 3.65 Self-Tuning Function
In the ST (Self-Tuning) function, the 900-TC controller continually executes

step response tuning (SRT) from the start of program execution or when the
set point is changed to calculate the PID constants to match the actual control
target.
Once the self-tuning PID constants have been calculated, ST is not executed
during the next control operation cycle as long as the set point remains
unchanged.
ST is executed when the ST parameter is set to ON in the Initial Setting
function group.
When the ST function is in operation, make sure to turn ON the power supply
of the load connected to the control output (MV) simultaneously with or
before starting operation of the Bulletin 900 controller. If power to the
controller is turned ON before turning ON load power, self-tuning will not be
performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved.
3-34
EXAMPLE
Operation Procedure: Execute Self-Tuning (ST)

Figure 3.66
in-t
Input type
2. Select the ST parameter by pressing the M key.

3. Press the U key to select on. Note: The default is ON.
st
ST
on
4. To return to the Operation function group, press the O key. The

temperature display blinks during Self-Tuning (ST) execution, and stops
when it is complete.
Figure 3.67
C
25
ST
100
Note: When control characteristics are already known either from experience
or previous use of the AT or ST parameter, the individual PID
parameters can be set directly to adjust control. PID parameters are set
in the Proportional Band (P), Integral Time (I), and Derivative Time
(D) parameters in the Adjustment function group.
Conditions that Start Self-Tuning (SRT)

Self-tuning by Step Response Tuning (SRT) is started when either of the two
following major conditions are met:
Program execution is started
The set point is changed
The following table provides some additional details:
3-35
Table 3.J
At Start of Program Execution
(Self-Tuning ON)
When Set Point is Changed

(Self-Tuning ON)
1. The set point at the start of program

execution differs from the set point
when the previous SRT was executed.
2. The difference between the controlled
temperature at start of program
execution and the set point is larger than
both of the following: (proportional
band x 1.27+4C) and the ST stable
range.
3. The controlled temperature at the start
of program execution is less than the set
point during reverse operation, and is
greater than the set point during direct
operation.
4. No reset from input error
1. The new set point differs from the set

point used when the previous SRT was
executed.
2. The set point change width is larger than
both of the following: (proportional
band x 1.27+4C) and the ST stable
range.
3. During reverse operation, the new set
point is larger than the set point before
the change; and during direct operation,
the new set point is smaller than the set
point before the change.
4. The temperature is in a stable state.
Equilibrium with the output at 0% when
the power is turned ON is also all
right.
The previous SRT-implemented set point is the set point used for calculating the PID constant for the previous
SRT.
In this state, the measurement point is within the ST stable range.
In this state, the change width of the PV every 60 seconds is at the ST stable range or less.
New PID constants are not calculated by Self-Tuning (ST) for the currently
configured set point in the following instances:
When the PID constants have been changed manually with ST set to
ON.
When auto-tuning (AT) has been executed.
Self-Tuning (ST) Stable Range

The Self-Tuning (ST) stable range is a mechanism which allows you to
configure the value to determine the condition under which the ST function
occurs.
3-36
In this example, the ST stable range will be configured to 20 C.

EXAMPLE
Operation Procedure
1. Select the ST Stable Range parameter by pressing the M key in the
Advanced Setting function group. To move to this function group, refer
to page 4-31, To Move to the Advanced Setting Function Group.
Figure 3.68
C
ST stable
st-b range
1%0
2. Set to 20 C (deviation) using the U key. Note: The default is 15C.

Figure 3.69
C
st-b
2*0
Note: Ensure the value is loaded into controller memory by waiting 2 seconds
or pressing the O key.
RT (Robust Tuning)
Figure 3.70
rt
When Auto-Tuning (AT) or Self-Tuning (ST) is executed with Robust-Tuning
(RT) selected, PID constants are automatically configured by the controller
that make it difficult for control performance to degenerate even when control
object characteristics are frequently changing.
RT is configured in the Advanced Setting function group when the PID
control mode is selected.
The RT mode cannot be selected when an analog input is configured.
Selecting the RT mode in the following cases will help to prevent the
occurrence of hunting by the MV.
When the set point temperature is often changed and varies in a wide
range
3-37
When there are large variations in ambient temperatures due to factors

such as seasonal changes or differences between day and night
temperatures
When there are large variations in air flow in the control cabinet
When heater characteristics change depending on the control system
temperature
When an actuator with disproportional I/O, such as a
phase-control-type power regulator, is used
When a heater is used with fast response characteristics
When the control object or sensor has slow response
When hunting occurs in AT or ST for any reason
Note: PID constants are initialized to the factory settings when switching to
RT. When RT is selected, the derivative time setting unit becomes
second.
RT Features
Even when hunting occurs for PID constants when AT or ST is
executed in normal mode, it is less likely to occur when AT or ST is
executed in RT mode.
Figure 3.71 Hunting
Temperature
Temperature
Hunting occurs
Set point value
Hunting is reduced using RT

Set point value
Start of control
Time
Start of control
Time
When the temperature (PV) falls short of the set point for the PID
constants when using AT or ST in normal mode, executing AT or ST in
RT mode tends to improve performance.
3-38
Figure 3.72 Executing AT or ST in RT Mode

Temperature
Temperature
Improved with RT
Set point value
Set point value
Time
Start of control
Time
Start of control
When the manipulated variable (MV) is saturated, the amount of

overshooting may be somewhat higher in comparison to PID control
based on AT or ST in normal mode.
EXAMPLE
Operation Procedure
This example selects RT mode.
Figure 3.73
C
25
PV/SP
100

pressing the M key.
Figure 3.74
in-t
Input type
3. Use the D key to enter 169 (the password).

It is possible to move to the Advanced Setting function group by
pressing the M key or leaving the setting for at least 2 seconds.
Figure 3.75
amov
Move to Advanced
Parameter
init initialization
off
3-39
4. Press the M key to select rt (Robust Tuning).

Figure 3.76
rt
RT
off
5. Press the U key to select on. off is the default.

Figure 3.77
rt
on
6. To return to the Initial Setting function group, press the O key for at
least 1 second.
1 second.
Figure 3.78
C
25
PV/SP
100
Manual PID Setup

The individual P, I, and D values can be manually set in the Proportional Band,
Integral Time, and Derivative Time parameters in the Adjustment function
group.
EXAMPLE
Operation Procedure
In this example, the Proportional Band parameter will be configured to 10.0,
the Integral Time parameter will be configured to 250, and the Derivative
Time parameter will be configured to 45.
3-40
Figure 3.79
l.adj
Adjustment Function
Group Display
2. Select Proportional Band by pressing the M key.

Figure 3.80
C
Proportional
p band
8.0
3. Press the U or D key to set the Proportional Band parameter to 10.0.

Figure 3.81
C
10.0
4. Select Integral Time by pressing the M key.

Figure 3.82
Integral time
233
5. Press the U or D key to set the Integral Time parameter to 250.
Figure 3.83
250
6. Select Derivative Time by pressing the M key.

Figure 3.84
40
Derivative time
3-41
7. Press the U or D key to set the parameter to 45.

Note: This also loads the derivative time into controller memory.
Figure 3.85
45
8. To return to the Operation function group, press the O key.
Note: Proportional/Action: When PID values I (Integral time) and D
(Derivative time) are set to 0, control is executed according to
proportional operation, and the default set point becomes the center
value of the proportional band. In this case, a related parameter is
Manual Reset Value (Adjustment function group).
The following diagrams provide a basic explanation of how adjusting the P, I,
and D parameter values impact system operation.
Table 3.K When P (Proportional Band) is Adjusted
When P is
increased
Set
Point
PV
When P is
decreased
Set
Point
PV
The curve rises gradually, and a long

stable time is achieved, preventing
overshoot.
Overshoot and hunting occur, however
the set point is quickly reached after
which the curve stabilizes.
Table 3.L When I (Integral Time) is Adjusted

When I is
increased
Set
Point
PV
When I is
decreased
It takes a long time for the process value

to reach the set point. It takes time to
achieve a stable state, however there is
little overshoot/undershoot and hunting.
Overshoot/undershoot and hunting occur,
and the curve rises quickly.
Set
Point
PV
Table 3.M When D (Derivative Time) is Adjusted

When D is
increased
When D is
decreased
PV
Overshoot/undershoot and stable time

are reduced; however, fine hunting occurs
on changes in the curve it self.
PV
Overshoot/undershoot increase, and it

takes time for the process value to reach
the set point.
Set
Point
Set
Point
3-42
Alarm Outputs
Alarm Types
The Bulletin 900-TC8 supports up to three alarm outputs, Bulletin 900-TC16
supports two alarm outputs, and Bulletin 900-TC32 supports one alarm
output..
The controller alarm output conditions are determined by the combination of
the selected Alarm Type, Alarm Value, Alarm Hysteresis, and Set Point (SP)
parameters.
Alarm types are configured independently for each alarm output using the
Alarm 1 and Alarm 2 Type parameters (Initial Setting function group).
Note: The default Set Value is 2: Upper-Limit (deviation).
Configure the alarm type and alarm output operation based on pre-defined
conditions using the Set Value number.
Note: The following table describes the Alarm Type, Alarm Value,
Upper-Limit Alarm, and Lower-Limit Alarm parameters.
Table 3.N Alarm Values
Alarm Output Operation
Set Value
Alarm Type
When Alarm Value

X is Positive
Alarm function OFF
Output OFF
Upper- and Lower-Limit

(deviation range)
ON
OFF
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Upper-limit (deviation)
Lower-limit (deviation)
range (deviation range)
with standby sequence
(deviation range)
L H
X
SP
X
ON
OFF
SP
L H
ON
OFF
Lower-limit with standby

sequence (deviation)
ON
OFF
Absolute-value
Upper-Limit
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
X
SP
X
SP
SP
L H
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SP
ON
OFF
Upper-limit with standby

When Alarm Value

X is Negative
SP
X
SP
X
SP
X
0
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
X
SP
X
SP
X
0
3-43
Table 3.N Alarm Values

Set Value
Alarm Type
When Alarm Value

X is Positive
Absolute-value
Lower-Limit
ON
OFF
Absolute-value
Upper-Limit with standby
sequence
ON
OFF
Absolute-value
Lower-Limit with standby
sequence
ON
OFF
10
11
12
Loop Break Alarm (LBA)

(Alarm 1 Type only)
13
PV Change Rate Alarm
When Alarm Value

X is Negative
ON
OFF
0
X
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
X
0
X
0
X
0
Note: Shading indicates default setting. Set the alarm type independently for
each alarm in the Alarm 1 to 3 Type parameters in the Initial Setting
function group. The default is 2 (Upper-limit alarm).
With set values 1, 4 and 5, the upper- and lower- limit values can be set independently for each alarm type, and
are expressed as L and H.
Set value: 1 (Upper- and Lower-Limit alarm)
Case 2
Case 1
Case 3 (Always ON)

H < 0, L < 0
SP L H
H SP
H < 0, L > 0
|H| < |L|
H > 0, L < 0
|H| > |L|
SP
H < 0, L > 0
|H| |L|
L SP
SP H
H > 0, L < 0
|H| |L|
Set value: 4 (Lower-Limit range)
Case 3 (Always OFF)
Case 2
Case 1
H SP
H < 0, L > 0
|H| < |L|
SP L
H > 0, L < 0
|H| > |L|
SP
H < 0, L < 0
H < 0, L > 0
|H| |L|
L SP
SP H
H > 0, L < 0
|H| |L|
Set value: 5 (Upper- and Lower-Limit with standby sequence)

For the Lower-Limit alarms in cases 1 and 2 above, the alarm is normally OFF if upper- and Lower-Limit
hysteresis overlaps. In case 3, the alarm is always OFF.
Set value: 5 (The alarm is always OFF if upper- and Lower-Limit alarm hysteresis with standby sequence
overlaps.)
3-44
Alarm Value
Figure 3.86
Lower-limit
alarm value
Alarm value
Upper-limit
alarm value
Alarm types can be configured independently for each Alarm 1 to 3 in the

Initial Setting function group. The default is 2 (Upper Limit Alarm.)
Alarm values are indicated by X in Table 3.M. When the Upper- and
Lower-Limit values are set independently, H is displayed for the Upper-Limit
value, and L is displayed for the Lower-Limit value.
To set alarm deviation, use the Upper- and Lower-Limit Alarm parameters. Set
the Upper- and Lower-Limits in each of the Alarm Upper-Limit 1 to 3 and
Alarm Lower-Limit 1 to 3 parameters (Operation function group).
EXAMPLE
Operation Procedure
In this example, Alarm 1 will be set to the Upper-Limit alarm. The following
shows related parameters and setups. In this example, the alarm output is
active when the set point is exceeded by 10C. (Temperature units in this
example is C.)
Parameters to configure:
Alarm 1 Type = 2: Upper-Limit alarm (deviation)
Alarm Value 1 = 10 (10 greater than SP)
3-45
1. Press the O key for at least 3 seconds to move from the Operation to
the Initial Setting function group.
Figure 3.87
in-t
Input type
2. Select the Alarm 1 Type parameter by pressing the M key. Check that
the Alarm Type parameter is set to 2. Note: The default is Upper-Limit
alarm.
Figure 3.88
alt1
Alarm 1 type
1 second.
Figure 3.89
C
25
PV/SP
100
4. Select Alarm Value 1 by pressing M.

Figure 3.90
C
al-1
Alarm value 1
5. Press the U key to configure the parameter to 10. This value is loaded
into memory by waiting 2 seconds or pressing the M key.
Figure 3.91
C
al-1
10
The change width (rate of change) for PV input values can be found in any
time period. Differences with previous values in each set period are calculated,
then an alarm is output if the result exceeds the alarm value. The PV rate of
change calculation period can be configured in units of 250 ms.
If a positive value is configured for the alarm value, the PV will operate as a
change rate alarm in the rising direction. If a negative value is configured, the
PV will operate as a change rate alarm in the falling direction.
3-46
Precaution
If a shorter PV rate of change calculation period is configured, outputs for the
PV change rate alarm may repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of
time. Therefore, it is recommended that the PV change rate alarm be used with
the alarm latch turned ON.
Figure 3.92
PV
Time
Alarm value
PV change width for PV rate

of change calculation period
ON
Alarm function
OFF
ON
OFF
Table 3.O
Parameter Name
Configurable
Range
PV Rate of Change Calculation Period 1...999
Heater Burnout Alarm

(HBA), Heater Short Alarm
(HSA), and Heater
Overcurrent Alarm (HOA)
Units
Default
Sampling Cycle
4 (1 s)
HBA, HSA, and HOA Alarm Detection 900-TC8 & 900-TC16 only
Heater burnout and heater overcurrent detection are executed by:
1. measuring heater current with an optional current transformer (single
phase) or
2. transformers (3 -phase) while the control output for heating is ON, and
HS detection is executed by measuring heater current while it is OFF.
For details, refer to the following table and figure below..
Note: Heater burnout, heater short, and heater overcurrent detection cannot
be used with the control output for cooling.)
3-47
Table 3.P Heater Burnout & Heater Overcurrent Detection

Heating Control Output Status
Control Output
(Heating)
Operation
Indicator
Power to Heater
HBA Output
HS Alarm Output
Heater Overcurrent
Alarm
ON
Lit
Yes (Normal)
OFF
No (Heater burnout)
ON
Yes (HS alarm)
ON
No (Normal)
OFF
Normal
OFF
Heater overcurrent status
ON
OFF
ON
Not lit
Lit
In the above diagram, heater power is considered to be ON (normal) if the heater current, measured by the
900-CTX current transformer, is greater than the heater burnout detection current during the Ton interval. If the
heater is burned out, the measured current decreases and falls below the heater burnout detection value. The
configured controller output is then activated as the Heater Burnout Alarm.
In the above diagram, heater power is considered to be OFF (normal) if the leakage current, measured by the
900-CTX current transformer, is less than the HS alarm current during the Toff interval. If the SSR output is
short-circuited, the measured current increases beyond the HS alarm value. The output is then activated as the
HS alarm.
In the above diagram, it is regarded as normal when the heater current is less than the heater overcurrent
detection current during the Ton period. Current is increased when excessive current flows to the heater,
causing the heater overcurrent detection value to be exceeded and an OC (heater overcurrent) alarm to be
output.
Figure 3.93
Ton
Toff
ON
Control Output (heating)
OFF
Note: Heater Burnout Alarms (HBA) are not detected if the control output
(heating) ON time (Ton) - is 100 ms or less.
Note: Heater Short Alarms (HSA) are not detected if the control output
(heating) OFF time (Toff) is 100 ms or less.
For controller models with HBA, HSA, and HOA alarms, an OR output
is established between the ALM 1 function and the HBA, HSA, and
HOA alarm. If the ALM1 function is to be used for HBA, HSA, and
HOA alarms only, set 0 as the ALM1 type and do not use ALM1.
3-48
Turn the heater power ON simultaneously or before turning power ON

to the 900-TC8 or 900-TC16 controller. If the heater power is turned
ON after turning ON the 900-TC8 and 900-TC16 power, the HBA will
be activated.
The temperature controller continues to attempt to control the system
even when the HBA or HS alarm is active.
The displayed current value may sometimes differ slightly from the
actual current flowing to the heater.
Use the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor, Heater Current 2 Value
Monitor, Leakage Current 1 Monitor, and Leakage Current 2 Monitor
parameters to check the actual current being used by the controller for
alarm purposes.
If there is little difference between the displayed current in normal and
abnormal (i.e., alarm) states, detection may become unstable. To
stabilize detection, configure an alarm a current value difference of at
least 1.0 A for heaters of less than 10.0 A, and at least 2.5 A for heaters
of 10.0 A or more. If the heater current is too low, loop the load line
several times through a CT, as shown in the diagram below. Looping it
through twice will double the detection current.
Figure 3.94 Loop Load Line
Load Line
CT
Installing Current Transformers (CT)

This function can be used with 900-TC8 controller models that have the HBA,
HSA, and HOA alarms and 900-TC16 controllers with the heater
burnout/heater short/heater overcurrent option unit installed.
For the 900-TC16, connect the CT in advance to terminals 14 and 15 (CT1), or
13 and 15 (CT2). For the 900-TC8, connect the CT in advance to terminals 14
and 15 (CT1) or 15 and 16 (CT2). Then pass the heater power line through the
CT's hole.
For specifications, models and dimensions of current transformers that can be
used with this Controller, refer to Appendix A.
Single-phase Heaters
For single-phase heaters, install the CT in the position shown in the following
diagram.
3-49
Figure 3.95 CT Position for Single-Phase Heaters

Load (such as a heater)
Load
AC line
CT
To controller
CT input
Three-phase Heaters
When a 3-phase power supply is used, regardless of the types of connecting
lines, two current transformers (CTs) are required to detect heater burnout and
HS.
1. For Delta connecting power lines: Refer to the following diagram for
CT installation positions.
Note: Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered here. Take this into
account when setting the detection current.
Figure 3.96 CT Installation Positions, Delta Connecting Power Lines
Lo
ad
ad
Lo
AC line
Load
To controller CT input
AC line
CT
2. For Star (Y) connecting power lines: Refer to the following diagram
for CT installation positions.
Load
Figure 3.97 CT Installation Positions, Start (Y) Connection Power Lines

ad
Lo
ad
Lo
AC line
CT
CT
3-50
3. For V connecting power lines: Refer to the following diagram for CT

installation positions.
Figure 3.98 CT Installation Positions, V Connecting Power Lines
Lo
ad
CT

ad
Lo
AC line
CT
How to Calculate Heater Current Detection Values

Calculate the heater current value to be configured by using the
following equation:
Heater Burnout Detection 1/2 set value = Normal current value + Burnout current value
2
HS Alarm 1/2 set value =
Leakage current value (output OFF) + HS current value

2
Heater overcurrent 1/2 set value = Normal current value + Overcurrent value
2
To calculate the current for heater burnout when two or more heaters
are connected through the CT, use the heater current value when the
heater with the smallest current burns out. If all of the heaters have the
same current, use the value when any one of them burns out.
Make sure that the following conditions are satisfied:
When using a heater with a normal load current of less than 10.0 A:
(Current value at normal operation) (Current value at heater
burnout) 1 A
When the difference is less than 1 A, detection is unstable.
When using a heater with a normal load current of 10.0 A or more:
(Current value at normal operation) (Current value at heater
burnout) 2.5 A
When the difference is less than 2.5 A, detection is unstable.
3-51
The allowable controller heater current range is 0.149.9 A. Heater

burnout, HS, and heater overcurrent are not detected when the
configured alarm value is 0.0 or 50.0.
When the configured alarm value is 0.0, the Heater Burnout Alarm is
always OFF, the HS, and HO Alarm is always ON.
When the configured alarm value is 50.0, the Heater Burnout Alarm is
always ON, and the HS Alarm is always OFF, and the HOA is always
OFF.
Configure the total current value for normal heater operation to 50 A or
less. When a current value of 55.0 A is exceeded, ffff is displayed in
the Heater Current 1 (and 2) Value Monitor and Leakage Current 1 (and
2) Monitor parameters.
Application Examples
Single-Phase Heaters
EXAMPLE
Using a 200V AC, 1 kW Heater

The heater power supply provides 5 A when the current is normal, and 0 A
when there is a burnout.
Figure 3.99
Normal
5 A
Burnout
AC line
200 V
AC line
Load
5 A
200 V
CT
To CT Controller input
Load Load (such as a heater)
Burnout
0A
CT
Therefore, the heater burnout detection current is calculated as follows:
Heater burnout
(Normal current) + (Heater burnout current) 5 + 0
detection current =
= 2.5 [A]
=
2
2
3-52
EXAMPLE
Using Three 200V AC, 1 kW Heaters

The heater power supply provides 15 A when the current is normal, and 10 A
when there is a burnout.
Figure 3.100 Using Three 200V AZ, 1 kW Heaters
Normal
Burnout
15 A
200 V
10 A
Load Load
Load
200 V
15 A
Load Load
10 A
CT
Load
Burnout
CT
Therefore, the heater burnout detection current is calculated as follows:

Heater burnout
(Normal current) + (Heater burnout current) 15 + 10
detection current =
=
= 12.5 [A]
2
2
EXAMPLE
Using Three-Phase Heaters, Delta Connecting Lines

The current when each phase is normal is 17.3 A ( 3 10 A).
Figure 3.101 Delta Connecting Lines
Normal
17.3 A
Lo
ad
ad
Lo
200 V
17.3 A
Load
200 V
200 V
To CT input
17.3 A
CT
The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load line is as
follows: (heater burnout detection current) = (17.3 + 15) / 2 16.1 [A]
3-53
The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load is as follows:
(heater burnout detection current) = (17.3 + 10) / 2 13.65 [A]
To enable detection in either case, use 16.1 A as the heater burnout detection
current.
Figure 3.102 Heater Burnout Detection
Burnout
Burnout
Burnout
10 A
15 A
200 V
200 V
17.3 A
200 V
Load
Lo
ad
200 V
CT
15 A
Load
CT
200 V
To CT input
To CT input
10 A
CT
ad
Lo
200 V
ad
Lo
Lo
ad
Burnout
CT
Current when there is a burnout = 10 A 3 (3/2) = 15 A
Current when there is a burnout = 10 A 3 (1/3) = 10 A
EXAMPLE
Using Three 200V AC, 2 kW Heaters, Star Connecting Lines

The current when each phase is normal is 5.8 A ( 10 A (1 /3)).
Figure 3.103 Star Connecting Lines
Normal
Load
5.8 A
200 V
200 V
Lo
5.8 A
200 V
ad
a
Lo
CT
To CT input
5.8 A
CT
The heater burnout detection current for this connecting line is

5.4 A (= (5.8 + 5) / 2).
3-54

Burnout
Burnout
200 V
200 V
Lo
200 V
ad
a
Lo
5 A
200 V
Load
Load
5 A
CT
200 V
5 A
ad
a
Lo
5 A
To CT input
Lo
200 V
CT
To CT input
Burnout
CT
CT
Current when there is a burnout = 10 A (1/3) (3/2) = 5 A
Current when there is a burnout = 10 A (1/3) (3/2) = 5 A
EXAMPLE
Using Two 200V AC, 2 kW Heaters, V Connecting Lines

Figure 3.105 V Connecting Lines
Normal
10 A
ad
CT
To CT input
Lo
200 V
17.3 A
200 V
ad
Lo
200 V
10 A
CT
The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the common is as

follows:
Heater burnout detection current = (10 + 5) / 2 7.5 [A]
The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load is as follows:
Heater burnout detection current = (10 + 0) / 2 5 [A]
To enable detection in either case, use 7.5 A as the heater burnout detection
current.
3-55

Burnout
5 A
10 A
200 V
200 V
10 A
200 V
ad
Lo
ad
Lo
200 V
To CT input
Lo
Lo
To CT input
200 V
ad
CT
ad
CT
200 V
Burnout
5 A
CT
CT
Current when there is a burnout = 10 A (1/2) = 5 A
Current when there is a burnout = 0 A
Heater Burnout Alarm (HBA) Setup

To activate the Heater Burnout Alarm (HBA), configure:
1. the Heater Burnout (HB) ON/OFF parameter to ON in the Advanced
Setting function group, and
2. the Heater Burnout Detection 1 and Heater Burnout Detection 2
parameters in the Adjustment function group.
EXAMPLE
Operating Procedure: Moving to the Advanced Setting Function Group

In this example configure the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter to 2.5.
The Heater Burnout Detection parameter setting is already ON by default, so
set the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter.
3-56
1. Move to the Advanced Setting function group.

Press the O key for at least 3 seconds to move from the Operation
Figure 3.107
C
25
PV/SP
100
2. Select Move to Advanced Setting function group by pressing the M key.

Figure 3.108
in-t
Input type
The top parameter in the Advanced Setting function group is displayed.
Figure 3.109
amov
Moves to Advanced
-169
init
off
4. Select the Heater Burnout Detection parameter by pressing the M key.

Check that this parameter is set to ON (the default).
Next, set the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor parameter.
Figure 3.110
Heater burnout
hbu detection
on
3-57
Setting Heater Burnout Detection

Setting function group to the Initial Setting function group and then to
the Operation function group.
Figure 3.111
C
25
PV/SP
100
2. Press the O key for less than 1 second to move from the Operation
function group to the Adjustment function group.
Figure 3.112
Adjustment
function
l.adj group
display
3. Select the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor parameter by pressing the M

key. Check the current value. Next, set the Heater Burnout Detection 1
parameter.
Figure 3.113
Heater current
ct1 1 value monitor

0.0
4. Select the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter by pressing the M

key. Refer to How to Calculate Heater Current Detection Values when
making the settings.
Figure 3.114
Heater burnout
hb1 detection 1
0.0
5. For this example, set 2.5. To return to the Operation function group,
press the O key for less than 1 second.
Figure 3.115
hb1
2.5
3-58
HS Alarm Setup
To activate the HS alarm, set the HS Alarm Use parameter to ON in the
Advanced Setting function group and set the HS Alarm 1 and HS Alarm 2
EXAMPLE
Operating Procedure: Moving to the Advanced Setting Function Group

The HS Alarm Use parameter setting is already ON by default, so set the HS
Alarm 1 parameter to 2.5.
1. Move to the Advanced Setting function group.
Press the O key for at least 3 seconds to move from the Operation
Figure 3.116
C
25
PV/SP
100

Figure 3.117
in-t
Input type
Figure 3.118
amov
Moves to Advanced
init
off
-169
4. Select the HS Alarm Use parameter by pressing the M key.

Check that this parameter is set to ON (the default).
Next, set the Leakage Current 1 Monitor parameter.
Figure 3.119
HS alarm
hsu use
on
3-59
HS Alarm Settings
Setting function group to the Initial Setting function group and then to
Figure 3.120
C
25
PV/SP
100
2. Press the O key for less than 1 second to move from the Operation
function group to the Adjustment function group.
Figure 3.121
Adjustment
function
l.adj group
display
3. Select the Leakage Current 1 Monitor parameter by pressing the M key.

Check the current value. Next, set the HS Alarm 1 parameter.
Figure 3.122
Leakage current
lcr1 1 monitor
0.0
4. Select the HS Alarm 1 parameter by pressing the M key. Refer to How to

Calculate Heater Current Detection Values when setting the values.
Figure 3.123
hs1
HS alarm 1
50.0
press the O key for less than 1 second.
Figure 3.124
hs1
2.5
3-60
Heater Overcurrent Alarm

Set-up
To activate the heater overcurrent alarm (HOA), set the:

1. Heater Overcurrent Use parameter to ON in the Advanced Setting
function group and
2. Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 and Heater Overcurrent Detection 2
Note: This procedure configures the Heater Overcurrent Detection 1
parameter to 20.0.
Moving to the Advanced Setting Function Group

The default setting for the Heater Overcurrent Use parameter is ON, so set
the Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 parameter
Move to the Advanced Setting function group. Press the O Key for at least three seconds to
move from the Operation to the Initial Setting function group.
Figure 3.125
C
25
PV/SP
100
3. Press the M Key to select the Move to Advanced Setting function

group parameter. (For details on moving between function groups, refer
to 4-8 Moving to the Advanced Setting function group.)
Figure 3.126
in-t
Input Type
4. Press the D Key to enter the password (-169), and move from the
Figure 3.127
amov
-169
init
off
Move to the
Advanced
Setting
function group
3-61
5. Press the M Key to select the Heater Overcurrent Use parameter.Check

that this parameter is set to ON (the default), and then set the Heater
Overcurrent Detection 1 parameter.
Figure 3.128
Heater
ocu Overcurrent
Use
on
Configure Overcurrent Detection

1. Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the Advanced
Setting function group to the Initial Setting function group. Press the
O key again for at least one second to move to the Operation function
group.
Figure 3.129
C
25
PV/SP
100
2. Press the O Key for less than one second to move from the Operation
function group to the adjustment function group.
Figure 3.130
Adjustment function
l.adj group display
3. Press the M Key to select the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor

parameter.Check the current value, and then modify the Heater
Overcurrent Detection parameter in step #8 to meet the requirements
of your application.
Figure 3.131
ct1
Heater Current
1 Value Monitor
0.0
4. Press the M Key to select the Heater Overcurrent Detection 1

parameter. Refer to Calculating Detection Current Values when setting
the values.
Figure 3.132
oc1
50.0
Heater
Overcurrent
Detection 1
3-62
press the O Key for less than one second.
Figure 3.133
oc1
20.0
Set-up of the No. 3 Display
This section describes how to configure the No. 3 Display (900-TC8). The
Multi-SP, MV or Soak Time Remain parameters can be displayed on the No. 3
display.
PV/SP Display Selection

The following table shows the set values and display contents for the PV/SP
Display selection.
Table 3.Q PV & SP Display Selection
Set Value
Display Contents
Only PV/SP is displayed (with no No. 3 display.)
PV/SP/Multi-SP and PV/SP/MV are displayed in order.
PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Multi-SP are displayed in order. )
Only PV/SP/Multi-SP is displayed.
Only PV/SP/MV is displayed.
PV/SP/Multi-SP and PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed in order.
PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed in order.
Only PV/SP/Soak time remain is displayed.
A 2-level display is configured when shipped from the factory. (set value: 0). A
3-level display is activated if parameters are initialized. (set value: 4)
Note: For details on configuring the MV for heating and cooling control, refer
to MV Display for Heating and Cooling Control below.
When 1, 2, 5, or 6 is selected, press the M Key to display the next value
set for the PV/SP display (display 2).
3-63
EXAMPLE
When the PV/SP Display Screen Parameter Is Set to 2

Figure 3.134
Operation Function Group

PV/SP (Display 1)
PV/SP (Display 2)
Press the
25
M key
100
100
50.0
sp0
PV/SP/Multi-SP
PV/SP/MV
MV Display for Heating and

Cooling Control
25
Select either the manipulated variable (heating) or manipulated variable

(cooling) as the MV to be displayed for PV/SP/MV during heating and
cooling control. The MV Display Selection parameter is displayed only when:
1. heating/cooling control is being performed and PV/SP/MV is selected
in the PV/SP Display Screen parameter or
2. a Monitor/Setting Item Display parameter.
Table 3.R
Parameter Name
Set Value Symbol Display Contents
MV Display
Selection
Manipulated variable (heating)
C-O
c-o
Manipulated variable (cooling)
EXAMPLE
PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Multi-SP on the Process Value/Set Point Display

This procedure displays PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Multi-SP on the Process
Value/Set Point display. The PV/SP Display Screen Selection parameter is set
to 2.
1. Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the Operation
Figure 3.135
C
25
100
PV/SP
in-t
Input Type
3-64
2. Press the M Key to select the Move to Advanced Setting function

group.
Figure 3.136
amov
-169
Move to
Advanced
Function Setting
Level
3. Use the D Key to enter the password (-169). It is possible to move to

the Advanced Setting function group by either pressing the M Key or
waiting two seconds without pressing any key.
Figure 3.137
init Parameter
Initialization
off
4. Press the M Key to select the PV/SP Display Screen Selection

parameter.
Figure 3.138 PV/SP Display Screen
PV/SP Display
spdp Screen Selection

4
5. Use the U and D Keys to configure the parameter to a value of 2.

Figure 3.139
spdp
2
Setting function group to the Initial Setting function group.
Figure 3.140
in-t
Input Type
7. Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the Initial
Setting function group to the Operation function group. The MV will
be displayed on the No. 3 display.
Figure 3.141
C
25
100
50.0
PV/SP
3-65
8. Press the M Key to confirm that the Multi-SP is displayed on the No. 3
display.
Figure 3.142
C
25
PV/SP
100
sp0
System Setup/Operational
Considerations
1. Allow at least a 30 minute warm-up period for the system to fully

stabilize.
2. When self-tuning is used, either a) turn the temperature controller and
load (e.g., heater) power ON simultaneously or b) turn the load power
ON before the temperature controller. Note: If the load is turned ON
before the temperature controller, correct self-tuning and optimum
control are no longer possible.
When operation is started after system warm-up, turn the power to the
system OFF once after warm-up is completed, and then turn the
temperature controller and load power ON simultaneously.
Note: Rather than turning the temperature controller power ON again,
moving from the STOP to the RUN mode is also possible.
3. The temperature controller may be subject to the influence of radio
interference if used near a radio, TV, or wireless equipment. Refer to
Appendix on page A-1 for additional information.
3-66
Notes:
Chapter
Parameter Adjustments & Application

Considerations
Shifting Input Values
Overview
The Input Shift parameter allows you to configure the controller to
compensate for possible deviation of the measured temperature (PV) to the
actual temperature at the source (control target). The controller supports two
types of input shifts, 1-point and 2-point. The input shift type is automatically
matched to the sensor currently selected by the Input Type parameter
(configured value See Table 3.C, List of Global Temperature (GT) Input
Types). There is no shift for analog inputs. Use scaling for fine adjustments.
1-Point (Uniform) Shift

Overview
Figure 4.1
With 1-point shift operation, the Temperature Input Shift parameter

(Adjustment function group) is applied to the entire temperature input range
in a uniform or consistent manner. In other words, the adjusted value is
applied equally to each input/sensor value read by the controller and displayed
as such. For example, if the input shift value is configured to 1.2 C, the
process value is treated by the controller as 201.2 C after input shift is applied
when the measured process value is 200 C (refer to Figure 4.2).
Figure 4.2 One-Point Shift
Temperature
Upper-limit
value
After shift
Lower-limit
value
Before
shift
Input shift value
Input
0
100
4-1
4-2
Parameter Adjustments & Application Considerations
EXAMPLE
Operation Procedure: Operation Function Group

In this example, apply a 1 C by 1-shift to the input value of a type K
thermocouple sensor.
C
30
200
Figure 4.4 Adjustment Function Group

Adjustment level
l.adj display
2. Select the Temperature Input Shift parameter by pressing the M key.

Figure 4.5 Temperature Input Shift
Temperature
ins input shift

0.0
3. Press the U or D key to set 1.

Figure 4.6 Set Shift Parameter
C
ins
1.0
4. To return to the Operation function group, press the O key. The

process value is 1C larger than before the shift was applied.
C
31
200

2 seconds or by pressing the O or M key.
4-3
2-Point Shift
Overview
The 2-point shift can be applied to thermocouple, RTD, and a non-contact
sensor (infrared type K thermocouple).
Figure 4.8 Temperature Limit Shift Value
insh
Upper-limit
temperature
input shift value
insl
Lower-limit
temperature
input shift value
The input temperature range of the temperature sensors can be shifted

by setting an individual value for the upper and lower end points of the
sensor range. This means that the shift can be applied equally across the
range with separate values for each end of the range. For example, if the
Upper-Limit value is set to 2 C and the Lower-Limit value is set to 1
C, the sensor range is shifted by an average of 1.5 C at the 50% input.
Set the Upper-Limit value in the Upper-Limit Temperature Input Shift
Value parameter and the Lower-Limit value in the Lower-Limit
Temperature Input Shift Value parameter.
Figure 4.9 Two-Point Shift
Temperature
Upper-limit
value
Upper-limit temperature input shift value
After shift
Before shift
Lower-limit value
0
Input
Lower-limit temperature
input shift value
100
How to Calculate Input Shift Values

When a non-contact temperature sensor (for example, OMRON ES1B sensor)
is connected to the Bulletin 900-TC8, 900-TC16, or 900-TC32, an offset of
several degrees to several tenths of a degree can occur. For this reason, it may
be desirable to offset the readout value by 1-point or 2-point shift as described
here.
4-4
Preparations
1. Set to the temperature range to match the input specifications of the
non-contact temperature sensor (refer to Table 3.C, List of Global
Temperature (GT) Input Types). Note: The non-contact infrared sensor is
supported only in thermocouple Input Type Bulletin 900-TCX
controllers. Refer to Table 1.B through Table 1.F.)
2. Prepare a thermometer (B) capable of measuring the temperature of the
control target (C) as shown in Figure 4.10 so that 1-point shift or
2-point shift can be carried out.
Figure 4.10 Configuration when Compensating a Non-Contact Infrared
Temperature Sensor
Infrared Non-Contact
Temperature Sensor
(C) Control Target
(B) Thermometer
(A) 900-TC8, 900-TC16, or 900-TC32
Temperature Controller
Using the 1-Point Shift Method

Figure 4.11
1. In the temperature control configuration shown in Figure 4.10, bring

the set point to near the value at which the temperature of the control
target is to be controlled. Assume that the control target temperature
(C) and the control target temperature (B) match.
2. Check the control target temperature (B) and the controller readout (A).
Take the value from the following equation as the Input Shift Value, and
configure the same numerical value to cns.
Control target temperature (B) Controller readout (A) =
Input shift value
Figure 4.12 shows the effect of 1-point temperature input shift.
4-5
Figure 4.12 One-Point Temperature Input Shift

Controller readout (A)
After shift
Temperature readout
after shift (e.g. 120C)
Input shift value (e.g. 10C)
Temperature readout
before shift (e.g. 110C)
Before shift
Near set point

(e.g. 120C)
Temperature readout of
control target (B)
3. After you have configured the 1-point input shift value, check the
controller readout (A) and control target temperature (B). If they are
almost the same, this completes temperature input shift procedure.
Using the 2-Point Shift Method

Use the 2-point input shift method if you want to increase the accuracy of the
readout values across the range of your temperature sensor.
1. When using the 2-point shift method, shift the controller readout at two
points: the first, near room temperature and the second, near the
value at which the temperature of the control target is to be controlled.
Therefore, for this procedure, bring the control target temperature to
near room temperature and to near the set point, and check control
target temperature (B) and controller readout (A). Refer to Figure 4.10
2. Using the equations below, calculate the upper- and lower-limit
temperature input shift values from the readout and temperature to be
shifted that you obtained in step 1.
Equation 1: Use the following equation to calculate the Lower-Limit
temperature input shift value.
insl =
YL Y1
{(X2 Y2) (X1 Y1)} + (X1 Y1)
Y2 Y1
Equation 2: Use the following equation to calculate the Upper-Limit

temperature input shift value.
insh =
YH Y1
{(X2 Y2) (X1 Y1)} + (X1 Y1)
Y2 Y1
Figure shows the effect of shift by 2-point temperature input shift.

Note: For meanings of variables, refer to Figure .
4-6
Figure 4.13 Two-Point Temperature Input Shift

Controller readout (A)
Set temperature
upper limit YH
(e.g. 260C)
After shift
Upper-limit temperature
input shift value
Temperature readout
after input shift X2 (e.g. 110C)
Before shift
Temperature readout
before input shift Y2 (e.g. 105C)
Temperature readout
before input shift Y1 (e.g. 40C)
Temperature readout
after input shift X1 (e.g. 25C)
Lower-limit temperature
input shift value
Temperature readout of
control target (B)
0 X1 room temperature
(e.g. 25C)
Near X2 set point (e.g. 110C)
Set temperature
lower limit YL (e.g. 0C)
3. After you have configured the calculated values for cnsl for and
cnsh, check/compare controller readout (A) with the control target
temperature (B).
Figure 4.14 Temperature Input Shift Value
C
insh
Upper-limit
temperature
input shift
value
insl
Lower-limit
temperature
input shift
value
10.0
10.0
4. Although the input shift was carried out at two points, close to room
temperature (ambient temperature) and near to the set point, you may
want to consider selecting points close to each end of the sensor range
to improve accuracy across the full range of the sensor measurement
range.
Note: Before selecting these values, check that they will not damage the
control application, if applied.
EXAMPLE
4-7
In this example, we use the non-contact (infrared) sensor

type K thermocouple 0260 C specification to do a
2-point shift.
YL and YH in equations 1 and 2 are set temperature
Lower-Limit (YL = 0 C) and set temperature Upper-Limit
(YH = 260 C). Check the temperature of the control
target.
When the room temperature (X1) is 25 C, the readout on
the controller (Y1) is 40 C, and when the temperature near
the set point (X2) is 110 C, the readout on the controller
(Y2) becomes 105C.
Lower-limit temperature input shift value:
C
Lower-limit
insl temperature
input shift
-27.3
insl =
0 40
105 40
value
x {(110 105) (25 40)} + (25 40) = 27.3C
Upper-limit temperature input shift value:

C
Upper-limit
insh temperature
input shift
52.7
insh =
60 40
105 40
value
x {(110 105) (25 40)} + (25 40) = 52.7C
4-8
Alarm Functions/
Parameters
Alarm Hysteresis
You can configure/program how much deviation (hysteresis) is allowed from
the alarm value before the alarm comes on and reset.
The hysteresis of alarm outputs when alarms are switched ON/OFF can be
set as follows:
Figure 4.15 Hysteresis of Alarm Outputs
Upper-Limit
Alarm
Lower-Limit
Alarm
Alarm Hysteresis
ON
Alarm Hysteresis
ON
Normal
Operating
Area
OFF
Normal
Operating
Area
OFF
SP
SP
Alarm Value
Alarm Value
Alarm hysteresis is independently set for each alarm output in the Alarm
Hysteresis 13 parameters (Advanced Setting function group).
Note: The default is 0.2 (C or F depending on your units selection) for
temperature inputs and 0.02% of full scale (FS) for analog inputs.
Standby Alarm Sequence

Standby alarm sequence is a function which allows you to configure the alarm
outputs to be temporarily disabled until after the first alarm condition occurs.
From then on, the alarm output is active for all future alarm conditions.
For example, in a standard heating application, if you used the standard low
alarm configuration, the alarm would be active as soon as you switch the
controller ON. However, with standby sequence, the alarm output is disabled
during the first warm-up, and the temperature has to rise above the alarm set
point before the alarm can become active. Then, if the temperature falls below
the alarm set point, the output is active.
Restart
As mentioned above, the standby sequence is canceled after the first real
alarm clears. If desired, it can be restarted later by the Standby Sequence
parameter (Advanced Setting function group). For details, refer to page 5-72,
Standby Sequence Reset Method.
4-9
Alarm Latch
Alarm latch is a function where you can configure the alarm output once
turned ON to stay ON regardless of the process temperature.
The alarm latch function can be canceled by:
1. Turning the controller power OFF. Note, however, that it can also be
canceled by switching to the Initial Setting function group,
Communications Setting function group, Advanced Setting function
group, or Calibration function group.
2. Use the PF key (900-TC8).
3. Use an event input (900-TC8 and 900-TC16).
Summary of Alarm
Operations
The following figure summarizes the operation of alarms when the Alarm
Type parameter is set to lower-limit alarm with standby sequence and close
in alarm is set.
Figure 4.16 Operation of Alarms Summary
Alarm type: Lower-limit alarm with standby sequence
PV
Alarm value
Alarm hysteresis
Time
Standby sequence
canceled
Alarm
ON
OFF
ON (closed)
Output
OFF (open)
Table 4.A
Symbol
Parameter: Group
Description
alh
Alarm 1 to 3 Hysteresis:
Initial Setting function
group
Alarm
rest
Standby Sequence:
Advanced Setting
function group
Alarm
= 1 to 3
4-10
Configuration of Scaling
Upper-Limits and Scaling
Lower-Limits for Analog
Input
Figure 4.17
in-h
Scaling Upper Limit
in-l
Scaling Lower Limit
dp
Decimal Point
Overview
When an analog input sensor is selected, scaling to engineering units (e.g., lbs)
that match the application is possible.
Scaling is configured in the Scaling Upper-Limit, Scaling Lower-Limit, and
Decimal Point parameters (Initial Setting function group). These parameters
cannot be used when a temperature Input Type (e.g., RTD) is selected.
The Scaling Upper-Limit parameter allows you to configure the physical
quantity to be expressed by the Upper-Limit input value. The Scaling
Lower-Limit parameter sets the physical quantity to be expressed by the
Lower-Limit value. The Decimal Point parameter specifies the number of
digits to the right of the decimal point.
Figure 4.18 shows a scaling example of a 420 mA input, supported by
900-TC8 and 900-TC16. After scaling, the humidity sensor input can be
directly read from the controller as a percentage of humidity. However, the
display will not indicate%, only a value. The decimal point is configured one
digit to the right.
Figure 4.18 Input Scaling
Readout
(humidity)
Upper-limit value (95.0%)
Lower-limit value (10.0%)
20 mA
0mA
Input
(420 mA)
0
100%FS
4-11
EXAMPLE
Operation Procedure
In this example, configure the scaling upper- and Lower-Limits so that inputs
420 mA become 10.0%95.0%.
1. Press the
key for at least 3 seconds to move from the Operation
Figure 4.19
in-t
Input type
2. Select Scaling Upper-Limit by pressing M.

Figure 4.20
Scaling upper
in-h limit
100

Figure 4.21
in-h
950
4. Select Scaling Lower-Limit by pressing M.

Figure 4.22
Scaling lower
in-l limit
0

Figure 4.23
in-l
100
4-12
6. Select the decimal point position by pressing M.

Figure 4.24 Press the U or D key to set the parameter to 1.
dp
Decimal point
Figure 4.25
dp
1
7. To return to the Operation function group press the

1 second.
key for at least

2 seconds or by pressing the
or M key.
Executing the Heating and

Cooling Control Mode
Overview
Several forms/modes of heating, cooling, or heating and cooling control can
be used with Bulletin 900 controllers. The heating and cooling control mode
operates when h-c: heating and cooling is selected in the Standard/Heating
and Cooling parameter (Initial Setting function group). To assign the function
of your outputs and alarms based on the control mode use the Control Output
X Assignment and Alarm Y Assignment parameters in the Advanced Settings
function group. Refer to the table below
The following functions are assigned to outputs in the initial status.
Table 4.B Output and Alarm Assignments

Parameter Name
Symbol
Initial Status
Control Output 1 Assignment
out1
Control output for heating
Control Output 2 Assignment (900-TC8 & 900-TC16 only)
out2
Not assigned
Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment
sub1
Alarm 1
Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment (900-TC8 & 900-TC16 only)
sub2
Alarm 2
Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment (900-TC8 only)
sub3
Alarm 3
Each output assignment is automatically initialized as shown below when the control module is changed.
4-13
Table 4.C Example: 900-TC8 & 900-TC16

Without Control Output 2
Parameter Name Symbol
With Control Output 2
Standard
Heating/Cooling
Standard
Heating/Cooling
Control Output 1
Assignment
out1
Control Output
(heating)
Control Output
(heating)
Control Output
(heating)
Control Output
(heating)
Control Output 2
Assignment
out2
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Not assigned
Auxiliary Output 1
Assignment
sub1
Alarm 1
Alarm 1
Alarm 1
Alarm 1
Auxiliary Output 2
Assignment
sub2
Alarm 2
Control Output
(cooling)
Alarm 2
Alarm 2
No parameter assignment is displayed because there is no control output

The output set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter becomes the program END output unless the program pattern is OFF.
For the 900-TC8, the Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment parameter is set for control output (cooling) (the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameter is set for alarm 2).
The heating/cooling operation of the control outputs will switch when the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter is set to direct.
When DRS (Invert Direct/Reverse Operation) is assigned for an Event Input Assignment (1 or 2), control will start with the contents set for the Direct/Reverse Operation
parameter inverted when the event input turns ON, and with the contents left according to the setting when the event
input turns OFF. For details on event inputs and control combined with the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter, refer to Control by Inverting Direct/ Reverse Operation.
This function is not supported by 900-TC32.
When heating/cooling control is selected, the Dead Band and Cooling Coefficient parameters can be used.
Table 4.D Example: 900-TC32

Parameter Name
Symbol
Standard
Heating/Cooling
out1
Control output (heating)
Aux1 Output 1 Assignment
sub2
Alarm 1
Control output (cooling)
The Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter becomes the program end output unless the Program Pattern parameter is configured to OFF.
Dead Band (Heating and Cooling Control)

When the heating and cooling control mode is selected, the Dead Band
parameter can be used. The dead band is configured with the set point as its
center (refer to Figure 4.26). The dead band width is the configured value of
the Dead Band parameter (Adjustment function group). Setting a negative
value produces an overlap band. If an overlap band is configured the bumpless
function may not operate when switching between automatic and manual
operation.
Note: The default is 0.0 EU for controllers with temperature inputs and
0.00% full scale for controllers with analog inputs.
4-14
Figure 4.26 Dead Band

Dead band:
dead band width = positive
Output
Heating side
Cooling side
Overlap band:
dead band width = negative
Output
Heating side
Cooling side
PV
Set point
PV
Set point
Cooling Coefficient (Heating and Cooling Control)

When the heating and cooling control mode and PID control method are
selected, the Cooling Coefficient parameter can be used. If the heating and
cooling functional characteristics of the control target greatly differ, this could
limit satisfactory control performance from being obtained by the same PID
values. To reduce the possibility of this occurring, adjust the proportional band
(P) at the cooling side of the set point using the cooling coefficient to balance
control between the heating and cooling sides. In heating and cooling control
the proportional band, (P) at the heating or cooling side is calculated by the
following formula:
P for control output assigned to heating side = P
P for control output assigned to cooling side = P for control output
assigned to heating side cooling coefficient
The cooling coefficient is multiplied by the P for the control output assigned
to the heating side to obtain control with characteristics that differ from those
of the control output assigned to the heating side.
Figure 4.27
Output
P for control output

assigned to heating side
0
Output
assigned to heatP for control output
ing side 1.0
assigned to heating side 1.0
assigned to heating side
assigned to cooling side
assigned to cooling side
PV
PV
0
Set point
P for control output assigned to
heating side 0.8
P for control output assigned to

heating side 1.5
Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjustment

By executing AT during heating/cooling control, the cooling coefficient can
be automatically calculated along with the PID parameters.
4-15
Table 4.E
Parameter Name
Setting Range
Default
Automatic Cooling
Coefficient Adjustment
OFF: Disabled, ON:

Enabled
OFF
Note: If there is strong non-linear gain for the cooling characteristics, such as
when cooling water boils for cooling control, it may not be possible to
obtain the optimum cooling coefficient at the Controller, and control
may take the form of oscillating waves. If that occurs, increase the
proportional band or the cooling coefficient to improve control.
Setup of Heating and Cooling

To configure the heating and cooling control mode, either set the Standard
parameter or Heating and Cooling, Dead Band, and Cooling Coefficient (when
using the PID method) parameters.
EXAMPLE
Operation Procedure: Heating and Cooling Control Selection

Standard or Heating and Cooling = Heating and Cooling
1. Press the
Figure 4.28
Standard or
s-hc heating/cooling
stnd
2. Select heating and cooling control in the Initial Setting function group.
stnd:: Standard control
h-c: Heating and cooling control
EXAMPLE
Operation Procedure: Configuring the Cooling Coefficient

Cooling coefficient = 10
1. Select Cooling Coefficient in the Adjustment function group. In this
example, set the parameter to 10.
4-16
Figure 4.29
c-sc
Cooling
coefficient
1.00
2. Press the U key to set the parameter to 10.00. The setting range is
0.0199.99.
c-sc
10.00
EXAMPLE
Operation Procedure: Configuring the Dead Band

Dead Band = 5
1. Select Dead Band in the Adjustment function group.
Figure 4.30
C
c-db
Dead band
0.0
2. Press the U key to set the parameter to 5.0. The setting range is
199.9+999.9.
Figure 4.31
C
c-db
5.0
Using the Event Input

Feature 900-TC8 &
900-TC16
Overview
When the appropriate option unit (refer to Tables 1.C and 1.E) is installed,
discrete (ON/OFF) inputs can be wired to the Bulletin 900 to cause the
controller to perform several pre-defined/configurable tasks. These inputs are
generically called event inputs.
4-17
Setting Event Input

Event inputs can be used for Multi-SP, RUN/STOP, Auto/Manual
Switch, Program Start, Invert Direct/Reverse Operation, 100% AT
Execute/Cancel, 40% AT Execute/Cancel, Setting Change
Enable/Disable, and Alarm Latch Cancel.
Of these, only the number of event inputs (0 to 2) set in the Number of
Multi-SP Uses parameter (Initial Setting function group) are used for the
multi-SP function.
Event inputs (1 and 2) that are not used for the multi-SP function are
assigned using the Event Input Assignment (1 and 2) parameters (Initial
Setting function group).
4-18
When using event inputs to switch the multi-SP, the event input
assignment display will not appear. Whether the set value and event
input assignments 1 and 2 will be displayed or hidden is shown in the
tables below.
Do not connect the contacts from the same switch to more than one
900-TC Controller.
Table 4.F
Number of
Multi-SP Uses Event Input Assignment 1
0
Displayed (Multi-SP not used)
Hidden (Multi-SP, 2 Points).
Hidden (Multi-SP, 4 Points).
Event Input Assignment 2

Displayed (Event Input 2 not
used as Multi-SP Switch).
Two set points are set externally by using the Number of Multi-SP Uses
parameter
Switching is possible between two set points (0 and 1) by setting the
Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter to 1. The default setting is 1 and
does not need to be changed to switch between two set points. Set
points 0 and 1 are specified by the status of event input 1.
Figure 4.32 Event Inputs
900-TC16 Event Inputs
900-TC8 Event Inputs
EV1 +
EV2 +
EV1
EV2
EV1
EV1 EV2 +
EV2
DO NOT apply on external voltage source to the Event Input Terminals.
When you want to configure event inputs to change the controllers four
pre-set Set points, you must properly configure the Number of Multi-SP Uses
parameter. Two set points (0 or 1) can be selected when the Number of
Multi-SP Uses parameter is set to 1 (default). This setting need not be changed.
Set point 0 or 1 is specified by the ON/OFF state of Event
Input 1.
4-19
Multi-SP
Selecting Multi-SP by Event Input
Multi-SP by event input is a function for setting the value of set points 03 in
advance, and selecting these set points by a combination of Event Inputs 1 and
2.
Multi-SP selection from external (event) inputs can be used when the proper
option event input unit is mounted in the Bulletin 900 and the Number of
Multi-SP Uses parameter is set to 1 or 2 (refer to Tables 4.G and 4.H).
Table 4.G When Number of Multi-SP Uses Parameter is Set to 1
Event Input 1
Selected Set Point
OFF
Use Set Point 0
ON
Use Set Point 1
Table 4.H When Number of Multi-SP Uses Parameter is Set to 2

Event Input 1
Event Input 2
Selected Set Point
OFF
OFF
Use Set Point 0
ON
OFF
Use Set Point 1
OFF
ON
Use Set Point 2
ON
ON
Use Set Point 3
Note: In order for the controller to begin the multi-set point function, the
physical input must be ON for 50 ms minimum.
Selecting Multi-SP by Keypad Operation

You can select Set Points 03 from the controller keypad by properly
configuring the value of the Multi-SP Uses parameter. in the adjustment
function group.To change set points from the controller keypad, the multi-SP
conditions are as follows.
When the option event input unit is:
When the option event input unit is NOT mounted in the Bulletin 900,
and Multi-SP is configured to ON.
When the option event input unit is mounted in the Bulletin 900, the
Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter is configured to 0 and the
Multi-SP parameter is configured to ON.
4-20
The following table shows the relationship between the Multi-SP Uses
parameter value and the selected set point.
Table 4.I
Multi-SP Uses Parameter Value
Selected Set Point
Select Set Point 0 value
Note: The set point can also be switched using PC communications. This is
supported by 900-TC8, 900-TC16, and 900-TC32.
Multi-SP Setup
EXAMPLE
Operation Procedure: To Select Set Points (0/1/2/3)

The following example configures the Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter to
2 (Multi-SP, 4 points). Refer to Table 4.I.
Before you configure the Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter, you must first
cancel protection from the Advanced Setting function group. For additional
details on how to cancel key protection, refer to page 4-33, Using the Key Protect
Function Group.
1. Press the
Figure 4.33
C
25
100
PV/SP
4-21

Figure 4.34
in-t
Input type
3. Press the D key to enter the password (169) to cancel protection. You
can now move to the Advanced Setting function group by pressing the
M key or leaving the setting for at least 2 seconds.
Figure 4.35
amov
-169
Figure 4.36
Parameter
init initialization
off
4. Select Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter by pressing the M key.

Figure 4.37
ev-m
Number of
multi-SP uses
5. Press the U key to set the parameter to 2. This allows set point change
from event input (refer to Table 4.F).
Figure 4.38
ev-m
2
6. To return to the Initial Setting function group press the

least 1 second.
7. To return to the Operation function group press the
1 second.
key for at
key for at least
Set Points 0, 1, 2, and 3 are selected according to the ON/OFF states of Event
Inputs 1 and 2.
4-22
Figure 4.39 Event Inputs

900-TC8
900-TC16
EV1 EV2 +
EV1
EV2
EV1 +
EV1
EV2 +
EV2
Note: Do not apply an external voltage source to the Event Input Terminals.
Operation Commands Other than Multi-SP

The following table shows the functions assigned when an Event Input
Assignment (1 or 2) is displayed.
Table 4.J When Event Input Assignment (1 or 2) is Displayed
Setting
Function
none
None
stop R
RUN/STOP
manu
Auto/Manual
prst
Program Start (See note 1.)
drs
Invert Direct/Reverse Operation
at-2
100% AT Execute/Cancel
at-1
40% AT Execute/Cancel (See note 2.)
wtpt
Setting Change Enable/Disable
lat
Alarm Latch Cancel
Note (1) PRST (Program Start) can be set even when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF, but the function
will be disabled.
(2) This function can be set for heating/cooling control, but the function will be disabled.
When any of the following functions are set for an Event Input Assignment
parameter, the same function cannot be set for another Event Input
Assignment parameter: STOP (RUN/STOP), MANU (Auto/Manual Switch),
PRST (Program Start), DRS (Invert Direct/Reverse Operation), AT-2 (100%
AT Execute/Cancel), AT-1 (40% AT Execute/Cancel), WTPT (Setting
Change Enable/Disable), or LAT (Alarm Latch Cancel). Turn event inputs
ON and OFF while the power is being supplied. Event input ON/OFF
changes are detected for inputs of 50 ms or longer. (However, inputs of 250
ms or longer is determined using logic operations.)
The functions are described in detail below. Event inputs 1 and 2 are taken as
examples.
4-23
Executing RUN/STOP Controller Mode Change

When the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter
is set to STOP (RUN/STOP), control is started (RUN) when event input 1 or
2 is OFF. Control is stopped when 1 or 2 is ON (refer to Table 4.K). While
control is stopped, the controllers STP (stop) LED lights. Alarm outputs will
operate according to the selected value(s).
Table 4.K
Setting
Input Contact
Controller Mode
Event Input 1 or 2
ON
STOP
Event Input 1 or 2
OFF
RUN
Note: The Multi-SP Uses parameter must be configured to 0 or 1 for

RUN/STOP control by event inputs to function (refer to Table 4.F).
Switching Between Auto and Manual Control

is set to MANU (auto/manual), manual control will start when Event Input 1
or 2 turns ON. Auto control will start when the input turns OFF.
The MANU indicator will light during manual control.
Table 4.L
Setting
Input Contact
Control Mode
Event Input 1 or 2
OFF
Automatic
Event Input 1 or 2
ON
Manual
Controlling the Start of the Simple Program Function

is set to PRST (program start), the simple program will start when event input
1 or 2 turns ON. The program will be reset when the input turns OFF and the
RUN/STOP status will automatically switch to STOP mode. If the program
END output is ON, the program END output will turn OFF.
4-24
Table 4.M
Setting
Input Contact
Program Status
Event Input 1 or 2
OFF
reset
Event Input 1 or 2
ON
Start
Control by Inverting Direct/Reverse Operation

When DRS (Invert Direct/Reverse Operation) is set for the Event Input
Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter and the Direct/Reverse
Operation parameter is set for reverse operation, control starts with direct
operation (cooling control) when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and control
starts with reverse operation (heating control) when the event input turns
OFF.
Table 4.N
Input
Contact
Direct/Reverse
Operation Parameter
Status
Event
Input 1 or
2
OFF
Direct operation (cooling)
Reverse operation
(heating)
Reverse operation (heating)
Event
Input 1 or
2
ON
Reverse operation (heating)
Reverse operation
(heating)
Setting
Switching 100% AT Execute/Cancel

When AT-2 (100% AT Execute/Cancel) is set for either the Event Input
Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter, 100% AT will be
executed when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and will be cancelled when the
input turns OFF.
Table 4.O
Setting
Input Contact
Status
Event input 1 or 2
OFF
100% AT cancelled
Event input 1 0r 2
ON
100% AT executed
4-25
Switching 40% ATExecute/Cancel

When AT-1 (40% AT Execute/Cancel) is set for either the Event Input
Assignment1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter, 40% AT will be
executed when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and will be cancelled when the
input turns OFF
Table 4.P
Setting
Input
Status
Event Input 1 or 2
OFF
40% AT cancelled
Event Input 1 or 2
ON
40% AT executed
Switching Setting Change Enable/Disable

When WTPT (Setting Change Enable/Disable) is set for either the Event
Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter, the setting
change will be disabled when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and will be enabled
when the input turns OFF.
Table 4.Q
Setting
Input Contact
Status
Event input 1 or 2
OFF
Enabled
Event input 1 or 2
ON
Disabled
Switching Alarm Latch Cancel

When LAT (Alarm Latch Cancel) is set for either the Event Input Assignment
1or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter, all alarm latches (alarms 1 to 3,
heater burnout, HS alarm, and heater over-current latch) will be cancelled
when event input 1 or 2 turns ON.
Table 4.R
Setting
Input Contact
Status
Event input 1 or 2
OFF
---
Event input 1 or 2
ON
Cancelled
4-26
Parameters
Table 4.S
Configuring the SP Upperand Lower-Limit Values
Symbol
Parameter: Level
Description
eV-1
Event Input Assignment 1: Initial Function of event input function

Setting function group
eV-2
Event Input Assignment 2: Initial

eV-m
Number of Multi-SP Uses: Initial

Set Point Limiter

The maximum allowable configuration range of the set point is limited by the
set point limiter parameter. The set point limiter is used to prevent someone
from configuring the set point to some value outside the maximum range
called for by the application, thereby preventing the control target from
reaching an abnormal temperature. The upper- and lower-limit values of the
set point limiter are configured from the Set Point Upper-Limit and Set Point
Lower-Limit parameters in the Initial Setting function group, respectively.
Figure 4.40
Sensor range
Set point limitter
Setting range
Set point
A
Changed to the
new upper limit
value
B
x
Changed to upper
limit value
Set point
C
Input type changed

Set point
Upper- and lower-limit values of the limitter
Sensor upper- and lower-limit values
Set point
B
(setting possible)
x (setting not possible)
4-27
Application Considerations
If a change is made to the set point upper and/or lower-limit value with
the current set point outside the limiter range, the set point is forcibly
changed by the controller to the sensors upper SP limit or lower SP
limit value, whichever is closer.
When the Input Type or temperature units are changed, the set point
limiter is forcibly reset to that of the new sensor setting range.
Table 4.T Parameters
Symbol
Parameters: Function group
Description
sl-h
Set Point Upper-Limit: Initial Setting function

group
For limiting the SP

setting
sl-l
Set Point Lower-Limit: Initial Setting function

group
Set Point Limit Setup

To configure the Set Point Upper- and Lower-Limit parameters, you must
be in the Initial Setting function group. This example describes how to
configure the set point limiter when using a type K thermocouple (normal
full range: 2001300C).
Figure 4.41
-200
1300
Normal/Full Sensor range (Type K thermocouple)
Set point limitter range

-100
1000
EXAMPLE
Operation Procedure: Configuring the Set Point Upper-Limit

Configure the Set Point Upper-Limit Value to 1000
1. Press the
4-28
Figure 4.42
in-t
Input type
2. Select Set Point Upper-Limit parameter by using the M key.

Figure 4.43
C
Set point upper-
sl-h limit
1300
3. Press the U or D key to set the value to 1000.

EXAMPLE
Operation Procedure: Configuring the Set Point Lower-Limit

C
sl-h
1000
Configure the Set Point Lower-Limit Value to 100.

1. Select Set Point Lower-Limit parameter in the Initial Setting function
group by using the M key.
Figure 4.44
C
sl-l
Set point lower

limit
-200
2. Press the U or D key to set the value to 100.

Figure 4.45
C
sl-l
-100
Note: The newly configured value or parameter is loaded into the controller
2 seconds or by pressing the
or M key.
Executing the SP Ramp

Function to Limit the SP
Rate of Change
4-29
SP Ramp
With the SP ramp function, the controller can limit the rate at which a change
in the set point will impact the control according to the user-defined SP ramp
value. The time interval in seconds/minutes which the set point is limited is
referred to as the SP ramp.
Figure 4.46
SP
SP ramp
SP after change
SP ramp value
Time unit of ramp rate (s/min.)
SP before change
Time
Change point
The maximum allowed rate of change during SP ramp is specified by the SP

Ramp Set Value and SP Ramp Time Unit parameters.
Note: When the SP Ramp Set Value is OFF (default), the SP ramp function is
disabled.
Changing the ramp set point can be monitored in the Set Point during SP
Ramp parameter (Operation function group). Use this parameter when
monitoring the SP ramp.
Operation of the SP ramp function is also the same during switching of the set
points by the Multi-SP parameter.
Table 4.U
Symbol
Parameter: Function Group
Description
ol-h
ol-l
sl-h
sl-l
sprt
spru
alsp
MV Upper-Limit: Adjustment function group

MV Lower-Limit: Adjustment function group
Set Point Upper-Limit: Initial Setting function group
Set Point Lower-Limit: Initial Setting function group
SP Ramp Set Value: Adjustment function group
SP Ramp Time Unit: Advanced Setting function group
Alarm SP Selection: Advanced Setting function group
To limit the manipulated variable

To limit the manipulated variable
To limit the SP setting
To limit the SP setting
To limit the SP rate of change
Unit for setting the SP
Alarm SP selection
4-30
SP Ramp Application Considerations

SP Ramp Operation at Startup
If the SP ramp function is enabled when the Bulletin 900 controller is turned
ON, or when RUN is switched to from STOP, the process value (PV) may
reach the Set Point SP ramp value in the same way as when the set point is
changed. In this case, operation is carried out by the controller with the
process value regarded as the set point before the change was made.
The direction the SP ramp changes is according to the relationship between
the process value and the set point (refer to Figure 4.47).
Figure 4.47
PV < SP
PV > SP
SP
SP
SP ramp
SP ramp
Set point
PV
Same
change rate
Set point
PV
Time
Power ON
Time
Power ON
Restrictions During SP Ramp Operation

Auto-tuning execution starts after the end of SP ramp.
When control is stopped or an error occurs, the SP ramp function is disabled.
4-31
Alarms During SP Ramp Operation

The operation of alarms during SP ramp operation depends on whether
alarms are configured to be based on the ramp set point or the target set point
(refer to the Figure 4.48). The set point to be used is configured in the Alarm
SP Selection parameter.
Figure 4.48
Alarm SP Selection = Ramp SP (Alarm Type: 1 (Upper/Lower Limits))
Temperature
Alarm output ON
Alarm output ON
Time
Alarm SP Selection = Target SP (Alarm Type: 1 (Upper/Lower Limits))

Temperature
Alarm output ON
Alarm output ON
Time
To Move to the Advanced

By default, the Advanced Setting function group is protected and you cannot
directly move to this function group. To move to this function group you must
first cancel the protection applied by the Protect function group in the Initial
Setting/Communications Protect parameter. Refer to page 4-33, Using the Key
Protect Function Group.
EXAMPLE
Operation Procedure: To Remove Protection and Move to the Advanced

1. Press the
and M keys simultaneously for at least 3 seconds in the
Operation function group.
4-32
2. The controller moves to the Protect function group, and

Operation/Adjustment Protection is displayed.
Figure 4.49
Operation/adjust-
oapt ment protect

0
3. Press the M key once to move to Initial Setting/Communications

Protection.
Figure 4.50
Initial setting/
icpt communications protect

1
4. Configure the programmed value to 0.

Figure 4.51
icpt
0
5. Press the
and M keys simultaneously for at least 1 second to return
to the Operation function group.
Figure 4.52
C
25
PV/SP
100
6. Press the
key for at least 3 seconds to move to the Initial Setting
function group from the Operation function group.
Figure 4.53
in-t
5
Input type
4-33

pressing the M key.
Figure 4.54
amov
-169
Move to advanced function

setting level
8. Press the UD keys to enter the password (169), and either press the
M key or leave the setting for at least 2 seconds to move to the
Advanced Setting function group from the Initial Setting function
group.
Figure 4.55
C
25
PV/SP
100
9. To return to the initial setting function group, press the O key for at
least 1 second.
Figure 4.56
Move to
Setting
in-t Initial
Group
10. To return to the operation function group, press the O key for at least
1 second.
Figure 4.57
C
Move to
25 Operation
Function
100
Using the Key Protect

Function Group
Group
Key Protect
The Key Protect feature prevents some keypad functions from working. Four
different modes of protection are provided: Operation/Adjustment
protection, Initial Setting/Communications protection, Setting change
protection and PF Key protection.
The Key Protect feature restricts the type of parameters that can be used.
4-34
Operation/Adjustment Protection
To move to the Protect function group from the Operation or Adjustment
function groups, press the O and M keys simultaneously for at least
3 seconds.
Note: The key pressing time can be changed using the Move to Protect
function group time in the Advanced Settings function group.
After the time interval, the controller display will look as follows:
Figure 4.58
oapt
0
Table 4.V shows the relationship between configured/set values and the range
of protection.
When the Key Protect parameter is configured to 0, parameters are not
protected.
Note: The default is 0..
Table 4.V Relationship Between Configured/Set Values & Range of Protection
Set Value
Level
Operation Group
PV
Can be displayed
Can be displayed
Can be displayed
Can be displayed
PV/SP
Can be displayed
and changed
Can be displayed
and changed
Can be displayed
and changed
Can be displayed
Others
Can be displayed
and changed
Can be displayed
and changed
Cannot be
displayed and
moving to other
groups is not
possible.
Cannot be
displayed and
moving to other
groups is not
possible.
Can be displayed
and changed
Cannot be
displayed and
moving to other
groups is not
possible.
Cannot be
displayed and
moving to other
groups is not
possible.
Cannot be
displayed and
moving to other
groups is not
possible.
Adjustment Group
4-35
Initial Setting/Communications Protection

This portion of the Key Protect function group restricts movement by keypad
operation to the Initial Setting function group, Communications Setting
function group, and Advanced Setting function group (refer to Table 4.W).
Figure 4.59
icpt
1
Table 4.W Initial Setting/Communications Protection

Function Group
Communications
Setting
Set Value
Initial Setting
Advanced Setting
Possible to reach Possible to reach
Possible to reach
Possible to reach Possible to reach
Not possible to reach
Not possible to
reach
Not possible to reach Not possible to reach
Default
Setting Change Protection

This portion of the Protect group protects controller setup from being
changed by operating the keys on the front panel.
Figure 4.60
wtpt
off
The all protect indication (

is configured to ON.
) will light when Setting Change Protect
Table 4.X
Configured Value
Description
OFF
Setup can be changed by key operation.
ON
Setup cannot be changed by key operation. (The

Protect function group can be changed.)
Default
The all protect indication (

is configured.
) will light when Setting Change protect
4-36
PF Key Protect
pfpt
off
Table 4.Y
Set Value Description
OFF
PF Key enabled
ON
PF Key disabled (Operation as function key prohibited).
Default
Entering the Password to Move to the Protect Function Group

For additional system security, you can configure your controller so that you
need to enter a user-defined Password to Move to the Protect function group.
This user-defined password is configured using the Password to Move to
Protect function group parameter located in the Protect function group. If a
password is configured, before you can move to the Protect function group
you must enter the previously configured password when the Move to Protect
function group parameter is displayed. If no password is configured
(configured to 0) the Move to Protect function group parameter will not be
displayed and the Protect function group can be moved to directly without
entering a password.
Setting the Password

EXAMPLE
Operating Procedure: To Configure the Password to 1234

Use the following procedure to configure the Password to Move to the Protect
function group.
Figure 4.61
C
25
100
PV/SP
4-37
1. Press the O and M keys simultaneously for at least the time configured
in the Move to Protect function group time parameter to move from the
Operation function group to the Protect function group.
Figure 4.62
Operation/adjust-
oapt ment protection

0
2. Select the Password to Move to Protect function group parameter by

pressing the M key.
Figure 4.63
Password to
to protect
prlp move
function group
3. Press the O and U keys to set the parameter to 1234.

(To prevent configuring the password incorrectly, the U and O keys or
D and O keys must be pressed simultaneously to set the password.)
Figure 4.64
prlp
1234
Note: Protection cannot be cleared or changed without the password. Be

careful not to forget it.
4-38
EXAMPLE
Operating Procedure: To Move to the Protect Function Group With a

Password of 1234
Use the following procedure to move to the Protect function group.
Figure 4.65
C
25
PV/SP
100
1. Press the O and M keys simultaneously for at least the time

configured in the Move to Protect function group time parameter to
move from the Operation function group to the Protect function group.
Figure 4.66
pmov
2. Press the U key to configure the parameter to 1234 (password input).

Figure 4.67
pmov
1234
3. Move to the Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter by pressing the

O or M key or leaving the setting for at least 2 seconds.
Figure 4.68
Operation/adjust-
oapt ment protect

0
4-39
EXAMPLE
Operating Procedure: With No Password Set

Figure 4.69
C
25
PV/SP
100
1. Press the O and M keys simultaneously for at least the time

configured in the Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter to move
from the Operation function group to the Protect function group.
When a password is not configured, the Operation/Adjustment Protect
parameter will be displayed.
Figure 4.70
oapt
Operation/adjustment protect
Communications Operation Command to Move to the Protect function group

The Write Variable operation command can be used via communications to
write the password to the Move to Protect function group parameter. When
the correct password is written, the display will change to the Operation/
Adjustment Protect parameter and writing the parameters in the Protect
function group will be enabled.
Note: If the Write Variable operation command is used to write the wrong
password to the Move to Protect function group parameter after the
correct parameter has been written, the Move to Protect function group
parameter will be displayed and any Write Variable operation
commands to write parameters in the protect function group will result
in operation errors.
Note: If a password is not configured or if it is configured to 0, the display will
change to the Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter and writing the
parameters in the Protect function group will be enabled immediately.
PV Color Change
PV Color Change Function

Use the PV color change function to configure the color of the PV display
(No. 1 display).
4-40
There are three display colors, orange, red, and green, and you can select from
the following three modes and eight functions.
Figure 4.71
colr
PV change
color
Constant: This mode displays orange, red, or green all the time.
Linked to Alarm 1: This mode switches the PV display color from red
to green when Alarm 1 turns ON or from green to red when Alarm 1
turns ON.
Linked to PV stable band: This mode switches the PV display color
between red outside the PV stable band and green within PV stable
band, or between green outside the PV stable band and red within PV
stable band.
Set the PV stable band in the PV Stable Band parameter (Advanced
Setting function group).
Default: The default is red (red).
The following table shows the display functions that can be configured using
the PV color change function.
Table 4.Z
Mode
Setting
Function
PV Color Change
Application Example
Constant
org
Orange
Constant: Orange
To match the display color with

other Controller models
red
Red
Constant: Red

grn
Green
Constant: Green

Linked to
Alarm 1
Alarm
value
ALM1 lit
PV
SP
ALM1 not Lit
ALM1 Lit
Application Example
r-g
Red to Green
Red
Green
To display the PV reached

signal
g-r
Green to Red
Green
Red
To display error signals
Note: Shading indicates default setting.
4-41
Table 4.S (Continued)
Mode
Setting
Function
PV Color Change
Linked to
PV Stable
Band
PV
stable
band
Low
Application Example
PV
stable
band
Within
High
PV
SP
Low
Within PV stable High

band
Application example
Red
Green
Red
To display stable status
r-g.r
Red to Green to
Red
g-o.r
Green to Orange Green

to Red
Orange
Red
o-g.r
Orange to Green Orange

to Red
Green
Red
Link to PV Stable Band

Figure 4.72
pv-b
PV stable
band
When the mode to link to the PV stable band is selected per Table 4.Z, the PV
display color will change according to whether the present value (PV) is lower
than, within, or higher than the PV stable band shown in Figure 4.73. The
width of the PV stable band is configured with the SP as the center, as shown
below.
Figure 4.73
PV stable PV stable
band
band
Low
Within
High
PV
SP
The default band width is 5.0 (C/F) for controllers with

Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Multi-Inputs and 5.0% FS for
Controllers with Analog Inputs.
4-42
Setting
Configuring the PV Color Change to Indicate Stable Status
To display the PV as a constant green color (to indicated a stable condition)
display when the PV is within 15.0C of the set point, configure the PV
Color Change and PV Stable Band parameters.
PV Color Change = r-gr (Red to Green to Red)
EXAMPLE
PV Stable Band = 15.0C
Operating Procedure
Note: Make sure you release the protection to Move to the Advanced Setting
function group before you configure the PV Color Change and PV
Stable Band parameters since both parameters are located in the
Advanced Setting function group. (Refer to steps 18 on page 4-31.)
Figure 4.74
25
PV/SP
100
Figure 4.75
in-t
Input type

pressing the M key.
Figure 4.76
amov
-169
Move to advanced function setting level
4-43
3. Use the D key to enter 169 (the password).

Move to the Advanced Setting function group by pressing the M key or
leaving the setting for at least 2 seconds.
Figure 4.77
Parameter
init initialization
off
4. Select the PV Color Change parameter by pressing the M key.

Figure 4.78
PV change
colr color
red
5. Press the U key to set the parameter to r-gr.

Figure 4.79
colr
r-g.r
6. Select the PV Stable Band parameter by pressing the M key.

Figure 4.80
C
pv-b
PV stable band
5.0
7. Use the U key to set the parameter to 15.0.

Figure 4.81
C
pv-b
15.0
8. To return to the Initial Setting function group, press the O key for at
least 1 second.
1 second.
Figure 4.82
C
25
PV/SP
100
4-44
Alarm Delays
Alarm Delays
For 900-TC8 and 900-TC16, ON and OFF timed delays can be configured for
the Alarm Outputs 1, 2, and 3. For 900-TC32, ON and OFF timed delays can
be configured for the Alarm Output 1.The ON and OFF delay for Alarm 1
operate only for the alarm process function. If Alarm Output 1 is configured
as an OR with other alarm functions (i.e., the Heater Burnout Alarm, HS
Alarm, or input error output alarm), the time delay feature will not function
for the other alarms. The ON and OFF delays for alarms 1, 2, and 3 also apply
to the individual SUB1, SUB2, and SUB3 indicators and to communications
status. The alarm ON delays will also function when power is turned ON or
when moving from the Initial Setting function group to Operation function
group (i.e., to software resets). All outputs will turn OFF and the OFF delays
will not function when moving to the Initial Setting function group or when an
alarm is output for an A/D converter error.
Operation of Alarm ON and OFF Timed Delays (for an Upper-limit Alarm)

Figure 4.83
Alarm ON Condition
PV
Alarm hysteresis
Alarm setting
ON delay
set time
Alarm status
ON delay set time
OFF delay
set time
Alarm Latch = OFF
Alarm will not turn ON.
The alarm will not turn ON if the time that the alarm is ON is equal to
or less than the configured ON delay configured time. Also, the alarm
will not turn OFF if the time that the alarm is OFF is equal to or less
than the OFF delay configured time.
If an alarm turns OFF and then back ON during the ON delay time, the
time will be reset from the last time the alarm turns ON. Also, if an
alarm turns ON and then back OFF during the OFF delay time, the
time will be remeasured from the last time the alarm turns OFF.
4-45
Parameters Related to Alarm Delays

Table 4.AA
Parameter Name
Symbol
Configurable Range
Alarm 1 ON delay
a1on
0999 (s)
Alarm 2 ON delay (900-TC8, 900-TC16)
a2on
0999 (s)
Alarm 3 ON delay (900-TC8)
a3on
0999 (s)
Alarm 1 OFF delay
a1of
0999 (s)
Alarm 2 OFF delay (900-TC8, 900-TC16) a2of
0999 (s)
a3of
0999 (s)
Alarm 3 OFF delay (900-TC8)
Note: The default time values are 0 (i.e., the ON and OFF delays are disabled).
Note: The parameters are displayed when alarm functions are assigned and
when the alarm type is configured to any type but 0 (none).
EXAMPLE
Operating Procedure
The following example procedure shows how to configure ON and OFF delay
for Alarm Output 1.
An ON delay of 5 seconds and an OFF delay of 10 seconds will be configured.
Figure 4.84
C
25
PV/SP
100
Figure 4.85
in-t
Input type

pressing the M key.
Figure 4.86
4-46
3. Press the D key to enter the password (169) and move from the Initial
Setting function group to the Advanced Setting function group.
Figure 4.87
Parameter
init initialization
off
4. Press the M key to select the Alarm 1 ON Delay parameter.

Figure 4.88
Alarm 1 ON
a1on delay
0
5. Press the U key to set the parameter to 5.

Figure 4.89
a1on
5
6. Press the M key to select the Alarm 1 OFF Delay parameter.

Figure 4.90
Alarm 1 OFF
a1of delay
0

Figure 4.91
a1of
10
Figure 4.92
in-t
5
Input type
4-47
Figure 4.93
C
25
PV/SP
100
Loop Break Alarm

With a Loop Break Alarm, there is assumed to be an error in the operation
control loop if the control deviation (SP PV) is greater than the threshold
you configure in the LBA Level parameter and if the control deviation is not
reduced by at least the value you configure in the LBA Detection Band
parameter within the LBA Detection Time parameter.
Figure 4.94 provides an example of the operation of the Loop Break Alarm
detection and time operation.
Figure 4.94
LBA Level
Set point
LBA band
LBA band
PV
LBA band
LBA detection time
Area where LBA

is not detected
LBA detection
time
LBA Level
LBA detection
LBA detection time
time
PV
(1)
(2)
(3)
LBA OFF
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
LBA ON
LBA OFF
LBA ON
If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 1 and 2 (i.e., the set
point is approached) and the amount the control deviation is reduced is at least
equal to the LBA Band, the Loop Break Alarm will remain OFF.
The process value is within the LBA Level between 3 and 4, and thus Loop
Break Alarm will not be detected. (The Loop Break Alarm will remain OFF.)
If the process value is outside the LBA Level between 4 and 5 and the control
deviation is not reduced by at least the LBA Band within the LBA Detection
Time, the Loop Break Alarm will turn ON.
4-48
point is approached) and the amount the control deviation is reduced is at least
equal to the LBA Band, the Loop Break Alarm will turn OFF.
point is approached) and the amount the control deviation is reduced is less
than the LBA Band, the Loop Break Alarm will turn ON.
If the LBA Detection Time, LBA Level, LBA Detection Band, and PID
settings are not appropriate, alarms may be detected inappropriately or
alarms may not be output when necessary.
Loop break alarms may be detected if unexpectedly large process
disturbances occur continuously and a large deviation does not decrease.
If a loop break occurs when the set point is near the ambient
temperature, the temperature deviation in a steady state may be less than
the LBA level, preventing detection of the loop break.
If the set point is so high or low that it cannot be reached even with a
saturated manipulated variable, a temperature deviation may remain
even in a steady state and a loop break may be detected.
Loop Break Detection in not possible if a fault occurs that causes an
increase in temperature while control is being applied to increase the
temperature (e.g., an SSR short-circuit fault).
Loop Break Detection in not possible if a fault occurs that causes a
decrease in temperature while control is being applied to decrease the
temperature (e.g., a heater burnout fault).
4-49
Parameters Related to Loop Break Alarms

Table 4.AB
Parameter Name
Symbol
LBA Detection Time
lba
LBA Level
lbal
LBA Band
lbab
Configurable Range
(Units)
Application
Considerations
09999 (s)
Setting 0 disables the LBA

function.
Controllers with
Thermocouple and
Resistance Thermometer
(RTD) inputs
0.1999.9 (C/F)
Default: 8.0 (C/F)
Controllers with Analog

Inputs
0.0199.99 (%FS)
Default: 10.00% FS
Controllers with
Thermocouple and
Resistance Thermometer
(RTD) inputs
0.0999.9 (C/F)
Default: 3.0 (C/F)
Controllers with Analog

Inputs
0.0099.99 (%FS)
Default: 0.20% FS
Sensor Type
Set NONE as the unit for analog inputs.
A loop break alarm can be output by setting the Alarm 1 Type to 12

(LBA).
A setting of 12 (LBA) can be configured for Alarm 2 or 3 but the setting
will be disabled.
Loop breaks are not detected during SP Ramp operation.
Loop breaks are not detected during Auto-Tuning, Manual operation, or
while the controller is stopped.
If the Alarm 1 Latch parameter is configured to ON, the latch will be
effective for the loop break alarm.
Automatically Setting the LBA Detection Time

The LBA Detection Time is automatically configured by Auto-Tuning.
(However, it is not configured automatically for heating/cooling
control.)
If the optimum LBA Detection Time is NOT obtained by Auto-Tuning,
configure the LBA Detection Time parameter (Advance Setting
function group).
4-50
Determining the LBA Detection Time

To manually configure the LBA detection time, configured the LBA Detection
Time parameter to twice the LBA reference time given in the example below.
EXAMPLE
Procedure
1. Set the output to the maximum value.
2. Measure the time required for the change in the input to reach the LBA
band.
Figure 4.95
Temperature
Measurement time
Tm
PV
LBA band
MV = 100%
Time
LBA detection time = Tm 2
3. Set the LBA Detection Time parameter to two times the measured time.
LBA Level
Configure the control deviation when the control loop is working properly.
The default is 8.0 (C/F) for Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance
Thermometer Multi-Inputs and 10.00% FS for Controllers with Analog
Inputs.
LBA Band
There is assumed to be an error in the control loop if the control deviation is
greater than the threshold configured for the LBA Level parameter and if the
control deviation does not change by at least the value configured for the LBA
Band parameter.
The default is 3.0 (C/F) for Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance
Thermometer Multi-Inputs and 0.20% FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs.
4-51
EXAMPLE
Operating Procedure: Loop Break Alarm Configurations

In this example, the LBA Detection Time is configured to 10, the LBA Level is
configured to 8.0, and the LBA Band is configured to 3.0.
Figure 4.96
C
25
PV/SP
100
Figure 4.97
in-t
Input type
2. Select the Alarm 1 Type parameter by pressing the M key.

Figure 4.98
alt1
Alarm 1 type
3. Press the U key to configure the Alarm 1 Type parameter value to 12.
Figure 4.99
alt1
12

pressing the M key.
Figure 4.100
amov
Move to Advanced
4-52
Figure 4.101
init
Parameter
initialization
off
6. Select the LBA Detection Time parameter by pressing the M key.

Figure 4.102
LBA detection
lba time
0

Figure 4.103
C
lba
10
8. Select the LBA Level parameter by pressing the M key.

Figure 4.104
C
lbal
LBA level
8.0
9. Press the U key to set the parameter to 8.0. (Note: The default is 8.0.)
10. Select the LBA Band parameter by pressing the M key.
C
lbal
8.0
Figure 4.105
C
lbab
LBA band
3.0
11. Press the U or D key to set the parameter to 3.0. (Note: The default is
3.0.)
Figure 4.106
C
lbab
3.0
4-53
Figure 4.107
in-t
Input type
Figure 4.108
C
25
PV/SP
100
Performing Manual Control Manual Operation

You (the operator) can take manual control of the manipulated variable when
the PV/MV parameter is displayed in the Manual Control function group. The
final MV (Manipulated Variable) used in automatic mode will be used as the
initial manual MV when moving from automatic mode to manual mode. In
manual mode, the change value will be fixed immediately and reflected in the
actual MV (bumpless transfer).
Manual operation can be used only for PID control.
The automatic display return function will not operate in manual mode.
Balanceless-bumpless operation will be performed for the MV when
switching from manual operation to automatic operation. (Refer to the
Note on page 4-53.)
If a power interruption occurs during manual operation, manual
operation will be restarted when power is restored using the same MV as
when power was interrupted.
Switching between automatic and manual operation is possible for a
maximum of one million times.
Note: In balanceless-bumpless operation, the MV before switching is used
initially after the switch and then gradually changed to achieve the
proper value after switch to prevent radical changes in the MV after
switching operation.
4-54
The overall manual operation is illustrated in the following figure.

Figure 4.109 Overall Manual Operation
MV (%)
Balanceless-bumpless
Time
0
Manual
MV switched
OFF
ON
Power interrupted
Automatic
Table 4.AC Related Displays and Parameters

Parameter Name
Symbol
Function Group
Remarks
PV/MV (Manual MV)
Manual Control function group 5.0105.0 (heating/cooling control:

105.0105.0)
Auto/Manual Switch
a-m
Operation function group
Switches between automatic and manual modes.
Auto/Manual Select
Addition
amad
Advanced Setting function

group
Enables switching between automatic and

manual modes.
Note: Refer to Output Adjustment Functions on page 4-75 for information on the
priority for the MV.
Manual MV Limit Enable

When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is configured to ON (enabled),
the MV limits will function and the setting range for the Manual MV
parameter will be between the MV upper limit and the MV lower limit. When
the parameter is configured to OFF (disabled), MV limits will not function.
Table 4.AD
Parameter Name
Setting Range
Default
OFF: Disabled, ON: Enabled
ON
Moving to the Manual Control function group (Refer to Figure 4.110)

In the Operation function group select the Auto/Manual parameter and then
press the O key for at least 3 seconds to switch to the manual mode and to
4-55
display the Manual Control function group. It is not possible to move to any
displays except for the PV/MV parameter during manual operation. Press the
O key for at least 1 second from the PV/MV display in the Manual Control
function group to return to automatic mode and display the top parameter in
Note: To use the Manual Control mode, the Auto/Manual Select Addition
parameter must first be configured to ON in the Advanced Setting
function group (refer to Figure 4.115 on page 4-57).
Figure 4.110
Operation function group
Press O key for at least 1 s.
25
PV
M
C
Manual Control function group
25
PV/SP
100
M
C
25
20
PV/MV
a-m
Press O key for at least
3 s.
a-m display flashes for
at least 1 s.
a-m
Auto/manual switch
m-sp
Multi-SP
For 900-TC8 and 900-TC16, if an event input is configured to MANU

(Auto/Manual), the Auto/Manual Switch parameter will not be displayed. Use
the event input to switch between automatic and manual modes.
Note: Even when controller operation is stopped, the manual control of the
MV is given priority over other functions.
Controller auto-tuning and self-tuning will stop when the Manual Mode
is entered.
Note: If the SP ramp function is operating, it will continue even when the
manual mode is entered.
4-56
Using the PF Key to Move to the Manual Control Level

1. When the PF Setting parameter is configured to A-M (Auto/Manual),
pressing the PF Key for at least one second while in the adjustment or
operation group will change the mode to manual mode and move to the
manual control function group. During manual operation it is not
possible to move to any displays other than PV/MV (Manual MV).
Press the PF Key for at least one second from the PV/MV display in the
manual control mode to change the mode to automatic mode, move to
the operation function group, and display the top parameter in the
operation function group.
2. For 900-TC8 and 900-TC16, when MANU (Auto/Manual) is selected
for an event input, the Auto/Manual Switch parameter is not displayed.
In that case, switching between auto and manual mode is executed by
using an event input.
Auto/Manual Select Addition

The Auto/Manual Select Addition parameter must be configured to ON in the
Advance Setting function group before it is possible to move to manual mode.
The default is OFF.
Note: 1.
Note: 2.
Priority of Manual MV and Other Functions

Even when operation is stopped, the manual MV is given priority
over other functions. Auto-tuning and self-tuning will stop when
manual mode is entered.
Manual MV and SP Ramp
If operating, the SP ramp function will continue even when manual mode is entered.
4-57
EXAMPLE
Operating Procedure
Use the following procedure to set the manipulated variable in Manual mode.
Figure 4.111
C
25
PV/SP
100
Figure 4.112
in-t
Input type
2. Select the PID ON/OFF parameter by pressing the M key and select
PID mode.
Figure 4.113
cntl
pid

pressing the M key.
Figure 4.114
amov
Move to Advanced
Press the D key to enter the password (169), and move from the Initial
Setting function group to the Advanced Setting function group.
Figure 4.115
Parameter
init initialization
off
4-58
4. Select the Auto/Manual Select Addition parameter by pressing the M

key.
Figure 4.116
Auto/manual
amad select addition

off
5. Use the U key to set the parameter to ON.

Figure 4.117
amad
on
Figure 4.118
in-t
Input type
8. Select the Auto/Manual Switch parameter by pressing the M key.
Figure 4.119
Auto/manual
a-m switch
function group to the Manual Control function group.
Figure 4.120
C
25
0.0
PV/MV
4-59
10. Press the U or D key to set the manual MV. (In this example, the MV
is configured to 500%.) Note: The manual MV setting must be fixed,
but values changed with key operations are reflected in the control
output immediately.
Figure 4.121
C
25
50.0
11. Press the O key for at least 1 second to move from the Manual
Control function group to the Operation function group.
Figure 4.122
C
25
PV/SP
100
EXAMPLE
Auto/Manual Example Operating Procedure

In this example, A-M is configured for the PF Setting parameter (900-TC8
only).
to the Initial Setting function group.
Figure 4.123 Operation function group
C
25
alm
100
Figure 4.124 Initial Setting function group
in-t
Input Type
2. Select the Move to Advanced Setting parameter by pressing the M Key.

Figure 4.125
cntl
pid
4-60
3. Select the PID ON/OFF parameter by pressing the U Key.

Figure 4.126
amov
Move to Advanced
Setting Group
4. Select the Move to Advanced Setting parameter by pressing the M Key

5. Press the D Key to enter the password (-169), and move from the
Figure 4.127
Parameter
init Initialization
off
6. Select the Auto/Manual Select Addition parameter by pressing the M

Key.
Figure 4.128
Auto/Manual
amad Select Addition

off
7. Use the U Key to set the parameter to ON.

Figure 4.129
amad
on
8. Press the M Key to select the PF Setting parameter and confirm that it
is set to A-M. (A-M is the default setting.)
Figure 4.130
pf
a-m
4-61
Figure 4.131
in-t
Input Type
Setting function group to the Operation function group.
11. Press the PF Key for at least one second to move from the Operation to
the Manual Control function group.
Figure 4.132
C
25
PV/MV
0.0
12. Press the U or D Key to set the manual MV. (In this example, the MV
is set to 50.0%.)
Figure 4.133
C
25
50.0
Note: The manual MV setting must be saved, but values changed with key
operations are reflected in the control output immediately.
13. Press the PF Key to move from the Manual Control function group to
Figure 4.134
C
25
alm
100
4-62
Using the Transfer Output
Transfer Output Function

Fort 900-TC8 and 900-TC16, if a control 1 output is an analog linear current
output it can be used as a transfer output. To use the transfer output, configure
the Transfer Output Type parameter to any setting other than OFF (refer to
Table 4.AE).
When the Transfer Output Type parameter is configured to any setting other
than OFF, the Transfer Output Upper-Limit and Transfer Output
Lower-Limit parameters will be enabled.
Transfer Output Type

Table 4.AE Using Transfer Input
Symbol
Configurable Range
OFF
off
Set Point
sp
SP Lower-Limit to SP Upper-Limit
Set Point during SP

ramp
sp-m
PV
pv
Sensor setting range Lower-Limit to

Sensor setting range Upper-Limit or
Scaling Lower-Limit to Scaling
Upper-Limit
MV Monitor (heating)
mv
5.0105.0 (heating/cooling control:

0.0105.0)
MV Monitor (cooling)
c-mv
0.0105.0
The default Transfer Output Type is OFF. If the Transfer Output Type is configured to OFF, the function assigned
in the Control Output 1 Assignment parameter will be output to Control Output 1.
The difference between the transfer output value and the linear current output value is illustrated in the
following example and Figure 4.135.
If the linear output is used as the transfer output when the linear current output type is configured to 420
mA, 4.0 mA will be output for 0% and 20.0 mA will be output for 100%.
When a linear output is used for the control output, 3.7 mA is output for 0% and 20.3 mA is output for 100%
when the control output for heating is selected to ensure that the control object is controlled at 0% and 100%.
Figure 4.135 When the Linear Current Output Type is Set to 4 to 20 mA

Output current (mA)
20.3
20
Transfer output value

Control output
4
3.7
0
MV (%)
100
4-63
Transfer Output Scaling

Reverse scaling is possible by configuring the Transfer Output
Lower-Limit parameter larger than the Transfer Output Upper-Limit
parameter. If the Transfer Output Lower-Limit and Transfer Output
Upper-Limit parameters are configured to the same value when 420
mA is configured, the transfer output will output continuously a 0% (4
mA) signal.
If the SP, SP during SP ramp, or PV is selected as the Transfer Output
Type, the Transfer Output Lower-Limit and Transfer Output
Upper-Limit parameters will follow the values configured for the
respective parameters Upper- and Lower-Limits concerning changes in
the Upper- and Lower-Limits of the SP limiter and temperature units.
If the MV for heating or MV for cooling is selected as the Transfer
Output Type, the Transfer Output Lower-Limit and Transfer Output
Upper-Limit parameters will be initialized to 100.0 and 0.0, respectively,
when a switch is made between standard control and heating/cooling
control using the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter.
When the linear current type is configured as 420 mA, the transfer
output Upper-Limit is configured to 90.0, and the transfer output
Lower-Limit is configured to 10.0 is shown in the following graph (refer
to Figure 4.136).
For scaling from 0.0100.0%, 0.0% will be the output for 5.00.0,
and 100% will be the output for 100.0105.0.
Figure 4.136 When the Linear Current Output Type is Set to 4 to 20 mA
Output current (mA)
20
4
MV (%)
0
10
Transfer output
lower limit
90
100
Transfer output
upper limit
4-64
EXAMPLE
Operating Procedure
The following procedure configures the Transfer Output Type as a SP with a
range (limit) of 50200.
C
25
PV/SP
100
Figure 4.138
in-t
Input type
2. Select the Transfer Output Type parameter by pressing the Key.

Figure 4.139
Transfer output
tr-t type
off
3. Press the U key to select sp (set point).

Figure 4.140
tr-t
sp
4. Select the Transfer Output Upper-Limit parameter by pressing the M

key.
Figure 4.141
C
Transfer output
tr-h upper limit

1300
4-65
5. Use the D key to set the parameter to 200. The default is 1300.
Figure 4.142
C
tr-h
200
6. Select the Transfer Output Lower-Limit parameter by pressing the M

key.
Figure 4.143
C
Transfer output
tr-l lower limit

-200
7. Use the U key to set the parameter to 50. The default is 200.
Figure 4.144
C
tr-l
-50
1 second.
Figure 4.145
C
25
PV/SP
100
4-66
Using the Simple Program

Function
Simple Program Function

The simple program function can be used to perform a simple one step ramp
and soak operation.
Figure 4.146
SP
Wait band
Wait band
Set point
PV
RSET STRT
Soak time
END display
END output
Select either
STOP or RUN.
The simple program will start when the Program Start parameter is changed
from RSET to STRT. END will be displayed on the No. 2 display and the
output assigned as the program end output will turn ON after the time
configured in the Soak Time parameter has expired in the wait band. The
Program Pattern parameter can be used to select moving to STOP mode or
continuing operation in RUN mode after the program ends.
Table 4.AF Parameters Related to the Simple Program Function

Parameter Name
Symbol
Configurable (Monitor) Values
Units
Display Function
Group
Program Pattern
ptrn
OFF, STOP, CONT
Initial Setting
Program Start
prst
RSET, STRT
Operation
Soak Time
soak
19999
min or h
Adjustment
Soak Time Unit
t-u
m (minutes)/h (hours)
Advanced Setting
Wait Band
wt-b
OFF or 0.1999.9
C or F
Adjustment
Soak Time Remain Monitor
sktr
09999
min or h
Operation
The configurable units for the Wait Band parameter is %FS for Controllers with Analog Inputs and the range is
OFF or 0.0199.99.
Units configured for Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Multi-inputs. Set NONE as the
unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs.
4-67
Program Pattern
Either of two program patterns (STOP or Continue) can be selected. The
simple program operation will not be performed if the Program Pattern
parameter is configured to OFF.
Pattern 1 (STOP)
Control will stop and the STOP control mode will be entered when the simple
program has ended.
Figure 4.147
Wait band
Wait band
Set point
PV
RSET STRT
Soak time
END display
END output
Automatically switches
from RUN to STOP control
mode.
Pattern 2 (CONT)
Control will continue in RUN control mode when the simple program has
ended.
Figure 4.148
Wait band
Wait band
Set point
PV
RSET STRT
Soak time
RUN mode continues.
END display
END output
4-68
Starting Method
Any of the following three methods can be used to start the simple program.
Setting the Program Start parameter to STRT.
For 900-TC8 & 900-TC16: Turning ON an event input. (The program
start must be assigned to an event input. Refer to the Note on page
4-68.)
Starting with an Operation Command using communications. (When
the program start is not assigned to an event input.)
Note: When an event input is used to start and reset the simple program,
writing is performed to EEPROM. Be sure to consider the write life (1
million writes) of the EEPROM in the system design. When the
program start is assigned to an event input, the Program Start
parameter will function as a monitor display, and the RSET/STRT
displays can be used to check when the event input has started or reset
the simple program. When this is done, the Program Start parameter
functions as a monitor display only and cannot be changed using key
operations. If the Program Pattern parameter is configured to OFF, the
event input assignment setting will be initialized to NONE.
Soak Time and Wait Band

Figure 4.149
Wait band
Set point
Wait band
PV
RSET STRT
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
(5)
Set point
Set point
Soak time
remain
The wait band is the fixed band within which the process value is stable in
respect to the set point. The soak time is measured within the wait band. The
timer that measures the soak time operates only when the process value is
4-69
within the wait band around the set point (i.e., SP wait band). In the
pre-ceding diagram, the timer will be stopped between the start and (1), (2) and
(3), and (4) and (5) and will measure the time only between (1) and (2), (3) and
(4), and (5) and the end.
Note: If the wait band is configured to OFF, the wait band will be treated as
infinity and the timer will measure time continuously after changing
from RSET to STRT.
Operation at the Program End

Display at the Program End
When the program ends, the process value will be displayed on the No. 1
display (refer to Note below) and the set point and End will be alternately
displayed on the No. 2 display at 0.5 second intervals.
Note: One of the following displays: PV/SP, PV only, or PV/MV.
Figure 4.150
120.1
end
Displayed alternately.
120.0
Program End Output

In the case of 900-TC8 and 900-TC16, When the Program Pattern parameter
is changed from OFF to STOP or CONT, the Auxiliary Output1 Assignment
parameter will automatically be configured to the END output. When the
Program Pattern parameter is changed from STOP or CONT to OFF, the
Alarm 1 Output Assignment parameter will automatically be initialized to
ALM1. The output assignment parameters can also be used to assign the
program END output to any output.
In the case of 900-TC32, When the Program Pattern parameter is changed
from OFF to STOP or CONT for the 900-TC32, the Auxiliary Output 1
Assignment parameter will automatically be set to the END output. When the
Program Pattern parameter is changed from STOP or CONT to OFF, the
Alarm 1 Output Assignment parameter will automatically be initialized to
ALM1. When using heating/cooling control and the Program Pattern
parameter is changed from OFF to STOP or CONT, the END output will not
be assigned to an output. Use the output assignment parameters to assign the
program END output to the desired output.
4-70
The program END output is also provided in communications status.
Clearing the Program End Status

The program END output and display will be cleared when the Program Start
parameter is changed from STRT to RSET. The setting is changed from STRT
to RSET while the Program Start parameter is displayed.
The program END status can also be cleared using an event input. If the
program start function is assigned to an event, however, the program end
status cannot be cleared from the Program Start parameter display, which will
function only as a monitor display.
EXAMPLE
Operating Procedure
Perform the following procedure to use the simple program function.
In this example, the program pattern will be configured to STOP, the soak
time to 10 min, and the wait band to 3.
Figure 4.151
Wait band = 3
Set point
PV
Soak time = 10 min
RSET STRT
STOP

C
25
100
PV/SP
END display
END output
4-71
Figure 4.153
in-t
Input type
2. Select the Program Pattern parameter by pressing the M key.

Figure 4.154
ptrn
Program Pattern
off
3. Use the U key to set the parameter to STOP.

Figure 4.155
ptrn
stop
Figure 4.156
C
25
PV/SP
100
Figure 4.157
Adjustment
function group
l.adj display
6. Select the Soak Time parameter by pressing the M key.

Figure 4.158
soak
Soak time
4-72
7. Use the U key to set the parameter to 10. (The soak time unit is
configured in Soak Time Unit parameter in the Advance Setting
function group. The default is m (minutes).
Figure 4.159
soak
10
8. Select the Wait Band parameter by pressing the M key.

Figure 4.160
wt-b
Wait band
off
9. Use the U key to set the parameter to 3.0.

Figure 4.161
wt-b
3.0
10. Press the O key to move from the Adjustment function group to the
Figure 4.162
C
25
100
PV/SP
4-73
EXAMPLE
Using a Simple Program

The program will be started by changing the configuration of the Program
Start parameter. The following shows an example using a simple program with
the program pattern configured to STOP.
Figure 4.163
Wait band
Set point
PV
Soak time
Soak time
Soak time
END display
END output
RUN
STOP RUN
RUN/STOP
status
STRT
RSET
RSET
STRT
STRT
Program
start
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5) (6)
(7) (8)
(9)
(10)
4-74
Table 4.AG
Timing
Description
(1)
The Program Start parameter was changed from RSET to STRT using either an event or key operations.
The RUN/STOP status automatically changes to RUN mode when the above operation is performed.
(2)
The Program Start parameter was changed from STRT to RSET using either an event or key operations before
the soak time expired.
The RUN/STOP status automatically changes to STOP mode when the above operation is performed.
(3)
The Program Start parameter is again changed from RSET to STRT using either an event or key operations.
The RUN/STOP status will automatically change to RUN mode when the above operation is performed.
(4)
The RUN/STOP status automatically changes to STOP mode when soak time expires.
END flashes on the No. 2 display and the program END output turns ON.
(5)
The Program Start parameter is changed from STRT to RSET using either an event or key operations.
The END display is cleared and the program END output turns OFF.
(6)
Key operations are used to switch the RUN/STOP status to RUN with the Program Start parameter configured
to RSET (stopped).
Normal control operation is started.
(7)
The Program Start parameter is changed from RSET to STRT after the process value stabilizes.
The RUN/STOP status remains as RUN.
(8)
Key operations are used to change the RUN/STOP status to STOP (during program operation).
Measuring the soak time is continued within the wait band. (Measuring the soak time stops when the process
value leaves the wait band.)
(9)
Key operations are used to change the RUN/STOP status to RUN.

Measuring the soak time is continued within the wait band (continuing from the time between (7) and (9)).
(10)
The RUN/STOP status automatically changes to STOP mode when the measured time reaches the soak time.
END flashes on the No. 2 display and the program END output turns ON.
Output Adjustment
Functions
4-75
Output Limits
Output limits can be configured to limit the output using the Upper- and
Lower-Limits to the calculated MV.
The following MV takes priority over the MV limits.
Manual MV
MV at stop
MV at PV error
Figure 4.164
Output
100%
MV upper limit
MV lower limit
0%
Note: 1.
Note: 2.
When the manual MV limit is enabled, the manual MV will be

restricted by the MV limit.
For heating/cooling control, Upper- and Lower-Limits are configured of overall heating/cooling control. (They cannot be configured separately for heating/cooling.)
Figure 4.165
Output
Heating MV
Cooling MV
MV lower limit
MV upper limit
MV at Stop
You can configure the amount the MV is output during the controller STOP
mode using the MV at Stop parameter. For heating/cooling control, the MV at
Stop will apply to the cooling side if the MV is negative and to the heating side
if the MV is positive.When configuring the MV at Stop parameter also
configure the MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter (Advanced Setting
function group) to ON. The default is 0.0, so an MV will not be output for
either standard or heating/cooling control.
4-76
Table 4.AH
Parameter Configurable Range
Unit
Default
MV at Stop 5.0105.0 for standard control

105.0105.0 (heating/cooling control)
0.00
Note: The order of priority is as follows: Manual MV > MV at stop > MV at

PV error.
MV at PV Error
You can configure the amount the MV is output during an input error
condition. The MV at stop takes priority when stopped and the manual MV
takes priority in manual mode.
Table 4.AI
Parameter
Configurable Range
MV at PV error 5.0105.0 for standard control

Unit
Default
0.0
Note: The order of priority is as follows: Manual MV > MV at stop > MV at

PV error.
The order of priority of the MVs is illustrated in the following diagram.
Figure 4.166
MV upper limit
MV at PV Error
Manual MV
RUN/STOP
Manipulated variable
Output
PID
calculations
Input error
Auto/manual switch
Time
MV at Stop
MV lower limit
4-77
Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter

Extraction of Square Roots
Figure 4.167 Extraction of Square Root Enable
sqr
off
For analog inputs, the Extraction of the Square Root parameter is provided
for inputs so that differential pressure-type flow meter signals can be directly
input.
The default setting for the Extraction of Square Root parameter is OFF. The
Extraction of Square Root Enable parameter must be configured to ON in
order to use this function.
Figure 4.168 Extraction of Square Root Low-cut Point
sqrp
0.0
If the PV input (i.e., the input before extracting the square root) is higher
than 0.0% and lower than the low cut point configured in the Extraction of
Square Root Low-Cut Point parameter, the results of extracting the square
root will be 0.0%. If the PV input is lower than 0.0% or higher than 100.0%,
extraction of the square root will not be executed, so the result will be equal to
the PV input. The low-cut point is configured as normalized data for each
input, with 0.0 as the lower limit and 100.0 as the upper limit for the input
setting range.
Figure 4.169 Extraction of the Square Root
Extraction of
square root
100% FS
Extraction of square
root low-cut point
0
100% FS
Argument 1 (Input Data)
4-78
Table 4.AJ
Parameter Name
Configurable Range
Unit
Default
Extraction of the Square Root Enable
OFF: Disabled, ON: Enabled
---
OFF
Extraction of Square Root Low-cut Point
0.0...100
0.0
Operating Procedure
This procedure sets the Extraction of Square Root Low-cut Point parameter to
10.0%
C
25
PV/SP
100
1. Press the O Key for at least three seconds to move from the Operation to
the Initial Setting function group.
Figure 4.171
in-t
Input Type
2. Press the M Key to select the Extraction of Square Root Enable parameter.
Figure 4.172
sqr
off
Extraction
of Square
Root Enable
3. Use the U Key to select ON.

Figure 4.173
sqr
on
Extraction
of Square
Root Enable
4-79
4. Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the Initial Setting to
Figure 4.174
C
25
PV/SP
100
Figure 4.175
l.adj
6. Select the Extraction of Square Root Low-cut Point parameter by pressing
the M Key Operating Procedure
Figure 4.176
Extraction of
Root
sqrp Square
Low-cut Point
0.0
7.Use the U Key to set the parameter to -10.0.

Figure 4.177
Extraction of
Root
sqrp Square
Low-cut Point
10.0
8. Press the O Key to return to the Operation function group.

Figure 4.178
C
25
PV/SP
100
4-80
Setting the Rate of MV Variation

The MV Change Rate Limit parameter sets the maximum allowable rate of
change in the MV in units of percent per second. If the change in the MV
exceeds this setting, the MV will be changed by the MV change rate limit until
the calculated value is reached. This function is disabled when the setting is
0.0.
The MV Change Rate Limit parameter does not function in the following
situations:
In manual mode
During ST execution (Cannot be configured when ST is ON.)
During AT execution
During ON/OFF control
While stopped (during MV at Stop output)
During MV at PV Error output
Table 4.AK
Parameter Name
Configuration Range
Units
Default
MV Change Rate Limit
0.0...100
%/s
0.0
Operating Procedure
This procedure sets the MV Change Rate Limit to parameter 5.0%/s. The
related parameters are as follows:
PIDON/OFF = PID
ST = OFF
C
25
PV/SP
100
Figure 4.180
in-t
Input Type
4-81
2. Select the PID ON/OFF parameter by pressing the M Key.

Figure 4.181
cntl
PIDON/OFF
onof
3. Use the U Key to select 2-PID control.

Figure 4.182
cntl
PIDON/OFF
pid
4. Press the M Key to select the ST parameter.

Figure 4.183
st
ST
on
5. Press the D Key to select OFF.

Figure 4.184
st
ST
off
6. Press the O Key for at least one second to move from the Initial Setting to
Figure 4.185
C
25
PV/SP
100
Figure 4.186
l.adj
4-82
8. Press the M Key to select the MV Change Rate Limit parameter.

Figure 4.187
MV
orl Change
Rate Limit
0.0
9. Use the U Key to set the parameter to 5.0.

Figure 4.188
orl
5.0
MV
Change
Rate Limit
10. Press the O Key to return to the Operation function group.

Figure 4.189
C
25
PV/SP
100
Setting the PF Key

PF Setting (Function Key)
Pressing the PF Key for at least one second executes the operation configured
in the PF Setting parameter (900-TC8 only).
The possible operations are outlined in the below table.
Table 4.AL
Set Value Symbol Operation
Function
OFF
off
Disabled
Does not operate as function key
RUN
run
RUN
Specifies RUN status
STOP
stop
STOP
Specifies STOP status
R-S
r-s
RUN/STOP reverse
operation
Specifies reversing the RUN/STOP

operation status
AT-2
at-2
100% AT
Execute/Cancel
Specifies reversing the 100% AT

Execute/Cancel status (see note 1)
AT-1
at-1
40% AT
Execute/Cancel
Specifies reversing the 40% AT

Execute/Cancel status
4-83
Table 4.AL
Set Value Symbol Operation
Function
LAT
lat
Alarm Latch Cancel Specifies canceling all alarm

latches (see note 2)
A-M
a-m
Auto/Manual
Specifies reversing the

Auto/Manual status (see note 3)
PFDP
pfdp
Monitor/Setting
Item
Specifies the monitor/setting item

display. Select the monitor setting
item according to the Monitor/
Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters
(advanced setting function group).
Note:
1. When AT cancel is specified, it means that AT is cancelled regardless of
whether the AT currently being executed is 100% AT or 40% AT.
2. Alarms 1 to 3, heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater over-current
latches are cancelled.
3. For details on auto/manual operations using the PF Key, refer
Performing Manual Control.
4. Pressing the PF Key for at least one second executes operation
according to the configured value. When the Monitor/Setting Item
parameter is selected, however, the display is changed in order from
Monitor/Setting Item 1 to 5 each time the key is pressed.
5. This function is enabled when PF Key Protect is OFF.
Monitor/Setting Item 1
pfd1 Item 5
1
pfd5
0
Setting the PF Setting parameter to the Monitor/Setting function makes it

possible to display monitor/setting items using the function key. The following
4-84
table shows the details of the settings. For setting (monitor) ranges, refer to
applicable parameter.
Table 4.AM Setting Detail
Remarks
Set Value Operation/Function
Monitor/Setting
Symbol
Disabled
---
PV/SP/Multi-SP
Can be configured. (SP) ---
PV/SP/MV (see note)
PV/SP/Soak time remain
Proportional band (P)
Can be configured.
Integral time (I)
Can be configured.
Derivative time (D)
Can be configured.
Alarm value 1
Can be configured.
al-1
Alarm value upper limit 1
Can be configured.
al1h
Alarm value lower limit 1
Can be configured.
al1l
10
Alarm value 2
Can be configured.
al-2
11
Can be configured.
al-2h
12
Can be configured.
al-2l
13
Alarm value 3
Can be configured.
al-3
14
Can be configured.
al3h
15
Can be configured.
al3l
Note: For details on MV settings for heating and cooling control, refer to MV Display for
Heating and Cooling.
Configuring Monitor/Setting Items

Pressing the PF Key in wither the Operation or Adjustment function group
displays the applicable monitor/settings items. Press the PF Key to display in
order Monitor/Setting items 1 to 5. After Monitor/Setting Item 5 has been
displayed, the display will switch to the top parameter in the Operation
function group.
1. Items configured as disabled in the Monitor/Setting Items 1 to 5
parameters will not be displayed, and the display will skip to the next
enabled item.
2. While a monitor/setting item is being displayed, the display will be
switched to the top parameter in the Operation function group if the M
Key or the O Key is pressed.
4-85
Operating Procedure
This procedure sets the PF Setting parameter to PFDP, and the
Monitor/Setting Item 1 parameter to 7 (Alarm Value 1).
C
25
PV/SP
100
Figure 4.191
in-t
Input Type

pressing the M Key.
Figure 4.192
amov
Move to Advanced
-169
3. Press the D Key to enter the password (-169). It is possible to move to

Figure 4.193
Parameter
init Initialization
off
4. Press the M Key to select the PF Setting parameter.

Figure 4.194
pf
PF Setting
a-m
4-86
5. Press the U Key to select PFDP (Monitor/Setting Item).

Figure 4.195
pf
PF Setting
pfdp
6. Press the M Key to select the Monitor/Setting Item 1 parameter.

Figure 4.196
pfd1
Monitor/Setting
Item 1
7. Press the U Key to select 7 (Alarm Value 1).

Figure 4.197
pfd1
Monitor/Setting
Item 1
Setting to the Initial Setting function group.
Figure 4.198
in-t
Input Type
Setting to the Operation function group.
Figure 4.199
C
25
alm
100
10. Press the PF Key to display Alarm Value 1.

Figure 4.200
C
al-1
0
Monitor/Setting
Item Display 1
Counting Control Output

ON/OFF Operations
4-87
Control Output ON/OFF Count Function

With Control Output 1 and 2 ON/OFF outputs (relay outputs or voltage
outputs for driving SSR), the number of times that a control output turns ON
and OFF can be counted. Based on the control output ON/OFF count alarm
configured value, an alarm can be output and an error can be displayed if the
configured count value is exceeded.
The default configuration of the Control Output ON/OFF Alarm Setting
parameter is 0. ON/OFF operations are not counted when this parameter is
configured to 0. To enable counting ON/OFF operations, change the
configuration to a value other than 0.
Control Output ON/OFF Counter Monitor Function

This function is not displayed when the Control Output 1 ON/OFF Alarm
Setting and the Control Output 2 ON/OFF Alarm Setting parameter are set
to 0, or when the control outputs are set for linear (analog) outputs.
Table 4.AN
Parameter Name
Configurable Range Unit
Default
Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count

Monitor
0 to 9999
100 times 0
Control Output 2 ON/OFF Count

Monitor (900-TC8 & 900-TC16)
0 to 9999
100 times 0
Display When ON/OFF Count Alarm Occurs

When an ON/OFF count alarm occurs, the PV display in the No. 1 display
shown below alternates with the ralm display on the No. 2 display.
PV
PV/SP (Including the items displayed by setting the PV/SP Display
Screen Selection parameter.)
PV/Manual MV, PV/SP/Manual MV
PV/SP displayed for the monitor/setting items
Normal
C
PV/SP
25
100
ON/OFF Count Alarm

C
25
ralm
Alternating
display
100
Control Output ON/OFF Count Alarm Function

If the ON/OFF counter exceeds the control output ON/OFF count alarm
configured value, an ON/OFF count alarm will occur. The alarm status can be
assigned to a control output or an auxiliary output, or it can be displayed at the
4-88
Controller. The ON/OFF count alarm configured value function is disabled

by setting the ON/OFF count alarm configured value to 0.
Table 4.AO
Parameter Name
Configurable
Range
Unit
Control Output 1 ON/OFF Alarm Setting
0 to 9999
100 times 0
Control Output 2 ON/OFF Alarm Setting

(900-TC8 & 900-TC16)
0 to 9999
100 times 0
Default
ON/OFF Counter Reset Function

The ON/OFF counter can be reset for a specific control output.
Table 4.AP
Parameter Name Configurable Range
Unit
Default
ON/OFF Counter
Reset
---
0: Disable the counter reset function.

1: Reset the control output 1 ON/OFF
counter.
2: Reset the control output 2 ON/OFF
counter (900-TC8 & 900-TC16).
Note: After the counter has been reset, the control output ON/OFF count
monitor value will be automatically returned to 0.
If an error occurs in the control output ON/OFF counter data, the
ON/OFF count monitor value will be configured to 9999 and an
ON/OFF count alarm will occur. The alarm can be cleared by resetting
the ON/OFF counter.
Operating Procedure
This procedure sets the Control Output 1 ON/OFF Alarm Setting parameter
to 10 (1,000 times).
Figure 4.201
in-t
Input Type
4-89

pressing the M Key.
Figure 4.202
amov
Move to Advanced
-169

Figure 4.203
Parameter
init Initialization
off
4. Press the M Key to select the Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count

Alarm Set Value parameter.
Figure 4.204
ra1
0
Control Output 1
ON/OFF
Counter Alarm
Set Value
5. Use the U Key to set the parameter to 10.

Figure 4.205
ra1
10
Control Output 1
ON/OFF
Counter Alarm
Set Value
6. Press the O Key for at least one second to move to the Initial Setting
function group.
Figure 4.206
in-t
Input Type
7. Press the O Key for at least one second to move to the Operation
function group.
Figure 4.207
C
25
alm
100
4-90
Displaying PV/SV Status

PV and SV Status Display Functions
The PV in the PV/SP, PV, or PV/Manual MV Display and the control and
alarm status specified for the PV status display function are alternately
displayed in 0.5-s cycles.
Table 4.AQ PV Status Display Function
Set Value
Symbol Function
OFF
off
No PV status display
Manual
manu
MANU is alternately displayed during manual control
Stop
stop
STOP is alternately displayed while operation is stopped
Alarm 1
alm1
ALM 1 is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status.
Alarm 2
alm2
Alarm 3
alm3
Alarm 1 to 3 alm
OR status
ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1, 2, or 3 is

configured to ON.
ha
Heater
Alarm
(See Note)
HA is alternately displayed when a heater burnout alarm,

HS alarm, or heater overcurrent alarm is ON.
The default is OFF.

HA can be selected for models that do not support heater burnout detection
but the function will be disabled.
EXAMPLE
When STOP Is Selected for the PV Status Display Function

Normal
C
PV/SP
25
100
When RUN/STOP
is STOP
C
stop
100
Alternating
display
25
4-91
SV Status Display Function

The SP, Blank, or Manual MV in the PV/SP, PV, or PV/Manual MV Display
and the control and alarm status specified for the SV status display function
are alternately displayed in 0.5-s cycles.
Table 4.AR SV Status Display Function
Set Value
Symbol Function
OFF
off
No SV status display
Manual
manu
MANU is alternately displayed while operation is

stopped.
Stop
stop
STOP is alternately displayed while operation is

stopped
Alarm 1
alm 1 ALM 1 is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 1 to 3
OR status
alm
ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1, 2, or 3 is

configured to ON.
Heater Alarm
(See note.)
hr
HA is alternately displayed when a heater burnout

alarm, HS alarm, or heater overcurrent alarm is ON.
The default is OFF.

Note: HA can be selected for models that do not support heater burnout
detection, but the function will be disabled.
Example: When ALM1 Is Selected for the SV Status Display Function
Normal
C
PV/SP
25
100
When ALM1 Is ON
C
25
alm1
Alternating
display
100
Operating Procedure
This procedure sets the PV Status Display Function parameter to ALM1.
Figure 4.208
in-t
Input Type
4-92

pressing the M Key
Figure 4.209
amov
Move to Advanced
-169

Figure 4.210
Parameter
init Initialization
off
4. Press the M Key to select the PV Status Display Function parameter.

Figure 4.211
PV Status
pvst Display
Function
off
5. Press the U Key to select ALM1.

Figure 4.212
pvst
alm1
PV Status
Display
Function
6. Press the O Key for at least one second to move to the Initial Setting
Figure 4.213 Initial Setting function group
in-t
Input Type
7. Press the O Key for at least one second to move to the Operation
function group. If the Alarm 1 status is ON, PV and ALM1 will be
alternately displayed.
Chapter
Parameter Functions & Definitions
Conventions Used in This

Chapter
About the Parameter Display

Parameters are displayed on the controller only when the item(s) listed in the
Conditions of Use section for each parameter is satisfied. However, the
configuration of protected parameters is still valid and the protected
parameters are not displayed regardless of the Conditions of Use.
About the Order in which Parameters are Described

in This Chapter
Parameters are described in order by function group.
The first page of each function group section lists the parameters available in
that function group. The parameter names in this list are listed in the order
that they are displayed on the Bulletin 900-TC8, 900-TC16, and 900-TC32.
Alarms
This chapter describes when alarms are configured for the Control Output 1
or 2 Assignment parameters, or for the Auxiliary Output 1 or 3 Assignment
parameters. For example, when alarm 1 is configured for the Control Output 1
Assignment parameter, it will be specified that alarm 1 is assigned.
Four different modes of protection are provided within the Protect function
group:
1. Operation/Adjustment protection
2. Initial Setting/Communications protection
3. Setting Change protection, and
4. PF key protect (900-TC8 only).
These protection parameters prevent unwanted operation of the controllers
front panel keys in varying degrees.
5-1
5-2
Figure 5.1
Power ON
Operation
Function Group
Adjustment
Function Group
Press the + M Keys.

The display will flash.
Press the
Key
for less than 1 second.
25
100
Press and hold the
+ M Keys
for at least 1 second.
Press and hold the

+ M Keys
for at least 3 seconds.
Protect
Function Group
Control in Progress.
To move from the Operation function group to the Protect function group,
press O and M keys for 3 seconds (refer to Note) or more.
Note: The time taken to move to the Protect function group can be adjusted
by changing the Move to Protect Function Group Time parameter
setting.
Figure 5.2
Page
to protect function group

pmov Move
5-3
Displayed only when a password
0
is configured.
M
oapt Operation/Adjustment
5-3
icpt Initial Setting/
5-4
wtpt Configuration change
5-4
pfpt PF Key protect
5-5
pmsk Parameter mask enable
5-5
0 protect
M
1 Communications protect
M
off protect
M
off
M
on
M
to move to
prlp Password
protection function group
5-5
0
M
Parameters that are protected will not be displayed and their values cannot be
changed.
pmov
5-3
Move to Protect Function Group
Conditions of Use: The Password to Move to Protect function group

parameter must NOT be set to 0.
Function: This parameter allows you to specify a password that must be
entered to move to the Protect function group.
The Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter will be displayed if the
correct password is entered.
Related Parameters
Password to Move to Protect function group (Protect function group,
page 5-5).
oapt
Operation/Adjustment Protection
Function: These parameters specify the range of parameters to be protected.

Table 5.A shows the relationship between the configured/set values and the
range of protection.
Table 5.A
Configured/Set Value
0
Function Group
PV
Operation
Function Group
PV/SP
Others
Adjustment Function Group
Default Level of Protection: Can be displayed and changed. Can be displayed.

X Cannot be displayed and moving to other function groups is NOT possible.
Note: Parameter items are not protected when the configured/set value is 0.
5-4
icpt
Initial Setting/Communications Protection
This portion of the Protect function group restricts movement by keypad to

the Initial Setting function group, Communications Setting function group,
and Advanced Setting function group.
Table 5.B Initial Setting/Communications Protection
Configured
Value
Initial Setting
Function Group
Communications Setting Advanced Setting

Function Group
Function Group
0
1
2
X
X
Default. Level of Protection:
Able to reach, X Cannot reach.
Setting/Configuration Change Protection

Conditions of Use: Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 must NOT be
configured to Setting Change Enabled/Disabled
Function: This portion of the Protect function group restricts changes to
controller setup parameters by key operation.
Table 5.C Setting/Configuration Change Protection
Configurable Range
Default
on: Enabled, off: Disabled
on
Table 5.D Configuration Change Protection

Configured Value
Description
OFF
Setup can be changed by key operation.
ON
Setup cannot be changed by key operation. (The Protect function

group can be changed.)
Default
Note: The all protect indicator

protection is ON.
will light when configuration change
pfpt
5-5
PF Key Protect
Conditions of Use: The Controller must have a PF Key (900-TC8)

Function: The PF Key Protect parameter enables and disables PF Key
operation from the controller keypad (900-TC8).
Table 5.E PF Key Protect
Configured Value Description
OFF
PF Key enabled from keypad
ON
PF Key disabled from keypad (Operation as a function key is

prohibited.)
The shaded cell indicates the default.
pmsk
Parameter Mask Enable
Conditions of Use: This parameter is displayed only when a parameter mask

has been configured from the Software Setup Tool.
Function: This parameter turns the parameter mask function ON and OFF.
Table 5.F
Configurable Range
Default
on
Note: A parameter mask can be used to hide the display of parameters at the
controller that are not needed. The parameter mask function is
provided by the Software Setup Tool.
prlp
Password to Move to Protect Function Group
Function: This parameter is used to configure the Password to Move to the

Protect function group.
To prevent setting the password incorrectly, the U and O keys or D and O
keys must be pressed simultaneously to configure the password.
5-6
Table 5.G
Configuration Range
Default
19999999
Set this parameter to 0 when no password is to be configured.
Related Parameters
Move to Protect function group (Protect function group, page 5-3)
Note: Protection cannot be cleared or changed without the password. Be
careful not to forget it.
Use this function group when you want to carry out control operations on the
Bulletin 900-TC8, 900-TC16, and 900-TC32. You can configure/set alarm
values, monitor the manipulated variable (MV), and perform other operations
within this function group.
Note: This function group is displayed immediately after the power is turned
ON. To select other function groups, press the
key, or
simultaneously hold down the
and the M key.
Figure 5.3
Power ON
Operation
Function Group
Adjustment
Function Group
Press the
least 1 s; display will flash.
Press the O Key

for at least 1 s.
25
100
Initial Setting
Function Group
Press the O Key for at least 3 s.
Control stops.
Communications
Setting
Function
Group
Press the
Control in progress
Control stopped
5-7

Page
25 Process value
5-7
Page
C
25 Process value/set point 5-8
5-10
5-10
sp-m Set point during SP
5-10
ct1 Heater current 1
5-11
ct2 Heater current 2
5-12
lcr1 Leakage current 1
5-13
lcr2 Leakage current 2
5-14
prst Program start
5-15
sktr Soak time remaining
5-15
0 ramp
M
0.0 value monitor

M
0.0 value monitor
M
0.0 monitor
M
0.0 monitor
M
rset
M
0 monitor
M
r-s RUN/STOP
run
5-18
al1l Alarm 1 value
5-18
al-2 Alarm 2 value
5-17
al2h Alarm 2 value
5-19
al2l Alarm 2 value
5-20
al-3 Alarm 3 value
5-18
3 value
al3h Alarm
upper-limit
5-20
3 value
al3l Alarm
lower-limit
5-20
0 lower-limit
M
set point
m-sp Multi-SP
setting
0
M
al1h Alarm 1 value

0 upper-limit
M
0
M
a-m Auto/manual switch
5-16
0
M
M
C
al-1 Alarm 1 value
0
M
0 upper-limit
M
0 lower-limit
M
0
M
0
M
0
M
o MV monitor (heating)
5-21
c-o MV monitor (cooling)
5-22
0.0
M
0.0
5-16
PV (Process Value)
Conditions of Use: The Additional PV Display parameter must be set to ON.
Function: The process value (PV) is displayed on the No. 1 display, and
nothing is displayed (blank) on the No. 2 and No. 3 (900-TC8 only) display.
Table 5.H
Parameter Monitoring Range
Process
Value
Units
Temperature: According to indication range for each sensor.

EU
Analog: Scaling lower limit -5% FS to Scaling upper limit +5% FS
5-8
Note: When a temperature input (e.g., RTD) is selected, the decimal point
position depends on the currently selected sensor, and when an analog
input is selected, it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting.
Related Parameters
Refer to the Initial Setting function group:
Input Type (page 5-50)
Set Point Upper-Limit, Set Point Lower-Limit (page 5-54)
PV/SP Process Value/Set Point No. 1 Display

PV/SP Process Value/Set Point No. 2 Display (900-TC8)
Function: The process value is displayed on the No. 1 display, and the set
point is displayed on the No. 2 display.
Table 5.I
Parameter Monitoring Range
Process
Value
Units
Temperature: According to indication range for each sensor.

EU
Analog: Scaling lower limit -5% FS to Scaling upper limit +5% FS
Table 5.J
Parameter Configurable Range
Units
Set Point
EU
SP lower limit to SP upper limit
No. 3 Display (900-TC8)

The following table shows the contents of the No. 3 display, according to the
configuration of the PV/SP Display Screen Selection parameter.
Table 5.K
Configured Value
No. 3 Display Contents
Only the PV and SP are displayed. (The No. 3 display is not shown.)
PV/SP/Multi-Sp and PV/SP/MV are displayed in order.
PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Multi-SP are displayed in order.
Only PV/SP/Multi-SP are displayed
PV/SP/MV are displayed
5-9
Table 5.K
Configured Value
No. 3 Display Contents
PV/SP/Multi-SP and PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed in

order.
PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed in order.
Only PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed.
Note: When a temperature input (e.g., RTD) is selected, the decimal point
position depends on the currently selected sensor, and when an analog
input is selected, it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting.
Note: A 2-level display is set when shipped from the factory.
Note: A 3-level display is activated if parameters are initialized.
Note: When 1, 2, 5, or 6 is selected, press the M Key to display PV/SP
(Display 2).
EXAMPLE
When the PV/SP Display Screen Selection Parameter is Set to 2:

Operation Level
PV/SP (Display 1)
C
25
100
50.0
PV/SP/MV
PV/SP (Display 2)
Press the M
key.
25
100
sp0
PV/SP/Multi-SP
Related Parameter
Input Type
Set Point Upper Limit, Set Point Lower Limit (Initial Setting function
group, page 5-54)
PV/SP Display Screen Selection (Advanced Setting function group,
page 5-8)
PV (Process Value) (Advanced Setting function group, page 5-7)
5-10
a-m
Auto Manual Switch
Conditions of Use: The Event Input Assignment 1 or 2 parameters must

NOT be set to Auto/Manual and the Auto/Manual Select Addition parameter
must be configured to ON. The control mode MUST be configured to 2-PID
control.
Function: This parameter switches the Controller between automatic and
manual modes when the PID control mode is used.
If the O key is pressed for at least 3 seconds when the Auto/Manual
Switch parameter is displayed, the manual mode will be entered and the
Manual Control function group will be displayed.
This parameter will not be displayed if an event input is used to
configure the controller to MANU (Auto/Manual).
Related Parameters
PID ON/OFF (Initial Setting function group, page 5-55)
Auto/Manual Select Addition (Advance Setting function group, page
5-87)
m-sp
Multi-SP (Set Point 03)
Conditions of Use: The Multi-SP Uses parameter must be set to ON.

Function: The Multi-SP feature allows you to configure up to four different
set points (SP 03) in the Adjustment function group. Either of these
pre-configured values can be selected by operating the keys on the front panel
or by external input signals (event input) for use by the controller. In the
parameter, enter set points 03 to display the Multi-SP value.
sp-m
Set Point During SP Ramp
Conditions of Use: The SP Ramp Set Value parameter must not be

configured to OFF. The ST (Self-Tuning) parameter must be OFF.
5-11
Function: This parameter allows you to monitor the value of the Set Point
during a SP Ramp function.
Ramp is a function for restricting the amount the set point can change, from
the current value to a new value, as a rate of change.
The currently configured value is displayed when using the SP Ramp Set Value
parameter in the Advanced Setting function group.
When not in ramp operation, the set point is the same as the set point
displayed in the PV/SP parameter.
Table 5.L
Monitoring Range
Units
SP: Set Point Lower-Limit to Set Point Upper-Limit
EU
Related Parameters
PV/SP (Operation function group, page 5-8)
SP Ramp Set Value (Adjustment function group, page 5-41)
Set Point Upper-Limit, Set Point Lower-Limit (Initial Setting function
group, page 5-54
ct1
Heater Current 1 Value Monitor

(900-TC8 &900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: Heater Burnout (HBA), Heater Short (HSA) and Heater
Overcurrent (HOA) alarms must be supported and one CTs wired to the
controller. Alarm 1 must be assigned. The Heater Burnout Detection or
Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON. CT Number 1 must be
wired to the controller.
Function: This parameter measures the heater current from a single CT input
used for detecting heater alarm conditions in 1-phase heaters and displays the
value on the controller.
Heater burnout, heater short, and heater overcurrent conditions are not
detected if the Control Output (heating) ON time is 100 ms or less.
5-12
Table 5.M
Monitoring Range
Units
0.055.0
A (Amps)
ffff is displayed when 55.0 A is exceeded.

If a heater burnout detection 1 or heater overcurrent detection 1 alarm
is output, the HA indicator will light and the No. 1 display for the heater
current 1 value monitor will flash.
Related Parameters
Refer to the Advanced Setting function group:
Heater Burnout Detection 1, Heater Burnout Detection 2 (page 5-30)
HB ON/OFF (page 5-74)
Heater Overcurrent Detection 1, Heater Overcurrent Detection 2
(page 5-26)
Heater Overcurrent Use (page 5-99)
Error Displays ct1: (Chapter 6, page 6-5)
ct2

(900-TC8 &900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: Heater Burnout (HBA), Heater Short (HSA) and Heater
Overcurrent (HOA) alarms must be supported and two CTs wired to the
controller. Alarm 1 must be assigned. The Heater Burnout Detection or
Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON. The second CT must
be wired to the controller.
5-13
Function: This parameter measures the heater current from two CT inputs
used for detecting heater alarm conditions in 3-phase heaters and displays the
value on the controller.
Table 5.N
Monitoring Range
Units
0.0...55.0
A (Amps)
Heater burnout, heater short, and heater overcurrent conditions are not
detected if the Control Output (heating) ON time is 100 ms or less.
Related Parameters
Heater overcurrent detection 1, Heater overcurrent detection 2 (page
5-30)
Heater overcurrent use (page 5-30)
Error Displays ct2: (Chapter 6, page 6-5)
lcr1
Leakage Current 1 Monitor

(900-TC8 &900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: Heater Burnout (HBA), Heater Short (HSA), and Heater
Overcurrent (HOA) alarms must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned and
CT Number 1 wired to the controller. The HS Alarm Use parameter must be
set to ON.
Function: This parameter measures the heater current from the Number 1
CT input used for detecting a short-circuit condition in single-phase heaters.
The heater current is measured and the value is displayed.
5-14
Table 5.O
Monitoring Range
Units
0.055.0
A (Amps)
HS alarm is not detected if the Control Output (heating) OFF time is

100 ms or less.
If an HS alarm 1 alarm is output, the HA indicator will light and the No.
1display for the leakage current 1 monitor will flash.
Related Parameters
HS Alarm 1, HS Alarm 2 (page 5-31)
Failure Detection (page 5-88)
Error Displays lcr1 (Chapter 6, page 6-5)
lcr2

(900-TC8 &900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: Heater Burnout (HBA), Heater Short (HSA), and Heater
Overcurrent (HOA) alarms must be supported and two CTs (Number 1 and
Number 2) wired to the controller. Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HS Alarm
Use parameter must be set to ON.
Function: This parameter measures and displays the heater current from two
CT inputs used for detecting short-circuit conditions in 3-phase heaters.
This parameter measures and displays the heater current value.
Table 5.P
Monitoring Range
Units
0.055.0
A (Amps)
HS alarm is not detected if the Control Output (heating) OFF time is

100 ms or less.
5-15
Related Parameters
HS Alarm Use (page 5-88)
Error Displays lcr2(Chpater 6, page 6-5)
prst
Program Start
Conditions of Use: The Program Pattern parameter must NOT be set to

OFF.
Function: This parameter starts and stops the simple program function.
Table 5.Q
Parameter
Function
Default
rset
Stops the simple program.(RSET)
rset
strt
Starts the simple program. (STRT)
The RUN/STOP status LED will automatically switch to RUN when

this parameter is set to STRT.
The simple program will stop when this parameter is set to RSET.
This parameter will function as a monitor display for the start/stop
status of the simple program if an event input is selected to start the
simple program.
Related Parameters
Soak Time Remain, RUN/STOP (Operation function group, page 5-16)

Soak Time, Wait Band (Adjustment function group, page 5-39)
Program Pattern (Initial Setting function group, page 5-57)
Soak Time Unit (Advanced Setting function group, page 5-96)
sktr
Soak Time Remain
Conditions of Use: The Program Pattern parameter must NOT be

configured to OFF.
5-16
Function: This parameter measures and displays the soak time remaining for
the simple program function.
Table 5.R
Monitoring Range
Units
09999
Minutes or hours
Related Parameters
Program Start (Operation function group, page 5-15)

r-s
RUN/STOP
Conditions of Use: The Event Input Assignments 1 and 2 parameter must

NOT be configured to RUN/STOP.
Function: This parameter allows you to change and monitor the operational
RUN/STOP mode of the controller.
When run: is selected, the controller is running. When stop: is selected, the
controller is stopped. When the controller is stopped, the STOP LED display
lights.
When the RUN/STOP function is being controlled by an event input, the
RUN/STOP function cannot be initiated by operating the keys on the
controller front panel, and the parameter will NOT be displayed in the
Note: The default is run.
al-1
Alarm Value 1
Conditions of Use: Alarm 1 must be assigned. The alarm 1 type must not be
0, 1, 4, 5, or 12.
5-17
Function: This parameter sets the alarm value for alarm 1. This parameter is
set to one of the input values X in the alarm type list. During temperature
input, the decimal point position depends on the currently selected sensor, and
during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting.
Table 5.S
Configurable Range
Unit
Default
-1999 to 9999
EU
Related Parameters
Input Type (Initial Setting function group, page 5-50),
Scaling upper limit, Scaling lower limit, Decimal point (Initial Setting
function group, page 5-52)
Standby Sequence Reset (page 5-72), Auxiliary output open in alarm
(page 5-73), Alarm 1 Hysteresis (page 5-61), Alarm 1 Latch (page 5-79)
(Advanced Setting function group).
Alarm 1 Type (Initial Setting function group, page 5-59)
al-2
Alarm Value 2 (900-TC8, 900-TC16)
0, 1, 4, 5, or 12.
Table 5.T
Configurable Range
Unit
Default
-1999 to 9999
EU
Related Parameters
Input Type (Initial Setting setting function group, page 5-50)
Scaling Upper Limit, Scaling Lower Limit, Decimal Point (Initial Setting
Standby Sequence Reset (page 5-72), Auxiliary Output open in alarm
5-18
al-3
Alarm Value 3 (900-TC8)
0, 1, 4, 5, or 12.
Table 5.U
Configurable Range
Unit
Default
-1999 to 9999
EU
Related Parameters
Input Type, Scaling Upper Limit, Scaling Lower Limit, Decimal Point
(Initial Setting function group, page 5-52)
Standby Sequence Reset (page 5-72), Auxiliary Output open in alarm
(page 5-73), Alarm 3 Hysteresis: (page 5-62), Alarm 3 Latch (page 5-79)
al1h
Upper-Limit Alarm Value 1
al1l
Lower-Limit Alarm Value 1
Conditions of Use: Alarm 1 must be assigned and the Alarm 1 Type must
NOT be set to either 1, 4, or 5.
Function: This parameter allows independent configuration of the upper- and
Lower-Limit alarm values when the mode for configuring the Upper- and
Lower-Limits is selected for Alarm 1 Type (Initial Setting function group).
This parameter sets the Upper- and Lower-Limit alarm values for Alarm 1.
5-19
When using a temperature input, the decimal point position depends on the
currently selected sensor, and when using an analog input it depends on the
Decimal Point parameter setting.
Table 5.V
Configurable Range
Units
Default Value
1999+9999
EU
Related Parameters
Input Type (page 5-50), Scaling Upper-Limit, Scaling Lower-Limit,
Decimal Point (page 5-52), Alarm 1 Type (page 5-59) (Initial Setting
function group)
Standby Sequence Reset (page 5-72), Auxiliary Output 1 Open in Alarm
(Advanced Setting function group)
al2h
al2l
Lower-Limit Alarm Value 2 (900-TC8, 900-TC16)
Lower-Limit alarm limit values when the mode for configuring the Upper- and
Lower-Limits is selected for Alarm 2 Type (Initial Setting function group).
This parameter sets the Upper- and Lower-Limit alarm values for Alarm 2.
Table 5.W
Configurable Range
Units
Default Value
1999+9999
EU
5-20
Related Parameters
function group)
al3h
al3l
Lower-Limit Alarm Value 3 (900-TC8 only)
Lower-Limit alarm limit values when the mode for setting the upper and lower
alarm limits is selected for Alarm 3 Type (Initial Setting function group).
This parameter sets the upper and lower alarm limit values for Alarm 3.
Table 5.X
Configurable Range
Units
Default Value
1999+9999
EU
5-21
Related Parameters
function group)
MV Monitor (Heating)
Conditions of Use: The Manipulated Variable (MV) display parameter must

be set to ON.
Function: This parameter allows you to monitor the Manipulated Variable
(for the heating Control Output).
Table 5.Y
Control Mode
Monitoring Range
Units
Standard
5.0105.0
Heating and cooling
0.0105.0
This parameter cannot be configured.

During standard control, the manipulated variable is monitored. During
heating/cooling control, the manipulated variables on the heating
Control Output is monitored.
Note: The default of the Manipulated Variable Display parameter is OFF and
the manipulated variable is not displayed.
Related Parameter
Manipulated Variable Display (Advanced Setting function group, page
5-78)
5-22
c-o
MV Monitor (Cooling)
Conditions of Use: The control method must be heating and cooling control.
The Manipulated Variable Display parameter must be configured to ON.
Function: This parameter is for monitoring the manipulated variable (cooling
output) during heating and cooling control.
Table 5.Z
Control Mode
Heating and cooling
Monitoring Range
Units
0.0105.0
This parameter cannot be configured.

During heating/cooling control the manipulated variable on the cooling
Control Output is monitored.
The default is OFF and the manipulated variable is NOT displayed.
Related Parameters
Standard or Heating and Cooling (Initial Setting function group, page
5-55)
Manipulated Variable Display (Advanced Setting function group,
page 5-78)
This function group is for executing AT (auto-tuning) or setting up the

controller.
This function group provides you with basic controller setup parameters for
PID (Proportional Band, Integral Time, Derivative Time) plus heating and
cooling control parameters.
Figure 5.4
Operation
Function Group
Adjustment
Function Group
Press the
Key for
less than 1 second.
Control in Progress
5-23
To move to the Adjustment function group from the Operation function

group, press the
key for less than 1 second.
1. Adjustment function group parameters can be changed after
configuring the Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter to 0. Displays
and moving to other function groups is not possible if the
Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter is set from 1 to 3. Protection
is set in the Protect function group.
2. The Set Point Parameters 0 to 3 in the Adjustment function group are
the configured values for switching the set point during multi-SP input.
3. For 900-TC8 and 900-TC16: The following parameters are displayed
for Controllers with CT Inputs: Heater Current 1 to 3 monitor, Leakage
Current 1 to 3 monitor, Heater Burnout detections 1 to 3, HS Alarms 1
to 3, and Heater Overcurrent detection 1 to 3.
5-24
Figure 5.5
Page
l.adj Adjustment
Function Group
M Display
at AT Execute/Cancel
Page
C
5-25
5-26
ct1 Heater Current 1
5-26
off Writing
M
5-30
5-28
M
C
5-31
0.0 Detection 2
0.0 Monitor
M
hs1 HS Alarm 1
5-33
5-29
5-28
ins Temperature Input
5-34
Limit
insh Upper
Temperature Input
5-35
insl Lower Limit
5-35
0.0 Monitor
5-29
i Integral Time
5-35
d Derivative Time
5-35
hs2
chys Hysteresis (Cooling)
5-38
soak Soak Time
5-39
wt-b Wait Band
5-40
mv-s MV at Stop
5-40
mv-e MV at PV Error
5-41
sprt SP Ramp Set Value
5-41
ol-h MV Upper Limit
5-42
ol-l MV Lower Limit
5-43
0.0
M
off
M
c-sc Cooling Coefficient
105.0
M
5-36
-5.0
M
orl MV Change Rate Limit 5-43

0.0
M
HS Alarm 2
0.0
M
5-35
5-38
off
M
p Proportional Band
1.00
hys Hysteresis (Heating)
1
M
40
M
5-31
5-38
1.0
M
233
M
50.0
M
lcr2 Leakage Current 2
8.0
M
lcr1 Leakage Current 1
sp-3 SP 3
of-r Manual Reset Value
1.0
M
0.0 Temperature Input

M Shift Value
0.0 Monitor
50.0 Detection 2
M
5-33
0.0
M Shift Value
ct2 Heater Current 2 Value 5-27
oc2 Heater Overcurrent
sp-2 SP 2
5-37
50.0
M
0.0 Shift
M
50.0 Detection 1
5-33
0
M
hb2 Heater Burnout
sp-1 SP 1
c-db Dead Band

0.0
M
0
M
0.0 Value Monitor

M
oc1 Heater Overcurrent
5-33
0
M
cmwt Communications
0.0 Detection 1
sp-0 SP 0
0
M
off
M
hb1 Heater Burnout
Page
5-24
sqrp Extraction of Square
5-32
0.0 Root Low-cut Point
50.0
M
5-68
ladd
Adjustment Function Group Display
Function: This is the first parameter displayed after moving to the

Adjustment function group. This parameter indicates that the Adjustment
function group has been entered. (The Adjustment function group parameter
will not be displayed again even if the M key is pressed in the Adjustment
function group to scroll through the parameters.)
at
5-25
AT Execute/Cancel
Conditions of Use: The Bulletin 900-TC8, 900-TC16, or 900-TC32 must be

in operation (RUN), and the control method must be 2-PID control.
Function: This parameter allows you to initiate (turn ON) the controllers AT
(auto-tuning) function.
When you initiate auto-tuning, the optimum PID parameters (Proportional
Band, Integral Time, and Derivative Time) for the current set point during
program execution are automatically set by the controller forcibly changing the
manipulated variable to calculate the characteristics of the control target.
Table 5.AA
Configurable Range
Default
OFF: AT Cancel
AT-2: 100% AT Execute
OFF
AT-1: 40% AT Execute
Both 100% AT and 40% AT are supported for AT.

Only 100% AT can be executed for heating and cooling control.
For 900-TC8 and 900-TC16: This parameter will not be displayed
when either 100% or 40% AT execute/cancel is set to be executed using
an event input.
This parameter is normally off. Press the U Key and select at-2 or
at-1 to execute AT. AT cannot be executed when control is stopped or
during ON/OFF control.
When AT execution ends, the parameter setting automatically returns to
off.
Related Parameters
Proportional Band, Integral Time, Derivative Time (Adjustment
5-26
cmwt
Conditions of Use: An RS-232 (900-TC8 only) or RS-485 (900-TC8 and/or

900-TC16 and/or 900-TC32) communication option unit must be mounted in
the controller.
Function: This parameter enables/disables writing of parameters to the
temperature controller from a personal computer using communications.
Note: For 900-TC8 and 900TC16: This parameter is not displayed in the
Adjustment function group if communications write Enable/Disable is
configured for execution using an Event Input Assignment 1 and 2.
Note: 900BuilderLite software can write to the controller regardless of the
Communications Writing status.
ON: Writing enabled
OFF: Writing disabled
Note: The default is OFF
Related Parameters
MB Command Logic Switching (Advanced function group, page 5-82)
Communication Unit No., Baud Rate, Data Bit, Parity, Stop Bit
(Communications Setting function group, page 5-110)
ct1

(900-TC8, 900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: Heater burnout, heater short, and heater overcurrent
detection must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned. The Heater Burnout
ON/OFF or Heater Overcurrent use parameter must be configured to ON.
Function: This parameter measures and displays the current value in amps (A)
of the heater by using a single current transformer (CT) input. The single CT
hardware is also used to detect a heater burnout, heater short, or heater
overcurrent condition.
Table 5.AB
Monitoring Range
5-27
Units
0.055.0
A (Amps)
Note:
Not all controllers support heater current monitor and heater
burnout/short (refer to Tables 1.B and 1.E).
If a heater fault (open/short or overcurrent) is less than or equal to 100
ms it is not detected.
If a Heater Burnout or overcurrent detection 1 Alarm condition is
detected the HA indicator will light, and the value will flash on the No. 1
display.
Related Parameters
Heater overcurrent detection 1, Heater overcurrent detection 2 (page
5-26)
Heater overcurrent use (page 5-99)
Error displays ct1: (page 5-30)
ct2

(900-TC8, 900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: Heater burnout, heater short, and heater overcurrent
detection must be supported (two CTs). Alarm 1 must be assigned. The Heater
Burnout ON/OFF or Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON.
Function: This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input
used for detecting heater burnout.
This parameter measures and displays the heater current value
5-28
Note: If the Heater burnout or heater overcurrent fault is less than or equal to
100 ms it is not detected.
Table 5.AC
Monitoring Range
Units
0.055.0
A (Amps)

Related Parameters
Heater Burnout Detection 1, Heater Burnout Detection 2 (Adjustment
HB ON/OFF (Advanced Setting function group, page 5-74)
Heater overcurrent detection 1, Heater overcurrent detection 2
(Adjustment function group, page 5-30)
Heater overcurrent use (Advanced Setting function group, page 5-99)
Error Displays ct2: (page 5-30)
lcr1
Leakage Current 1 Monitor (900-TC8, 900-TC16)

Conditions of Use: Heater Burnout, (HBA) Heater Short (HSA) and Heater
Overcurrent detection must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HS
Alarm parameter must be set to ON.
Function: This parameter measures the heater current from a single CT input
used for detecting a short-circuit condition.
This parameter measures and displays the heater current when the heater is
directed to be OFF by the controller.
Note: A Heater Short (HS) fault condition is not detected if its duration is 100
ms or less.
5-29
Table 5.AD
Monitoring Range
Units
0.055.0
A (Amps)

If a HS alarm 1 alarm is output, the HA indicator will light, and the
leakage current value will flash on the No. 1 display.
Related Parameters
Error Displays lcr1
lcr2
Leakage Current 2 Monitor (900-TC8, 900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: Heater Burnout (HBA) and Heater Short (HSA) alarms
and heater overcurrent detection must be supported (two CTs). Alarm 1 must
be assigned. The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON.
Function: This parameter measures the heater current from two CT inputs
used for detecting a short-circuit condition.
This parameter measures and displays the heater current value.
Note: A Heater Short fault condition is not detected if its duration is 100 ms
or less.
Table 5.AE
Monitoring Range
Units
0.055.0
A (Amps)

5-30
Related Parameters
Error Displays lcr2
hb1
Heater Burnout Detection 1 (900-TC8, 900-TC16)
and heater overcurrent detection must be supported. Alarm 1 must be
assigned. The Heater Burnout Detection parameter must be set to ON. A
single CT must be wired to the controller (single-phase heater operation).
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the current value in amps
(A) at which the electrical Heater Burnout Alarm Output parameter becomes
active (ON).
Table 5.AF
Configurable Range
0.050.0
Units
Default Value
A (Amps)
0.0
When the heater current value falls below the configured parameter
value, the Heater Burnout Alarm output goes ON. When the current is
equal to or greater than the value, the alarm is OFF.
When the configured value is 0.0, the Heater Burnout Alarm is always
OFF. When the configured value is 50.0, the Heater Burnout Alarm is
always ON.
Related Parameters
Heater Current 1 Monitor (page 5-13)
Heater Burnout Detection, Heater Burnout Latch, Heater Burnout
Hysteresis (page 5-74)
hb2
5-31
Heater Burnout Detection 2 (900-TC8, 900-TC16)
and heater overcurrent detection must be supported. Alarm 1 must be
assigned. The Heater Burnout Detection parameter must be set to ON. Two
CTs must be wired to the controller.
(A) at which the electrical Heater Burnout Alarm Output parameter becomes
active (ON).
Table 5.AG
Configurable Range
0.050.0
Units
Default Value
A (Amps)
0.0
When the heater current value falls below the configured parameter
value, the Heater Burnout Alarm output goes ON. When the current is
equal to or greater than the value, the alarm is OFF.
When the configured value is 0.0, the Heater Burnout Alarm is always
OFF. When the configured value is 50.0, the Heater Burnout Alarm is
always ON.
Related Parameters
Heater Current 1 Monitor (page 5-13)
Heater Burnout Detection, Heater Burnout Latch, Heater Burnout
Hysteresis (page 5-74)
hs1
HS Alarm 1 (900-TC8, 900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: Heater Burnout (HBA), Heater Short (HSA) alarms and
heater overcurrent detection must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned.
The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON. A single CT must be wired to the
controller.
(A) at which the Heater Short Alarm (HSA) output parameter becomes active
(ON).
5-32
Table 5.AH
Configurable Range
0.050.0
Units
Default
A (Amps)
50.0
The HS alarm is output when the heater current value goes above the
setting of this parameter.
When the configured value is 50.0, the HS alarm is turned OFF. When
the configured value is 0.0, the HS alarm will turn ON.
Related Parameters
Leakage Current 1 Monitor (page 5-13)
HS Alarm, HS Alarm Latch, HS Alarm Hysteresis (page 5-89)
hs2
HS Alarm 2 (900-TC8, 900-TC16)
and heater overcurrent detection must be supported (Two CTs). Alarm 1 must
be assigned. The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON. Two CTs must be
wired to the controller.
(A) at which the Heater Short Alarm (HSA) output parameter becomes active
(ON).
Table 5.AI
Configurable Range
0.050.0
Units
Default
A (Amps)
50.0
The HS alarm is output when the heater current value goes above the
setting of this parameter.
When the configured value is 50.0, the HS alarm is turned OFF. When
the configured value is 0.0, the HS alarm will turn ON.
5-33
Related Parameters
Leakage Current 2 Monitor (page 5-14)
HS Alarm Use, HS Alarm Latch, HS Alarm Hysteresis (page 5-88)
sp-0
sp-1
sp-2
sp-3
Set Point 0
Set Point 1
Set Point 2
Set Point 3
Conditions of Use: The Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter must be

configured to either 1 or 2, and the Multi-SP Uses parameter must be
configured to ON.
Function: These parameters allow you to configure multiple (up to 4) set
point values as long as the Multi-SP function is also configured.
For 900-TC8 or 900-TC16, the configured values configured in these 4
parameters can be selected (loaded into the controller) by operating the keys
on the front panel or by event input.
Table 5.AJ
Configurable Range
Set Point Lower-Limit to Set Point Upper-Limit
Units
Default Value
EU
While operating (RUN) if a change is made to a set point (SP 0, SP 1,

SP 2, or SP 3) it takes effect approximately 2 seconds after entering the
value, or upon depressing the
or M key.
When using a temperature input, the decimal point position is
dependent on the selected sensor.
When using an analog input, the decimal point position is dependent on
the setting of the Decimal Point position parameter.
5-34
Related Parameter
PV/SP (Operation function group, page 5-8), Input Type (Initial Setting
function group) (page 5-50)
Event Input Assignment 1 (page 5-66)

Event Input Assignment 2 (page 5-66)
Number of Multi-SP Uses (page 5-65)
Multi-SP Uses (page 5-71)
ins
Temperature Input Shift
Conditions of Use: The Input Type parameter must be configured as a

temperature (thermocouple or RTD) input (this excludes a non-contact
temperature sensor). The Input Shift Type parameter must be configured for
One-Point Shift.
Function: Sometimes an error may exist between the measured temperature
(PV) and the actual temperature at the control target. To offset this error, add
your configured input shift value to the input (PV). The result is displayed on
the controller as the new measurement value (PV) and used for control.
Note: The entire input range is shifted by the input shift value (1-point shift).
If the input shift value is set to 1C, the process is controlled to a value
obtained by subtracting 1C from the actual temperature (refer to
Figure 4.2).
Table 5.AK Input Shift
Configurable Range
Units
Default Value
199.9+999.9
C or F
0.0
Related Parameter
Input Type (Initial Setting function group, page 5-50)
Input Shift Type (Advanced Setting function group, page 5-86)
insh
Upper-Limit Temperature Input Shift Value,
insl
Lower-Limit Temperature Input Shift Value
5-35
Conditions of Use: The Input Type parameter must be configured for a

thermocouple on RTD sensor and the Input Shift Type parameter must be
configured for 2-Point Shift. When using an infrared type sensor simply
configure Input Type to infrared and Upper/Limit Input Shift is automatically
allowed.
Function: Whereas the entire input range is shifted by a fixed value (1-point
shift) in the Temperature Input Shift parameter, this function shifts the input
range by two points (2-point shift) at the Upper- and Lower-Limits. This
allows a more accurate offset of the input range.
This parameter sets input shift values for each of the Upper- and Lower-Limits
(2-point shift) of the input range are shown in Table 5.AL , Allowable Range.
Table 5.AL Allowable Range
Configurable Range
Units
Default Value
199.9+999.9
C or F
0.0
Related Parameter
Input Shift Type (Advanced Setting function group, page 5-86)
Proportional Band,
Integral Time,
Derivative Time
Conditions of Use: The control method must be 2-PID control.

Function: These three parameters allow you to manually configure the PID
value parameters. Note that the PID parameters are automatically configured
by the controller when either the Auto-Tune (AT) or Self-Tune (ST)
parameters are executed.
5-36
Proportional action: P refers to control in which the Manipulated Variable

(MV) is proportional to the deviation (control error).
Integral action: I gives a control action that is proportional to the time
integral of the deviation. With proportional control, there is normally an offset
(control error). So, proportional action is used in combination with integral
action. As time passes, this control error disappears, and the control
temperature (process value) comes to agree with the set point.
Derivative action: D gives a control action that is proportional to the time
derivative of the control error. As proportional control and integral control
correct for errors in the control result, the control system will be late in
responding to sudden changes in temperature. Derivative action enables
control that is proportional to a predicted process output to correct for future
error.
Table 5.AM
Parameters
Controller Type
Configurable Range
Units
Default
Proportional Band
With Thermocouple or Resistance Detector

(RID)
0.1999.9
C or F
8.0
%FS
10.0
Seconds
233
With Analog Inputs

Integral Time
03999
Derivative Time
RT is OFF
03999
Seconds
40
RT is ON
0.0999.9
Seconds
40.0
Set NONE as the unit for Controllers with 050 Millivolt Inputs.
Note: If the settings for RT (robust tuning) are changed, the Proportional
Band (P), Integral Time (I), and Derivative Time (D) will be initiated.
Related Parameter
AT Execute/Cancel (Adjustment function group, page 5-25)
c-sc
Cooling Coefficient
Conditions of Use: The control mode must be heating and cooling with the
2-PID control method configured.
Function: If the heating and cooling characteristics of the control target differ
greatly, preventing satisfactory control characteristics from being obtained by
the same PID parameters, adjust the proportional band (P) at the cooling
Control Output side by adding the cooling coefficient to balance control
between the heating and cooling sides (refer to Figure 4.26).
5-37
In the heating and cooling control mode, the cooling Control Output side P is
calculated by the following formula to configure the cooling coefficient:
Cooling Control Output side P = Cooling coefficient x P (proportional band)
Table 5.AN
Configurable Range
Units
Default Value
0.0199.99
None
1.00
Related Parameter
Proportional Band (Adjustment function group, page 5-35)
c-db
Dead Band
Conditions of Use: The control system must be configured for the heating
and cooling control mode.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the output dead band width
in a heating and cooling control system. A negative value configures an overlap
band.
This parameter sets an area in which the Control Output is 0 centering around
the set point in a heating and cooling control system (refer to Figure 4.25).
The decimal point setting follows that of the currently configured sensor.
When using an analog input, the decimal point setting follows the Decimal
Point position configuration.
Table 5.AO
Configurable
Range
Units
Default
With Thermocouple or Resistance

Thermometer (RTD)
199.9999.9
C or F
0.0
With Analog Inputs
19.9999.99
%FS
0.00
Controller Type
Set NONE as the units for Controllers with 050 Millivolt Inputs.
5-38
of-r
Manual Reset Value
Conditions of Use: The control mode must be standard control with the
2-PID control method configured. In addition, the Integral Time parameter
must be set to 0.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the manipulated variable to
remove offset during stabilization of P or PD control.
Table 5.AP
Configurable Range
Units
Default Value
0.0100.0
50.0
Related Parameters
Integral Time (Adjustment function group, page 5-35)
hys
Hysteresis (Heating)
chys
Hysteresis (Cooling)
Conditions of Use: The control method must be ON/OFF control. For

Hysteresis Cooling the control mode must be heating and cooling.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the hysteresis function to
help ensure stable operation during ON/OFF control. For more details, refer
to page 3-26, Hysteresis.
In the standard control mode, use the Hysteresis Heating parameter.
The Hysteresis Cooling parameter cannot be used in standard control
(refer to Figure 3.24).
In the heating and cooling control mode, the Hysteresis parameter can
be set independently for heating and cooling. Use the Hysteresis
Heating parameter to configure the heating Control Output, and use the
Hysteresis Cooling parameter to configure the cooling Control Output
side hysteresis (refer to Figure 3.25).
5-39
Table 5.AQ
Parameters
Controller Type
Configurable
Range
Units
Default
Hysteresis (heating)
With Thermocouple or Resistance Thermometer (RTD)
0.1999.9
C or F
1.0
With Analog Inputs
0.0199.99
%FS
0.10
With Thermocouple or Resistance Thermometer (RTD)
0.0999.9
C or F
1.0
With Analog Inputs
0.0199.99
%FS
0.10
Hysteresis (cooling)
Related Parameters
PID ON/OFF, Standard or Heating/Cooling (Initial Setting function
group, page 5-55)
soak
Soak Time

OFF.
Function: This parameter enables you to configure the soak or delay time for
the control operation when using the simple program function.
Table 5.AR
Configurable Range
Units
Default
19999
Minutes or hours
Related Parameters
Program Start, Soak Time Remain (Operation function group, page
5-15)
Wait Band (Adjustment function group, page 5-40)
5-40
wt-b
Wait Band

OFF.
Function: This parameter enables you to configure the stable band within
which the soak time is measured for the simple program function.
Table 5.AS
Controller Type
Configurable
Range
With Thermocouple or Resistance

Thermometer (RTD)
OFF or
0.1999.9
C or F
With Analog Inputs
OFF or
0.0199.99
%FS
Units
Default
Off
Related Parameters
5-15)
Soak Time (Adjustment function group, page 5-39)
mv-s
MV at Stop
Conditions of Use: The control method must be configured for 2-PID

control. The MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter must be configured to
ON.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the amount the MV
(process output) is OPEN/ON when the RUN/STOP status changes from
RUN to STOP.
Table 5.AT
Configurable Range
Units
Default
5.0105.0 for standard control

0.0
5-41
Related Parameters
RUN/STOP (Operation function group, page 5-16)
MV at Stop and Error Addition (Advance Setting function group, page
5-87)
mv-e
MV at PV Error
Conditions of Use: The control must be configured for 2-PID control. The
MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter must be ON.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the amount the MV
(process output) is Open/On when an input ERROR occurs.
Table 5.AU
Configurable Range
Units
Default
5.0105.0 for standard control

0.0
Related Parameters
MV at Stop and Error Addition (Advance Setting function group, page
5-87)
sprt
SP Ramp Set Value
Conditions of Use: Self tuning (ST) must be configured to OFF.

Function: If a large change is made to the value of the set point, it is possible
the rate the system reacts may exceed the desired limit. This parameter allows
you to configure the maximum rate of set point change. Configure the
maximum permissible change width per unit of time (minute) as the SP Ramp
value. However, note, that when the SP Ramp value is set to OFF, the SP ramp
function is disabled.
When using a temperature input, the decimal point position of the SP Ramp
value is dependent on the currently selected sensor, and when using an analog
input it is dependent on scaling.
Note: The SP Ramp Time Unites parameter in the Advanced Setting function
group allows you to enter seconds or minutes units.
5-42
Table 5.AV
Parameter
Configurable Range
Units
Default Value
SP Ramp Value
OFF, 19999
EU
OFF
Related Parameters
Input Type (page 5-50), Scaling Upper-Limit, Scaling Lower-Limit (page
5-52), Decimal Point, ST (page 5-56) (Initial Setting function group)
SP Ramp Time Units (Advanced Setting function group, page 5-71)
ol-h
MV (Manipulated Variable) Upper-Limit,
ol-l
MV (Manipulated Variable) Lower-Limit
Conditions of Use: The control method must be 2-PID control, and the ST
parameter must be set to OFF.
Function: The MV Upper-Limit and MV Lower-Limit parameters allow you
to configure the Upper- and Lower-Limits allowed for the manipulated
variable. If the current manipulated variable calculated by the Bulletin 900
Controller exceeds your configured MV upper- or Lower-Limit value, then the
current value becomes the upper or Lower-Limit MV value. Your configured
MV limits will NOT be exceeded by the controller.
MV Upper-Limit
The configurable ranges allowed during the standard control and heating and
cooling control modes are different.
The manipulated variable at the cooling Control Output side during heating
and cooling control is expressed as a positive value (refer to Table 5.AW).
Table 5.AW
Control Mode
Configurable Range
Units
Default Value
Standard
MV Lower-Limit
+0.1105.0
105.0
Heating and cooling
0.0105.0
105.0
5-43
MV Lower-Limit
The configurable ranges allowed during the standard control and heating and
cooling control modes are different.
The manipulated variable at the cooling Control Output side during heating
and cooling control is expressed as a negative value (refer to Table 5.AX).
Table 5.AX
Control Mode
Configurable Range
Units
Default Value
Standard
MV Upper-Limit 5.00.1
5.0
Heating and cooling
105.0+0.0
105.0
Related Parameters
ST (Initial Setting function group, page 5-56)
orl
MV (Manipulated Variable) Change Rate Limit,
Condition of Use: 2-PID control must be used. ST must be OFF.

Function: The MV Change Rate Limit parameter allows you to configure the
maximum allowable rate of change variation in the MV per second. If the
current rate of change in the MV exceeds this setting, the MV will be changed
to the configured MV change rate limit until the calculated value is reached. If
the limit is set to 0.0, this function will be disabled.
The MV Change Rate Limit parameter will NOT operate in the following
situations.
In manual mode
During ST execution (Cannot be set when ST is ON.)
During AT execution
During ON/OFF control
While stopped (MV output during STOP)
During MV output when error occurs
Table 5.AY
Configurable Range
Units
Default
0.0 to 100.00
%/s
0.0
5-44
Related Parameters
Proportional Bband (Adjustment function group, page 5-35)
5qrp
Extraction of Square Root Low-cut Point,
Condition of Use: The input type must be an analog input, and the
Extraction of Square Root Enable parameter must be set to ON.
Function: This parameter sets the extraction of square root low-cut point
used for the inputs. The low-cut point is used for extracting the square root for
flow rate sensors. The data after extracting the square root is shown below.
Operation result
100% FS
Extraction of square
root low-cut point
100% FS
Argument 1 (input data)
Table 5.AZ
Configurable Range
Units
Default
0.0...100
0.0
Related Parameters
Extraction of Square Root Enable (Initial Setting function group, page
5-44)
Monitor/Setting Item Level

(900-TC8)
5-45
Monitor/setting items can be displayed by means of the PF function key when

the PF Setting parameter (Advanced Setting function group) is configured to
PFDP: Monitor/Setting Item.
Power ON
Operation
Function Group
Adjustment
Function Group
Press the
Key
Function Group
PF Key
PF Key
Control in Progress
Monitor/Setting Item Display 1 to 5

Conditions of Use: The PF Setting parameter must be configured to PFDP,
and the Monitor/Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters must NOT be set to OFF.
Function: When the PF Key is configured to display monitor/setting items,
pressing the PF Key will display in order the contents of the Monitor/Setting
Item 1 to 5 parameters. The contents of these parameters are shown in the
following table. For the setting (monitor) ranges, refer to the applicable
parameters.
Table 5.BA
Remarks
Set
Value
Setting
Disabled
PV/SP/Multi-SP
Can be set. (SP)
---
PV/SP/MP
Can be set. (SP)
---
PV/SP / Soak time remain
Can be set. (SP)
---
Can be set.
Integral time (I)
Can be set.
Derivative time (D)
Can be set.
Alarm value 1
Can be set.
al-1
Can be set.
al1h
Can be set.
al1l
Monitor/Setting
Symbol
---
5-46
Table 5.BA
Remarks
Set
Value
Setting
Monitor/Setting
Symbol
10
Alarm value 2
Can be set.
al-2
11
Can be set.
al2h
12
Can be set.
al2l
13
Alarm value 3
Can be set.
al-3
14
Can be set.
al3h
15
Can be set.
al3l
Related Parameters
PF setting (page 5-101)
Monitor/setting items 1 to 5 (page 5-102)
Manual Control Function Group

When using the PID control mode, the MV Manipulated Variable (output) can
be controlled by you from the controller keypad in manual mode if the
PV/MV parameter is displayed.
Manual/Automatic mode changes will result in bumpless control of the MV
(output). In automatic mode, the final MV will be used as the initial manual
MV when moving from automatic mode to manual mode. In manual mode,
the change value will be fixed immediately and reflected in the actual MV.
5-47
Figure 5.6
Operation
Function Group
Adjustment
Function Group
Press the
Key for
at least 1 second.
Press the PF Key for at
least 1 second or the
Key for at least 1
second.
a-m Press the
Key for at least

1 second. The display will flash.
Press and hold the

PF Key for at least
1 second. 1
Press and hold the

Key for at least 3 seconds.
Manual Control
Function Group
1 When the PF Setting parameter is set to A-M for a controller that has a PF Key (900-TC8).
To move from the Operation function group to the Manual Control

function group, press the O key for at least 3 seconds with the
Auto/Manual Switch parameter displayed.
Note: In addition, this operation can be performed using the PF Key by
setting the PF Key parameter (Advanced Setting function group) to
A-M (Auto/Manual). For details on the setting method, refer to
Performing Manual Control. This cannot be done during ON/OFF
operation.
The MANU indicator will light during manual control.
It is not possible to move to any displays except for the PV/MV
parameter during manual operation.
To return to the Operation function group, press the O key or the PF
key in the Manual Control function group for at least 1 second.
PV/MV (Manual MV)

Function: When in manual control operation, the process value is displayed
on the No. 1 display, and the manipulated variable (manual MV) is displayed on
the No. 2 display, with a two display system. With a three display system
5-48
(900-TC8) the PV, SP and the Manual MV can be displayed if the third
parameter is enabled (refer to the following graphics displays)
PV/SP/Manual MV
With No. 3 Display
25
25
100
MANU
50.0
Without No. 3 Display
25
50.0
MANU
MANU
50.0
Note: When the PV/SP Display screen selection parameter is 0.
Table 5.BB
Process value
Monitor Range
Units
Temperature: According to indication range for

each sensor.
EU
Analog: Scaling lower limit -5% FS to Scaling

upper limit +5% FS
Set Point
SP lower limit to SP upper limit
EU
Table 5.BC
Configurable Range
MV (manual MV)
Units
Standard control
5.0105.0
Heating/cooling control
105.0105.0
When the MV Limit Enable Parameter is configured to ON, the configurable range will be the MV Lower Limit
to MV Upper Limit.
in-t
Related Parameters
Standard or Heating/Cooling (Initial Setting function group, page 5-55)
Initial Setting Function

Group
This function group is for configuring the basic parameters of the Bulletin 900
controller. In this function group, you can configure the Input Type parameter
for selecting the sensor input to be connected to the Bulletin 900 controller,
limit the range of set points, or set the alarm mode, and perform other
operations.
5-49
Figure 5.7
Operation
Function Group
Press the
Key
for 1 second.
Control in Progress
\c
25
100
Press the
Key
Inital Setting
Function Group
Control Stopped
To move from the Operation function group to the Initial Setting function
group, press
key for 3 seconds with any parameter displayed except for
auto/man switch parameter.
The Initial Setting function group is not displayed when the
Initial/Communications protection is set to 2. However, it can be used
when the Initial Setting/Communications Protection is set to 0 or 1.
For 900-TC8 and 900-TC16: The Scaling Upper-Limit, Scaling
Lower-Limit, and Decimal Point parameters are displayed when an
analog input is selected as the Input Type.
5-50
Figure 5.8
Initial Setting Function Group
in-t Input Type
Page
Page
5-50
cp Control Period (Heating) 5-57
5
M
20
M
in-h Scaling Upper Limit
5-52
Scaling Lower Limit
5-52
100
M
in-l
dp
5-53
0
M
d-u
Temperature Unit
5-53
5-58
ev-m Number of Multi-SP
5-59
ev-1 Event Input Assignment
5-61
ev-2 Event Input Assignment
5-54
sl-l SP Lower Limit
5-54
alt1
Alarm 1 Type
alh1
Alarm 1 Hysteresis
alt2 Alarm 2 Type
5-59
5-55
5-56
5-59
alh3 Alarm 3 Hysteresis
5-62
tr-t Transfer Output Type
5-62
sqr Extraction of Square

off Root Enable
M
amov Move to Advanced
5-68
5-69
0 Setting Function Group
off
M
on
M
ptrn Program Pattern
alt3 Alarm 3 Type
02
M
stnd
M
st ST
5-62
5-66
stop 2
M
2
M
onof
M
or
s-hc Standard
Heating/Cooling
alh2 Alarm 2 Hysteresis

0.2
M
5-55
5-66
none 1
M
PIDON/OFF
5-65
1 Uses
-200
M
4-20
M
0.2
sl-h SP Upper Limit
cntl
oreV Direct/Reverse
or-r Operation
1300
M
o1-t Linear Current Output 5-64
2
M
c
M
c-cp Control Period (Cooling) 5-57
Decimal Point
0.0 Limit
20
M
0
M
tr-l Transfer Output Lower 5-63
5-57
off
M
tr-h Transfer Output Upper 5-63

100.0 Limit
M
Input Type
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the sensor type by entering
a corresponding code (Set Value).
When this parameter is changed, the set point limiter is changed to the
defaults of the new Input Type. If the Input Type must be changed,
re-configure your SP Upper-Limit and SP Lower-Limit parameters
(Initial Setting function group).
Select one of the Set Values from the following table. Defaults are as
follows: Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer:
5 K thermocouple Controllers with Analog Inputs: 0 (current input, 4
to 20 mA) (not supported by 900-TC32).
5-51
If a platinum resistance thermometer (RTD) is mistakenly connected

while a setting for other than a platinum resistance thermometer is in
effect, the controller error code S.ERR will be displayed. To clear the
S.ERR display, check the wiring and then cycle the controller power.
Table 5.BD Global Temperature (GT) Input Type Controllers
Input Type
Specifications
Set Value
Input Temperature Range
200850 (C)/3001,500 (F)
199.9500.0 (C)/199.9900.0 (F)
0.0100.0 (C)/0.0210.0 (F)
199.9500.0 (C)/199.9900.0 (F)
0.0100.0 (C)/0.0210.0 (F)
2001,300 (C)/3002,300 (F)
20.0500.0 (C)/0.0900.0 (F)
100850 (C)/1001,500 (F)
20.0400.0 (C)/0.0750.0 (F)
200400 (C)/300700 (F)
10
199.9400.0 (C)/199.9700.0 (F)
11
-200600 (C)/-3001,100 (F)
12
100850 (C)/1001,500 (F)
13
200400 (C)/300700 (F)
14
199.9400.0 (C)/199.9700.0 (F)
15
2001,300 (C)/3002,300 (F)
16
01,700 (C)/03,000 (F)
17
01,700 (C)/03,000 (F)
18
1001,800 (C)/3003,200 (F)
1070 (C)
19
090 (C)/0190 (F)
60120 (C)
20
0120 (C)/0240 (F)
115165 (C)
21
0165 (C)/0320 (F)
140...260 (C)
22
0260 (C)/0500 (F)
Millivolt input
050 mV
23
One of the following ranges depending on the scaling.

1,9999,999
199.9999.9
Thermocouple
24
02,000 (C)/03,200 (F)
PLII
25
01,300 (C)/02,300 (F)
Platinum resistance
Controller
thermometer (RTD)
Type with
Thermocouple
and
Resistance
Thermometer
(RTD) inputs
Thermocouple
Pt100
JPt100
K
J
T
Infrared Temperature
Sensor
ES1B
Note: Shaded box indicates default selection for the GT controller type.
5-52
Table 5.BE Analog Input Type Controllers (900-TC8 & 900-TC16)

Input Type
Controller
Type with
Analog
Inputs
Current input
Voltage input
Specifications
Set Value
420 mA
020 mA
15 V
05 V
010 V
Input Temperature Range

One of the following ranges depending on the scaling.
1,9999,999
199.9999.9
19.9999.99
1.9999.999
Note: Shaded box indicates default selection for the GT controller type.
Related Parameters
Temperature Unit, Set Point Upper-Limit, Set Point Lower-Limit (Initial
Setting function group, page 5-54)
in-h
Scaling Upper-Limit,
in-l
Scaling Lower-Limit,
dp
Decimal Point
Conditions of Use: For 900-TC8 and 900-TC16, the Input Type must be
configured as an analog input.
Function: When an analog input is selected as the Input Type, scaling to
engineering units (EU) other than temperature is possible. Set the Upper-Limit
in the Scaling Upper-Limit parameter and the Lower-Limit in the Scaling
Lower-Limit parameter.
The Decimal Point parameter specifies the decimal point position of the
system parameters (Set Point, etc.) whose unit is set to EU.
Table 5.BF Scaling Upper-Limit, Scaling Lower-Limit Parameters
Parameter
Configurable Range
Units
Default Value
Scaling Upper-Limit
Scaling Lower-Limit +19999
None
100
Scaling Lower-Limit
Scaling Upper-Limit 19991
None
5-53
Table 5.BG Decimal Point

Parameter
Controller Type
Decimal Point Controllers with

Thermocouple/Resistance
Thermometer (RTD) inputs
Controllers with Analog Inputs
Configurable Range
Default
01
03
Table 5.BH
Configured Value Meaning
Example
0 digits to the right of the decimal point
1234
123.4
12.34
1.234
Related Parameter
d-u
Temperature Units (C/F) Selection
Conditions of Use: The Input Type must be configured for a temperature

input (RTD, non-contact, or thermocouple).
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the temperature input units
to either C or F.
Table 5.BI
Selections
Default Units
c: C
f: F
Related Parameter
5-54
sl-h
Set Point Upper-Limit,
sl-l
Set Point Lower-Limit
Function: These parameters allow you to configure the maximum allowable

range for an operator to enter the set point value. The SP can be configured
within the range defined by the Upper- and Lower-Limit values in the Set
Point Upper-Limit and Set Point Lower-Limit parameters. If an attempt is
made to enter a SP value outside the upper or Lower-Limit from the keypad
the set point display will flash at the configured maximum upper- or
Lower-Limit value.
If the temperature Input Type or temperature units are changed, the set point
Upper-Limit and set point Lower-Limit are forcibly changed by the controller
to the default Upper- and Lower-Limits of the newly configured sensor.
For a temperature input, the decimal point position is dependent on the
currently selected sensor. For an analog input, it is dependent on the Decimal
Point parameter setting.
Table 5.BJ Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Inputs
Parameter
Input Type
Configurable Range
Units
Default
Set Point
Upper-Limit
Temperature
SP Lower-Limit + 1 to Input
range Upper-Limit
EU
1300
Millivolt
SP Lower-Limit + 1 to scaling
Upper-Limit
EU
100
Temperature
Input range Lower-Limit to SP

Upper-Limit 1
EU
200
Millivolt
Scaling Lower-Limit to SP
Upper-Limit 1
EU
Set Point
Lower-Limit
Table 5.BK Controllers with Analog Inputs (900-TC8 & 900-TC16)

Parameter
Configurable Range
Units
Default
Set Point Upper-Limit
SP Lower-Limit + 1 to scaling
Upper-Limit
EU
100
Set Point Lower-Limit
Scaling Lower-Limit to SP
Upper-Limit 1
EU
Related Parameters
Input Type (page 5-50), Temperature Units (C/F) Selection (page
5-53) (Initial Setting function group)
cntl
5-55
PID ON/OFF
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the controller for either the
2-PID control or ON/OFF control method.
The Auto-Tuning (AT) and Self-Tuning (ST) parameter functions can only be
used in the 2-PID control method.
Table 5.BL
Selections
Default Selection
pid: 2-PID
onof: ON/OFF
onof: ON/OFF
Related Parameters
AT Execute/Cancel (page 5-25), Manual Reset, Hysteresis heating,
Hysteresis cooling (page 5-38)
ST Stable Range (page 5-75)
s-hc
Standard or Heating/Cooling
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the controller for the
standard control mode or heating and cooling control mode.
When using a 900-TC8X in the heating and cooling control mode, the
Auxiliary Output 3 terminal (SUB3) is typically (default) used for cooling
Control Output functions.
When using a 900-TC16X in the heating and cooling control mode, the
Auxiliary Output 2 output terminal (SUB2) is typically (default) used for
cooling Control Output functions.
When heating/cooling control is selected for the 900-TC32, the auxiliary
output 1 terminal (SUB1) is assigned as the controloutput (cooling).
5-56
Table 5.BM
Selections
Default Selection
stnd: Standard
h-c: Heating and cooling
stnd: Standard
Related Parameters
MV Monitor (Heating) (page 5-21), MV Monitor (Cooling) (page 5-22)
(Operation function group)
Cooling Coefficient, Dead Band (page 5-36), Hysteresis (heating),
Hysteresis (Cooling) (page 5-38) (Adjustment function group)
Control Period (Heat), Control Period (Cool) (Initial Setting function
group, page 5-57)
Control Output 1 Assignment (page 5-92), Control Output 2
Assignment (page 5-93), Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment (page 5-93),
Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment (page 5-94), Auxiliary Output 3
Assignment (page 5-95) (Advance Setting function group)
st
ST Self-Tuning
Conditions of Use: The Input Type must be configured for a temperature

input with the standard control mode and 2-PID control method enabled.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the controller to execute
the self-tuning function. The ST (self-tuning) function executes tuning from
the start of program execution to calculate the PID constants matched to the
control target of the application. When the ST function is in operation, make
sure to turn the power supply of the load connected to the control out put ON
simultaneously with or before starting operation of the Bulletin 900 controller.
Table 5.BN
Parameter
Selections
Default Selection
ST
off: ST function OFF

on: ST function ON
on
Related Parameters
ST Stable Range (Advanced Setting function group, page 5-75)
Input Type (page 5-50), PID ON/OFF (page 5-55) (Initial Setting
function group)
ptrn
5-57
Program Pattern
Function: This parameter allows you to select the type of control when using
the simple program function. If the program functionis set to:
OFF, the simple program will not operate.
STOP, the RUN/STOP status will change to STOP after the soak time
has expired.
CONT, control will continue in RUN status after the soak time has
expired.
Table 5.BO
Selections
Meaning
Default
off
Simple program function turned OFF
off
stop
Go to STOP mode at end of program.
cont
Continue in RUN mode at end of program.
Related Parameters
Program Start, Soak Time Remain (page 5-15), RUN/STOP (page 5-16)
cp
c-cp
Control Period (Heat)

Control Period (Cool)
Conditions of Use: The control method must be configured for 2-PID

control. The cooling control and heating Control Outputs must be relay or
voltage (SSR) types. For the Control Period (cool) parameter the control mode
must be set to heating and cooling.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the output period (control
period) which is the minimum amount of time between ON cycles of the
heating and cooling outputs. Set the control period taking the control
characteristics and the electrical life expectancy of the output devices into
consideration (especially if a mechanical relay is used).
5-58
Table 5.BP
Parameter
Configurable Range
Units
Default Value
Control Period (heat)
0.5 or 199
Seconds
20
Control Period (cool)
0.5 or 199
Seconds
20
When the standard control mode is selected, use the Control Period
(cool) parameter. The Control Period (heat) parameter cannot be used.
When the heating control output is an analog output the control period
cannot be used.
When the heating and cooling control mode is selected, the Control
Period can be configured independently for the heating and cooling
outputs. Use the Control Period (heat) parameter to set the Control
Output 1 side control period, and use the Control Period (cool)
parameter to set the cooling control period.
Related Parameter
orev
Direct/Reverse Operation
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the controller for the direct
or reverse operation of the manipulated variable (MV). Direct operation refers
to the control method where the manipulated variable is increased according
to the increase in the process value. Alternatively, reverse operation refers to
the control method where the manipulated variable is increased according to
the decrease in the process value.
Table 5.BQ
Selections
Default
or-r: Reverse operation, or-d: Direct operation
or-r
alt1
5-59
Alarm Type for Alarm 1
Conditions of Use: Alarm 1 must be configured and supported by the

controller.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the type of alarm operation
for Alarm Output 1. Select one of the following Alarm 1 types:
Deviation, Deviation range, Absolute value, LBA, or PV change rate
alarm.
Note: Refer to Table 5.BR for details.
Related Parameters
Alarm value 1 (page 5-16); Alarm value upper limit 1, Alarm value lower
limit 1(page 5-18 (Operation function group)
Standby sequence reset (page 5-72); Auxiliary output 1 open in alarm
(page 5-73); Alarm 1 latch (page 5-79) (Advanced Setting function
group); Alarm 1 hysteresis (Initial Setting function Group, page 5-61)
alt2
Alarm Type for Alarm 2 (900-TC8 & 900-TC16)
alt3
Alarm Type for Alarm 3 (900-TC8)
Conditions of Use: Alarm 2 and 3 must be configured and supported by the

controller hardware.
Function: These parameters allow you to configure the type of alarm
operation for Alarm Output 2 and Alarm Output 3.
For Alarm 2 and 3, you can select Alarm types: Deviation, Deviation
range, Absolute Value, or PV change rate alarm (Note: cannot use
LBA).
5-60
Related Parameters
Alarm value 2 (page 5-17), Alarm value upper limit 2 (page 5-19), Alarm
value lower limit 2 (page 5-19) (Operation function group)
Standby sequence reset (page 5-72), Auxiliary output * open in alarm:
(page 5-73), Alarm 2 hysteresis (page 5-62), Alarm 2 latch (page 5-79)
Alarm value 3 (page 5-18), Alarm value upper limit 3 (page 5-20), Alarm
value lower limit 3 (page 5-20) (Operation function group)
Standby sequence reset (page 5-72), Auxiliary output * open in alarm
(page 5-73), Alarm 3 hysteresis (page 5-62), Alarm 3 latch (page 5-79)
Table 5.BR Details
Set Value
Alarm type
When Alarm Value

X is Positive
Alarm function OFF
Output OFF

(deviation range)
ON
OFF
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Upper-limit (deviation)
Lower-limit (deviation)
range (deviation range)
(deviation range)
L H
X
SP
X
ON
OFF
SP
L H
ON
OFF
Lower-limit with standby

ON
OFF
Absolute-value
Upper-Limit
ON
OFF
Absolute-value
Lower-Limit
ON
OFF
Absolute-value
Upper-Limit with standby
sequence
ON
OFF
Absolute-value
Lower-Limit with standby
sequence
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
X
SP
X
SP
SP
L H
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SP
ON
OFF
Upper-limit with standby

When Alarm Value

X is Negative
SP
X
SP
X
SP
X
0
X
0
X
0
X
0
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
X
SP
X
SP
X
0
X
0
X
0
X
0
5-61
Table 5.BR Details

When Alarm Value
X is Positive
Set Value
Alarm type
12

(Alarm 1 Type only)
13
When Alarm Value

X is Negative
Note: Shading indicates default setting. Set the alarm type independently for
each alarm in the Alarm 1 to 3 Type parameters in the Initial Setting function
group. The default is 2 (Upper-limit alarm).
With set values 1, 4 and 5, the upper- and lower- limit values can be set independently for each alarm type, and
are expressed as L and H.
Set value: 1 (Upper- and Lower-Limit alarm)
H < 0,
L
H SP
H < 0, L > 0
|H| < |L|
SP L H
H > 0, L < 0
|H| > |L|
SP
H < 0,
|H|
L SP
SP H
H > 0,
|H|
Set value: 4 (Lower-Limit range)

L
H SP
H < 0, L > 0
|H| < |L|
SP L
H > 0, L < 0
|H| > |L|
SP
H < 0, L <
H < 0, L
|H| |
L SP
SP H
H > 0, L <
|H| |L
Set value: 5 (Upper- and Lower-Limit with standby sequence)

For the Lower-Limit alarms in cases 1 and 2 above, the alarm is normally OFF if upper- and Lower-Limit
hysteresis overlaps. In case 3, the alarm is always OFF.
Set value: 5 (The alarm is always OFF if upper- and Lower-Limit alarm hysteresis with standby sequence
overlaps.)
Related Parameters
Alarm Value 13 (Operation function group, page 5-16)
Upper-Limit Alarm Value 13, Lower-Limit Alarm Value 13
(Operation function group, page 5-19)
Standby Sequence Reset Method (page 5-72), Alarm 13 Open in
Alarm, Alarm 13 Hysteresis (page 5-61), Alarm 13 Latch
alh1
Alarm 1 Hysteresis
Conditions of Use: Alarm 1 must be assigned. The alarm 1 type must NOT
be 0, 12, or 13.
5-62
alh2
Alarm 2 Hysteresis
be 0, 12, or 13.
alh3
Alarm 3 Hysteresis
be 0, 12, or 13.
Function: These parameters set the hysteresis (allowed deviation from the
configured alarm value) for alarms 1, 2, and 3.
Table 5.BS
Controller Models
Configurable Range Units
Default
Model with thermocouple/resistance

thermometer universal input
0.1...999.9
C or F 0.2
Model with analog input
0.01...99.99
%FS
0.02
Note: Set None as the unit for 0 to 50 millivolt.
Related Parameters
Alarm value 1 to 3 (page 5-16), Alarm value upper limit 1 to 3 (page
5-18), Alarm value lower limit 1 to 3 (page 5-18) (Operation function
group)
Alarm 1 to 3 type (Initial Setting function group, page 5-59)
tr-t
Transfer Output Type (900-TC8, 900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: An analog current output must be assigned/configured

Function: This parameter allows you to configure the analog current output
for a specific type of transfer output. Refer to Table 5.BU.
Note: If the analog current output is NOT used as a transfer output, configure
this parameter to OFF (default).
5-63
Table 5.BT Transfer Output Destination

Control Output 1 Type
Control Output 2 Type
Transfer Output
Destination
Control Output 1
No
Relay Output
Voltage Output (for driving SSR)
Current Output
Relay Output
Voltage output (for
driving SSR)
No
No
Relay Output
Voltage Output (for driving SSR)
Note: Calibration is NOT supported for the transfer output.

Table 5.BU
Transfer Output Type Selection
Default
OFF
off
Set point
sp
Set point during SP ramp
sp-m
PV
pv
MV monitor (heating)
mv
MV monitor (cooling)
c-mv
off
Related Parameter
Transfer Output Upper-Limit, Transfer Output Lower-Limit (Initial
Setting function group, page 5-63)
tr-h
Transfer Output Upper-Limit
tr-l
Transfer Output Lower-Limit
Conditions of Use: An analog current output must be assigned/configured.

The Transfer Output Type parameter must NOT be set to OFF.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the Upper- and
Lower-Limit values specifically for the transfer output and separate from the
actual function (e.g., Set Point Limits).
5-64
Table 5.BV
Default Transfer Output
Transfer
Output Type
Configurable Range
Set Point
Set Point during SP

Ramp
PV
Lower-Limit
Upper-Limit
SP Lower-Limit
SP Upper-Limit
Temperature
Senor setting range Lower-Limit to

sensor setting range Upper-Limit
Sensor Setting
Range Lower-Limit
Sensor Setting
Range Upper-Limit
Analog
Analog scaling Lower-Limit to analog

scaling Upper-Limit
Scaling Lower-Limit
Scaling Upper-Limit
MV Monitor
(heating)
Standard
5.0105.0
0.0
100.0
MV Monitor
(cooling)
0.0105.0
Heating/cooling 0.0105.0
Units
EU
Related Parameter
Transfer Output Type (Initial Setting function group, page 5-62)
o1-t
Linear Current Output (900-TC8, 900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: Control output 1 must be an analog current output.

Function: This parameter allows you to configure the output type for the
linear analog current outputs and select either 420 mA or 020 mA.
Table 5.BW
Analog Output Selection Types
Default
4-20: 420 mA
0-20: 020 mA
4-20
Note: Even when control output 1 is used as a control output or transfer

output the 0 to 20 mA selection can be used.
Related Parameter
Transfer Output Type (Initial Setting function group, page 5-62)
ev-m
5-65
Number of Multi-SP Uses (900-TC8, 900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: An event input unit must be assigned. An optional event

input unit must be installed in the controller.
Function: Multi-SP is a function for setting set points 0 to 3 in advance, and
switching between these set points using a combination of event input
ON/OFF signals. The number of Multi-SP Uses parameter is used to switch
between using two and four preset set points.
Table 5.BX
Configurable Range
Default
0 to 2
Whether the Event Input Assignments 1 and 2 parameters are displayed or

hidden is determined by the Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter setting.
Table 5.BY Controllers with Event Inputs 1 and 2 (Two Event Inputs)
Number or
Multi-SP uses
Displayed (Multi-SP not used).
Hidden (Multi-SP, 2 points)
Hidden (Multi-SP, 4 points).

Displayed (Event input 2 not
used as multi-SP switch).
The following tables show the relationships between ON/OFF combinations

of event inputs 1 and 2 and selected set points.:
Table 5.BZ Number of Multi-SP Uses: 1
Event input 1
Selected set point
OFF
Set point 0
ON
Set point 1
Table 5.CA Number of Multi-SP Uses: 2

Event input 1
Event input 2
Selected set point
OFF
OFF
Set point 0
ON
OFF
Set point 1
OFF
ON
Set point 2
ON
ON
Set point 3
5-66
The following table shows the functions assigned when an Event Input
Assignment (1 or 2) is displayed.
Table 5.CB
Selection
Function
none
None
stop
RUN/STOP
manu
Auto/Manual Switch
prst
Program start (see note 1.)
drs
at-2
at-1
40% AT Execute/ Cancel (see note 2)
wtpt
lat
Alarm Latch Cancel
Note: 1 PRST (Program Start) can be configured even when the Program Pattern parameter is configured to OFF, but the function will be disabled.
Note: 2 This function can be configured for heating/cooling control, but the
function will be disabled.
When any of the following functions are configured for an Event Input
Assignment parameter, the same function cannot be configured for
another Event Input Assignment parameter: STOP (RUN/STOP),
MANU (Auto/Manual Switch), PRST (Program Start), DRS (Invert
Direct/Reverse Operation), AT-2 (100% AT Execute/Cancel), AT-1
(40% AT Execute/Cancel), WTPT (Setting Change Enable/Disable), or
LAT (Alarm Latch Cancel).
Related Parameters
SP0 to SP3 (Adjustment function group, page 5-33),
Event input assignment 1 and 2 (Initial Setting function group, page
5-66), Multi-SP use (Advanced Setting function group, page 5-71)
ev-*
Event Input Assignment (* 1 and 2) (900-TC8,

900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: An event input unit must be installed in the controller.

Multi-SP must NOT be used.
5-67
Function: The following functions can be assigned to event inputs 1 and 2:
RUN/STOP
Auto/Manual Switch
Program Start
Alarm Latch Cancel
Default:
Event Input Assignment 1: none
Event Input Assignment 2: stop.
Table 5.CC
Selection
Function
none
None
stop
RUN/STOP
manu
Auto/Manual
prst
Program start (see note 1.)
drs
at-2
at-1
40% AT Execute/ Cancel (see note 2)
wtpt
lat
Alarm Latch Cancel
Note: 1 PRST (Program Start) can be configured even when the Program Pattern parameter is configured to OFF, but the function will be disabled.
Note: 2 This function can be configured for heating/cooling control, but the
Related Parameters
SP0 to SP3 (Adjustment function group, page 5-33)
Number of multi-SP uses (Initial Setting function group, page 5-65)
5-68
sqr
Extraction of Square Root Enable (900-TC8,

900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: An analog input must be supported.

Function: This parameter enables and disables square root extraction.
Table 5.CD
Setting Range
Default
on: Enabled, off: disabled
None
Related Parameter
Extraction of square root low-cut point (Adjustment function group,
page 5-44)
amov
Move to Advanced Setting Function Group
Conditions of Use: The Initial Setting/Communications Protect parameter

must be set to 0.
Function: This parameter allows you to move to the Advanced Setting
function group by entering the value 169 when the parameter is displayed
Note: Once the value (169) is displayed on the controller you can move to
the Advanced Setting function group either by pressing the M key or
O key or by waiting for 2 seconds to elapse.
Related Parameter
Initial Setting/Communications Protect (Protect function group, page
5-4)
Advanced Setting Function

Group
5-69
This function group is for using the Bulletin 900 controller to its maximum
capability.
Figure 5.9
Power ON
Adjustment
function group
Operation
function group
Press the
Press
the O Key
for at least
1 s.
Press the
O Key
for at
least 3 s.
25
100

least 3 s.
Control stops.
Communications
Setting
function group
Initial Setting
function group
Press the
Press the O Key for

at least 1 s.
Password input
set value 169
Advanced Setting
function group
Control in progress
Control stopped
To move to this function group, enter the password (169) in the Initial Setting
function group (refer to page 5-48 for details).
Note: In order to enter the password the Initial Setting/Communications
Protection must be set to 0.
5-70
Figure 5.10
Advanced Setting Function Group
init
off
Parameter
Initialization
a1lt Alarm 1 Latch
5-71
off
M
mspu
Multi-SP Uses
Unit
5-71
hsl HS Alarm Latch
a3lt Alarm 3 Latch
5-79
hsh HS Alarm
off
M
rest Standby
Sequence
a
Reset
sb1n Auxiliary Output

n-o
1 Open in Alarm
5-73
Cold Junction
n-o 3 Open in Alarm
off
on
red
M
Burnout
hbl Heater
Latch
off
5-74
hbh Heater Burnout

Hysteresis
5-75
Stable
st-b ST
Range
5-75
M
15.0
Color
pv-b PV Stable
5.0
M
Band
0
M
C
Delay
a2on Alarm 2 ON
0
Delay
8.0
M
0.65
5-76
5-82
5-84
M
0.8 Gain
5-77
Delay
at-h AT Hysteresis
0.8
M
lcma Limit Cycle MV

Amplitude
5-77
5-77
Delay
Filter
5-77
Display
o-dp MV Display
off
M
ret Automatic
Display Return
Time
M
5-78
Delay
5-78
0 Delay
istp Input Shift Type

in51
5-79
mvse MV at Stop and

Error Addition
amad Auto/Manual
off
M
Select Addition
rt RT
off
M
out2 Control Output 2

Assignment
5-93
Assignment
5-93
5-85
csel Character
5-86
5-86
Select
alsp Alarm SP
5-96
5-96
Selection
5-97
5-86
5-86
pvrp PV Rate of
5-87
5-87
4
M
Enable
Change Calculation
Period
5-102
pfd3 Monitor/Setting
5-102
5-102
0
M
0
M
Item 1
Item 2
Item 3
Item 4
0
Item 5
spdp PV/SP Display

4
Screen Selection
odsl MV Display
o
5-102
5-103
Selection
5-103
pvdp PV Decimal
5-104
pvst PV Status
5-105
on
M
off
M
Point Display
Display Function
svst SV Status
off
Display Function
5-105
d.ref Display Refresh 5-106

0.25
M
Adjustment
ocu Heater
Overcurrent
Use
ocl Heater
off Overcurrent
M Latch
5-99
Period
Control Output 1
ra1m ON/OFF Count 5-107
0
Monitor
Control Output 2
ra2m ON/OFF Count

0
5-107
Monitor
ra1 Control Output 1 5-107

0
on
M
5-88
5-98
csca Automatic Cooling 5-98

Coefficient
off
M
5-102
1
M
manl Manual MV Limit 5-97

off
M
t-u Soak Time Unit
sp-m
5-101
sub3 Auxiliary Output 3 5-95

alm3 Assignment
on
pf PF Setting
a-m
M
sub1 Auxiliary Output 1

alm1
5-100
Hysteresis
a3of Alarm 3 OFF
off
M
5-92
5-85
pvad Additional PV
o Assignment
none
M
Heater
och Overcurrent
0.1
out1 Control Output 1
sub2 Auxiliary Output 2 5-94

alm2 Assignment
inf Input Digital
5-91
a2of Alarm 2 OFF

0
M
3.0
a1of Alarm 1 OFF

0
M
lbab LBA Band
5-85
at-g AT Calculated
5-90
a3on Alarm 3 ON
0
lbal LBA Level
5-90
5-82
alfa
Time
a1on Alarm 1 ON
0
M
5-89
colr PV Change
5-74
off
Logic Switching
hbu HB ON/OFF
off
M
5-82
Method
rlrv MB Command
5-73
0.0
M
Output
cjc Compensation
on
20.0
M
5-81
lba LBA Detection
M
M
sb3n Auxiliary Output
sero Input Error

off
5-80
sb2n Auxiliary Output 5-73

n-o 2 Open in Alarm
0.1
Level Time
Hysteresis
5-89
prlt Move to Protect
5-72
off
M
0.1
5-88
5-79
off
M
spru SP Ramp Time
on
M
a2lt Alarm 2 Latch
5-71
off
hsu HS Alarm Use
5-79
ON/OFF Count
Alarm Set Value
ra2 Control Output 2 5-108
ON/OFF Count
Alarm Set Value
rac ON/OFF Counter 5-108
0 Reset
0
M
5-99
cmov Move to
0
M
Calibration
function group
5-109
init
5-71
Parameter Initialize
Function: This parameter allows you to return/reset all of the controllers

parameter settings to their initial/default values.
Table 5.CE
Parameter Selection
Default
off: Initialization is not executed.
off
fact: Initializes to the factory settings described in the manual.
mspu
Multi-SP Uses
Conditions of Use: The controller must NOT have an event input option
unit installed or the Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter must be set to 0.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the controller for multi-SP
selection (03) by operating the keys (D U) on the front of the controller.
If the option event input unit is mounted in the Bulletin 900 controller, this
parameter can be used only when the Number of Multi-SP Uses parameter is
set to 0 and Multi-SP Uses parameter is set to ON.
on: You can select set points 03 from the controllers keypad.
off: You CANNOT select set points 03 from the controllers
keypad.
Note: The default: off
Related Parameters
Multi-SP Set Point Setting (Operation function group, page 5-10)
Number of Multi-SP Uses (Initial Setting function group, page 5-65)
spru
SP Ramp Time Units
Conditions of Use: The ST (Self-Tuning) parameter must be set to OFF.

Function: This parameter allows you to configure the time units for the rate
of change during a SP ramp operation which you previously enabled by
entering a value in the SP Ramp Set Value parameter (Adjustment function
group).
5-72
Table 5.CF
Configurable Range
Default
s: EU/s, m: EU/min
Related Parameters
Ramp SP Monitor (Operation function group, page 5-10)
rest
Standby Sequence Reset Method
Conditions of Use: The Alarm Type for alarms 13 must be configured for
5, 6, 7, 10 or 11 (refer to Table 5.BR).
Note: Alarm 3 is not applicable for 900-TC16. Alarm 2 and 3 are not
applicable for 900-TC32.
Function: Recall that with standby sequence configured the alarm output is
temporarily disabled until AFTER the first alarm condition occurs. This
parameter allows you to configure the conditions (A or B) for enabling alarm
reset after the standby sequence of the alarm has been canceled.
The alarm output is turned OFF when switching to either the Initial Setting
function group, Communications Setting function group, Advanced Setting
function group, or Calibration function group (refer to Table 5.CG).
Condition A: Control started (including power ON), and set point,
alarm value (upper/Lower-Limit alarm value) or input shift value
(upper/Lower-Limit temperature input shift value) changed
Condition B: Power ON
The following example shows the reset action when the Alarm Type is
Lower-Limit alarm with standby sequence (refer to Figure 5.11).
Figure 5.11
SP change
Condition A only
Alarm point
(after change)
Alarm hysteresis
Condition A only
Alarm point
Alarm output: Condition A

Alarm output: Condition B
: Standby sequence canceled point

: Standby sequence reset point
5-73
Table 5.CG
Selections
Default Selection
a: Condition A
b: Condition B
Related Parameters
Alarm 13 Type(see note) (Initial Setting function group, page 5-59)
Alarm 13 Latch (see note) (Advanced Setting function group, page
5-79)
Note: Alarm 3 is not applicable for 900-TC16. Alarm 2 and 3 are not
applicable for 900-TC32.
sb*n
Auxiliary Output * Open in Alarm (* = 1 to 3)
Conditions of Use: Auxiliary output, 1, 2, or 3 must be assigned.

Function: This parameter allows you to configure the output states of
auxiliary outputs 1 to 3 .When the Close in Alarm parameter is configured,
the status of the auxiliary output function is output unchanged with no alarm.
When Open in Alarm is configured, the status of the auxiliary output function
is reversed before being output. The following table shows the relationship
between the auxiliary output function, auxiliary output, and operation displays
(SUB1 to SUB3).
Table 5.CH
Alarm Parameter
Mode
Auxiliary
Physical Auxiliary
Output Function Output
Operation Display
(SUB1 to SUB3)
Close in Alarm
ON
ON
Lit
OFF
OFF
Not lit
ON
OFF
Lit
OFF
ON
Not lit
Open in Alarm
Auxiliary output 3 (SUB 3) is NOT available for the 900-TC16. Auxiliary output 2 and 3
(SUB 2 and 3) are NOT available for the 900-TC32.
Note: The shaded cell signifies the default setting.
5-74
hbu
HB ON/OFF (900-TC8, 900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: The controller hardware that supports the Heater

Burnout (HB), Heater Short (HS), and Heater Overcurrent (HO), Alarm 1
must be configured and the appropriate number of Current Transformers
(CT) to support the application are connected to the controller.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the operation of the Heater
Burnout Alarm (HBA).
Table 5.CI
Selections
Default Selection
on: Alarm Enabled

off: Alarm Disabled
on
hbl
Heater Burnout Latch (900-TC8, 900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: The HB ON/OFF parameter must be configured to ON

and the controller hardware must support the Heater Burnout (HB), Heater
Short (HS), and heater overcurrent detection. Alarm 1 must also be configured
to ON. The appropriate number of Current Transformers (CT) to support the
application must be connected to the controller.
Function: When this parameter is configured to ON, the heater burnout
alarm is held ON until one of the following reset conditions are satisfied:
The Alarm Output is turned OFF when switching to the Initial Setting
function group, Communications Setting function group, Advanced
Setting function group, or Calibration function group, or
Heater burnout detection is set to 0.0 A, or
Controller power is cycled from ON to OFF.
The latch is canceled by the PF key (900-TC8 only). PF Setting = LAT:
Alarm Latch Cancel.
The latch is canceled by an event input. (Event Input Assignment 1 and
2 = LAT: Alarm Latch Cancel).
5-75
Table 5.CJ
Selections
Default Selection
on: Latch Enabled

off: Latch Disabled
off
Related Parameter
Event Input Assignment 1 and 2 (Initial Setting function group, page
5-66)
hbh
Heater Burnout Hysteresis (900-TC8, 900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: The Heater Burnout ON/OFF parameter must be

configured to ON. The Heater Burnout Latch parameter must be set to OFF.
Support (e.g., CT) hardware must be available, and heater burnout, heater
short, and heater overcurrent detection supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the hysteresis (allowed
deviation from the HB, HS or heater overcurrent set point) when such a
condition is detected.
Table 5.CK
Configurable Range
Units
Default Value
0.150.0
A (Amps)
0.1
Related Parameter
5-66)
st-b
ST (Self-Tuning) Stable Range
Conditions of Use: Control must be configured for a temperature input,

standard control mode, PID control method, and Self-Tuning (ST) set to ON.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the value for determining
the conditions under which ST (self-tuning) occurs. This parameter cannot be
5-76
used when the Self-Tuning (ST) parameter is set to OFF (refer to Table 5.CL
and Table 5.CL).
Table 5.CL Self-Tuning Stable Range
Configurable Range
Units
Default Value
0.1999.9
C or F
15.0
Note: Analog inputs do not apply to ST Stable Range because units are
C or F.
Related Parameters
alfa
Conditions of Use: Control must be configured for 2-PID control method,

and the ST parameter must be set to OFF.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the 2-PID constant for
alpha (). Normally, use this parameter at its default.
Table 5.CM Alpha
Configurable Range
Units
Default Value
0.001.00
None
0.65
Related Parameters
at-g
AT Calculated Gain
at-h
AT Hysteresis
lcma
Limit Cycle MV Amplitude
5-77
Conditions of Use: Control must be configured to 2-PID control. Normally

use the default values for these parameters
Function: The AT Calculated Gain parameter sets the gain when PID values
are calculated using AT. When emphasizing response, decrease the set value.
When emphasizing stability, increase the set value. The AT Hysteresis
parameter sets the hysteresis for limit cycle operation during auto tuning when
switching ON and OFF. The Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter sets the
MV amplitude for limit cycle operation during auto tuning.
Table 5.CN
Parameter
Configuration Range
Units
Default
AT Calculated Gain
0.1...10.0
---
0.8
AT Hysteresis
Universal input:
0.1...999.9
C or F
0.8 (see note)
Analog input 0.01...9.99
%FS
0.20
20.0
Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 5.0...50.0
Note: When temperature unit is F, the default is 1.4.
Related Parameters
AT execute/cancel (Adjustment function group, page 5-25)
inf
Input Digital Filter
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the time constant of the
controllers input digital filter. Figure 5.12 shows the effect on the input data
after passing through the digital filter.
5-78
Figure 5.12
PV before passing through filter
A
PV after passing through filter
0.63 A
Time
Constant
Time
Table 5.CO
Configurable Range
Units
Default Value
0.0999.9
Seconds
0.0
puad
Additional PV Display
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the controller so that only
the PV is displayed. It is added to the top of the Operation function group. It
gives you the option of displaying the PV and SP (normal) or just the PV.
Table 5.CP
Selections
Default Selection
on: Displayed
off: Not displayed
off
o-dp
Manipulated Variable (MV) Display
Function: This parameter allows you to configure whether or not the

manipulated variable is displayed.
The manipulated variable is displayed when the Manipulated Variable monitor
(heating) and Manipulated Variable (cooling) parameters are set to ON, and
not displayed when these parameters are set to OFF.
5-79
Table 5.CQ
Selections
Default Selection
on: Displayed
off: Not displayed
off
Related Parameters
MV Monitor (heating) (page 5-21) MV Monitor (cooling) (page 5-22)
Ket
Automatic Display Return Time
Function: If you do not operate any of the keys on the front panel for the
time set by this parameter in the Operation function group, Adjustment
function group, or Monitor function group, the display automatically returns
to the PV/SP display.
This function is disabled (display does not change automatically) when this
parameter is configured to OFF.
Table 5.CR
Configurable Range
Units
Default Value
OFF, 199
Seconds
OFF
a1lt
Alarm 1 Latch
a2lt
Alarm 2 Latch
a3lt
Alarm 3 Latch
Conditions of Alarm 1 Use: Alarm 1 function must be assigned and Alarm 1

Type must NOT be configured to 0.
Type must NOT be configured to 0 or 12.
Type must NOT be configured to 0 or 12. Controller must be 900-TC8 type.
5-80
Function: When this parameter is set to ON, the alarm function is held until
one of the following conditions are satisfied:
The power to the controller is cycled.
The latch is cancelled by the PF Key. (PF Setting = LAT: Alarm Latch
Cancel)
The latch is cancelled by an event input.(Event Input Assignment 1 and
2 = LAT: Alarm Latch Cancel)
The output is turned OFF when switching to the Initial Setting function
group, communications function group, Advanced Setting function
group, or calibration level.
If an auxiliary output is set to close in alarm, the output is kept closed. If
it is set to open in alarm, it is kept open.
Table 5.CS
Selections
Default Selection
on: ON
off: OFF
off
Related Parameters
Alarm Value 1 to 3 (Operation function group, page 5-16)
Upper-Limit Alarm Value 1 to 3, Lower-Limit Alarm Value 1 to 3
(Operation function group, page 5-20)
Alarm 1 to 3 Type (Initial Setting function group, page 5-59)
Standby Sequence Reset Method (Advanced Setting function group,
page 5-72)
Auxiliary Output 1 to 3 Open in Alarm, (Advanced Setting function
group, page 5-73)
5-66) HB ON/OFF: (page 5-74), PF setting: (page 5-101) (Advanced
Setting function group)
prlt
Protect Function Group Move Time
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the control panel key
pressing time required to move to the Protect function group from the
Operation function group, Adjustment function group, or Monitor/Setting
function group.
5-81
Table 5.CT
Configurable Range
Units
Default Value
130
Seconds
Related Parameters
Operation/Adjustment Protection, Initial Setting/Communications
Protection, Setting Change Protection (Protect function group, page
5-1)
sero
Input Error Output
Conditions of Use: Alarm 1 must be assigned.

Function: When this parameter is configured to ON, the output assigned to
the Alarm 1 output turns ON at an input error condition. Note, however, that
the Alarm 1 operation LED display does not light.
Note: For details on input errors, refer to Error displays.
The Alarm 1 output is:
the ORed output of Alarm 1, HB Burnout alarm, HS Alarm, heater
overcurrent alarm and the input error.
turned OFF when controller operation is switched to the Initial Setting
function group, Communications Setting function group, Advanced
Setting function group, or Calibration function group, and when
controller power is cycled ON to OFF.
Table 5.CU
Selections
Default Selection
on: Enabled
off: Disabled
off
Related Parameter
Input Error (Error Display, page 6-1)
5-82
cGc
Cold Junction Compensation Method
Conditions of Use: The Input Type must be thermocouple or non-contact

infrared temperature sensor.
Function: This parameter allows you to specify whether cold junction
compensation is to be performed internally by the controller or to be
performed externally when the Input Type setting value is 5 to 22, 24, or 25.
The cold junction compensation external setting is valid when the temperature
difference is measured using two thermocouples or two non-contact sensors.
Table 5.CV
Selections
Default Selection
on: Internally
off: Externally
on
Related Parameter
rlrv
MB Command Logic Switching
Note: Although this parameter is available, it is not used by the 900-TC8,

900-TC16, or 900-TC32 controller or configuration software. The
default is OFF and should remain unchanged.
colr
PV Color Change
Function: The PV Color Change function allows you to change the color of
the PV display (No. 1 display) based upon preset conditions defined in Table
5.CW.
There are three display colors (orange, red, and green) that you can select
based on the following three modes listed below and eight settings shown in
Table 5.CW.
5-83
Modes:
Constant: This mode displays orange, red, or green all the time.
Linked to Alarm 1: This mode switches the PV display color from red
to green when Alarm 1 turns ON or from green to red when Alarm 1
turns ON.
Linked to PV Stable Band: This mode switches the PV display color
between red outside the PV Stable Band and green within PV Stable
Band, or between green outside the PV stable band and red within PV
stable band. Set the PV stable band in the PV Stable Band parameter in
the Advanced Setting function group.
Note: The default of the PV is red (red).
The following table shows the display functions that can be set using the PV
color change function.
Table 5.CW Settings
Mode
Setting
Function
PV Color Change
Application Example
Constant
org
Orange
Constant: Orange
To match the display color with other

Controller models
red
Red
Constant: Red

Controller models
grn
Green
Constant: Green

Controller models
Linked to
Alarm 1
Alarm
value
ON
ALM1 lit
PV
OFF
SP
ALM1 not lit
ALM1 lit
Application example
r-g
Red to Green
Red
Green
To display the PV reached signal
g-r
Green to Red
Green
Red
To display error signals
5-84
Table 5.CW Settings

Mode
Setting
Function
PV Color Change
Linked to PV
stable band
Application Example
Within
Within
PV stable PV stable
band
band
Low
Within
High
PV
SP
Low
PV stable band
High
Application example
r-g.r
Red to Green
to Red
Red
Green
Red
g-o.r
Green to
Orange to Red
Green
Orange
Red
o-g.r
Orange to
Green to Red
Orange
Green
Red
Related Parameters
PV Stable Band (Advanced Setting function group, page 5-84)
pv-b
PV Stable Band
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the PV Stable Band width
in C, F, or % full scale within which the PV display color is changed based on
your configuration of the PV Color Change parameter.
When the mode to link to the PV stable band is selected with the PV
Color Change parameter, the PV display color will change according to
whether the present value (PV) is lower than, within, or higher than the
PV stable band, as shown in the following figure.
There is a fixed hysteresis of 0.2 (C or F).
Figure 5.13
PV Stable
Band
Low
PV Stable
Band
Within
High
PV
0.2 (C or F)
SP
0.2 (C or F)
When analog inputs are used: 0.02 (% FS).
5-85
Table 5.CX
Configurable
Range
Units
Default
Controllers with Thermocouple and

Resistance Thermometer (RTD) inputs
0.1999.9
C or F
5.0
0.0199.99
%FS
5.00
Controller Models
Set NONE as the unit for Controllers with Millivolt Inputs.
Related Parameter
PV Color Change (Advanced Setting function group, page 5-82)
a1on
Alarm 1 ON Delay
a2on
Alarm 2 ON Delay
a3on
Alarm 3 ON Delay
Conditions of Use: Alarm 1 must be assigned, and the Alarm 1 Type

parameter must NOT be 0, 12, or 13. Alarm 2 must be assigned, and the
Alarm 2 Type parameter must NOT be 0, 12, or 13. Alarm 3 must be assigned,
and the Alarm 3 Type parameter must NOT be 0, 12, or 13.
Function: When this parameter is enabled, Alarm 1, 2, or 3 outputs are
prevented from turning ON until after the delay times you configure in these
parameters has elapsed.
To enable the alarm set the ON delay time at some value >0.
To disable the ON delay, set 0.
Table 5.CY
Configurable Range
Units
Default
0999
Seconds
Related Parameter
5-86
a1of
Alarm 1 OFF Delay
a2of
Alarm 2 OFF Delay
a3of
Alarm 3 OFF Delay
Conditions of Use: Alarm 1 must be assigned, and the Alarm 1 Type

parameter must NOT be 0, 12, or 13. Alarm 2 must be assigned, and the
Alarm 2 Type parameter must NOT be 0, 12, or 13. Alarm 3 must be assigned,
and the Alarm 3 Type parameter must NOT be 0, 12, or 13.
Function: Alarm 1, 2, or 3 outputs are prevented from turning OFF until
after the delay time you configure in these parameters has elapsed.
To enable the alarm set the OFF delay to some value >0.
To disable the OFF delay, set 0.
Table 5.CZ
Configurable Range
Units
Default
0999
Seconds
Related Parameter
istp
Input Shift Type
Conditions of Use: The sensor Input Type must be a thermocouple or

resistance thermometer (RTD) input.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the shift method for
thermocouple or resistance thermometer inputs.
When the Input Type is thermocouple or resistance thermometer, set
either a 1-point shift or a 2-point shift.
Table 5.DA
Selections
Default
ins1: 1-point shift, ins2: 2-point shift
ins1
5-87
Related Parameters
Temperature Input Shift, Upper-Limit Temperature Input Shift Value,
Lower-Limit Temperature Input Shift Value (Adjustment function
group, page 5-34)
mvse
MV at Stop and Error Addition
Conditions of Use: The control method must be configured to 2-PID

control.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure whether or not the MV at
Stop and MV at PV Error parameters are to be displayed on the controller.
Table 5.DB
Selections
Default
on: Displayed, off: Not displayed
off
Related Parameter
MV at Stop, MV at PV Error (Adjustment function group, page 5-41)
amad
Auto/Manual Selection Addition

control.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure whether the Auto/Manual

parameter is to be displayed on the controller.
Table 5.DC
Configurable Range
Default
on: Displayed, off: Not displayed
off
Related Parameter
Auto/Manual Switch (Operation function group, page 5-10)
5-88
rt
Robust Tuning (RT)

control. The Input Type must be configured to temperature input.
Function: This parameter executes robust tuning (RT).
When Auto-tuning (AT) or Self-tuning (ST) is executed with RT
selected, PID constants are automatically set which make it hard for
control performance to degenerate even when control object
characteristics have changed.
Even when hunting occurs for PID constants when AT or ST is
executed in normal mode, it is less likely to occur when AT or ST is
executed in RT mode.
Table 5.DD
Selections
Default
on: RT function OFF, off: RT function ON
off
Related Parameters
AT Execute/Cancel (page 5-25), Proportional Band, Integral Time,
Derivative Time (page 5-35) (Adjustment function group)
PID ON/OFF (page 5-55), ST (page 5-56) (Initial Setting function
group)
hsu
Heater Short Alarm (HSA) Use

(900-TC8, 900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: Heater Burnout (HBA), Heater Short Alarms (HSA), and
Optional controller hardware and/or support hardware (e.g., CTs) must be
installed.
Function: This parameter allows you to enable the controller to support the
Heater Alarm functions
Table 5.DE
Configurable Range
Default
on
hsl
5-89
Heater Short Alarm (HSA) Latch

(900-TC8, 900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: Heater Burnout (HBA), Heater Short Alarms (HSA), and
The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON. Optional controller hardware
and/or support hardware (e.g., CTs) must be installed.
Function: When the Alarm Latch parameter is set to ON, the HS alarm is
held until either of the following conditions is satisfied:
The HS alarm current is set to 50.0 A.
The controller power is turned OFF then back ON again (e.g., power is
reset).
The latch id canceled by the PF key (900-TC8 only). PF Setting = LAT:
Alarm Latch Cancel.
The latch is canceled by an event input (event input assignment 1 and 2
= LAT: Alarm Latch Cancel).
Note: The Alarm output is also turned OFF when switching to the Initial
Setting function group, Communications Setting function group,
Advanced Setting function group, or Calibration function group.
Table 5.DF
Selections
Default
off
Related Parameter
HS Alarm Use (Advanced Setting function group, page 5-88)
5-66)
HB ON/OFF, PF Settings (Advanced Setting function group, page
5-74)
hsh
Heater Short Alarm (HSA) Hysteresis

(900-TC8, 900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: Heater Burnout (HBA) and Heater Short Alarms (HSA)
must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HSA parameter must be
set to ON. The HS Alarm Latch must be set to OFF. Optional controller
hardware and/or support hardware (e.g., CTs) must be installed.
5-90

deviation from setting) for the operation of the Heater Short Alarm (HSA).
Table 5.DG
Configurable Range
Units
Default
0.150.0
A (Amps)
0.1
Related Parameter
HS Alarm Use (Advanced Setting function group, page 5-88)
lba
Loop Break Alarm (LBA) Detection Time
Conditions of Use: Alarm 1 must be assigned. The Alarm Type must be set
to 12 (LBA).
Function: This parameter allows you to enable or disable the LBA function
and set the detection time interval. To disable the LBA function, set it to 0.
Table 5.DH
Configuration Range
Units
Default
09999
Seconds
Note: For more details concerning the LBA Detection Time refer to
Section 4, Loop Break Alarm on page 4-47.
Related Parameters
LBA Level (page 5-90), LBA Band (page 5-91) (Advanced Setting
function group)
lbal
Loop Break Alarm (LBA) Level
Conditions of Use: Alarm 1 must be assigned. The Alarm Type must be set
to 12 (LBA). The LBA detection time must NOT be 0.
5-91
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the SP and PV process

condition for the LBA Level parameter.
If the deviation between the SP and PV exceeds the LBA Level, a
control loop error is detected.
Table 5.DI
Configurable
Range
Units
Default

Resistance Thermometer (RTD) Inputs
0.1999.9
C or F
8.0
0.0199.99
%FS
10.00
Controller Models
Set NONE as the unit for Controllers with 0 50 Millivolt Inputs.
Related Parameters
Process Value/Set Point (Operation function group, page 5-8)
LBA Detection Time (page 5-90), LBA Band (page 5-91) (Advanced
lbab
Loop Break Alarm (LBA) Band
Conditions of Use: Alarm 1 must be assigned. The Alarm Type parameter

must be set to 12 (LBA). The LBA Detection Time must NOT be 0.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the LBA band.
If a control deviation greater than the LBA Band is not reduced when
the LBA Level is exceeded, a control loop error is detected.
Table 5.DJ
Configurable
Range
Units
Default

Resistance Thermometer (RTD) Inputs
0.0999.9
C or F
3.0
0.0099.99
%FS
0.20
Controller Models
Set NONE as the unit for Controllers with 0 50 Millivolt Inputs.
Note: For more details concerning the LBA Band, refer to Section 4, Loop
Break Alarm on page 4-47.
5-92
Related Parameters
Process Value/Set Point (Operation function group, page 5-8)
LBA Detection Time, LBA Level (Advanced Setting function group,
page 5-90)
out1
Conditions of Use: The Transfer Output Type parameter must be set to OFF
when the Control Output is an analog current output.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the output function
assigned to Control Output 1.
Table 5.DK
Control Output 1 Function
Default
None:
No control output function is assigned
o:
Heating control output is output
c-o:
Cooling control output is output
alm1:
Alarm 1 is output
alm2:
Alarm 2 is output
alm3:
Alarm 3 is output
p.end:
Program end is output
ralm:
Control output ON/OFF count alarm
If c-o (cooling Control Output) is assigned for standard control, a value equivalent to 0% is output.
Can be selected for relay and voltage outputs only
Can be selected only when the program pattern is not set to OFF, but the function is disabled.
Related Parameters
Standard or Heating/Cooling (page 5-55), Program Pattern (page 5-57),
Transfer Output Type (page 5-62) (Initial Setting function group)
out2
5-93
Control Output 2 Assignment (900-TC8 &

900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: Control Output 2 must be assigned/available. For a list of

controllers or option units that provide Control Output 2 functionality refer to
Tables 1.B and 1.E.
Function: This parameter sets the function to be assigned to Control
Output 2.
Table 5.DL
Control Output 2 Function
Default
none:
No function is assigned to control output 2
none
o:
Heating control output is output
c-o:
Cooling control output is output
alm1:
Alarm 1 is output
alm2:
Alarm 2 is output
alm3:
Alarm 3 is output
p.end:
ralm:
If c-o is assigned for standard control, a value equivalent to 0% will be output.

If the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter is set to heating/cooling control, control automatically switches
to c-o.
Related Parameters
(Initial Setting function group)
sub1
Conditions of Use: Auxiliary Output 1 must be assigned.

Function: This parameter allows you to configure the function assigned to
Auxiliary Output 1.
5-94
Table 5.DM
Auxiliary Output 1 Function
none:
No function is assigned to auxiliary output 1
o:
Heating Control Output is output
c-o:
Cooling Control Output is output
alm1:
Alarm 1is output
alm2:
Alarm 2 is output
alm3:
Alarm 3 is output (900-TC8 only)
p.end:
ralm:
Default
alm1

If a setting is changed when the Program Pattern parameter is not set to OFF, control automatically switches to
p.end.
If the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter is set to heating/cooling control, this parameter will automatically
be set to c-6 (900-TC32).
Related Parameter
sub2

(900-TC8, 900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: Auxiliary Output 2 must be assigned.

Auxiliary Output 2.
5-95
Table 5.DN
Default
none:
o:
c-o:
alm2
(see note to
follow)
alm1:
Alarm 1is output
alm2:
Alarm 2 is output
alm3:
Alarm 3 is output
p.end:
ralm:

Can be selected only when the program pattern is not set to OFF.
If the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter is set to heating/cooling control when there is no Control
Output 2 (900-TC16), control automatically switches to c-o.
Note: If the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter is set to heating/cooling

control, this parameter will automatically be set to c-o (900-TC32).
Related Parameters
sub3
Auxillary Output 3 Assignment
Conditions of Use: Auxiliary Output 3 must be assigned (900-TC8 only).
Auxiliary Output 3.
5-96
Table 5.DO
Default
none:
alm3
o:
c-o:
alm1:
Alarm 1is output
alm2:
Alarm 2 is output
alm3:
Alarm 3 is output
p.end:
ralm:

If the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter is set to heating/cooling control when there is no Control Output
2 (900-TC8), control automatically switches to c-o.
Related Parameters
csel
Character Select LED
Function: This parameter allows you to select the LED display type for your
controller. The following two types of displays are available:
11-segment display
7-segment display
Table 5.DP
Selections
Default
on: 11-segment display, off: 7-segment display
on
When set to on, an 11-segment display is used.
t-u
Soak Time Units

OFF.
5-97
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the units of time used for
the soak time when the simple program function is used.
Table 5.DQ
Selections
Default
m: Minutes, h: Hours
Related Parameters
5-15)
alsp
Alarm SP Selection
Conditions of Use: Alarm 1, 2, and 3 functions must be assigned. The SP

Ramp Set Value must NOT be set to OFF. The ST parameter must be set to
OFF. The Alarm Type parameter must set to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure whether the set point that
triggers a deviation alarm during SP ramp operation is the ramp SP or target
SP.
Selections
Default
sp-m: Ramp SP, sp: SP
sp-m
Related Parameters
manl
Conditions of Use: The control must be set to 2-PID control.
5-98
Function: This parameter allows you to configure whether the MV Upper

Limit and MV Lower Limit parameters are to be enabled when in manual
mode.
Table 5.DR
Selections
Default
off
Related Parameter
MV upper limit, MV lower limit (Adjustment Level function group,
page 5-42)
pvrp
PV Rate of Change Calculation Period
Conditions of Use: Alarms 1, 2, and 3 must be assigned. The alarm type must
be set to 13.
Function: The change width (rate of change) can be found for PV input
values in any set time period. Differences with previous values in each set
period are calculated, and an alarm is output if the results exceed the alarm
value.
The PV rate of change calculation period can be set in units of 250 ms
(sampling period).
Table 5.DS
Configurable Range
Units
Default
1 to 999
Sampling period
4 (1 s)
Related Parameter
Present value, Process value/set point (Operation function group, page
5-8) Alarm 1 to 3 type (Initial Setting function group, page 5-16)
csca
Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjustment
Conditions of Use: The control must be set to heating/cooling control and

2-PID control.
5-99
Function: By setting the Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjustment

parameter to ON, autotuning can be executed during heating/cooling control
to automatically calculate the cooling coefficient at the same time as the PID
parameters. If there is strong non-linear gain for the cooling characteristics,
such as when cooling water boils for cooling control, it may not be possible to
obtain the optimum cooling coefficient at the Controller, and control may take
the form of oscillating waves. If that occurs, increase the proportional band or
the cooling coefficient to improve control.
Table 5.DT
Selections
Default
off
Related Parameter
Cooling coefficient (Adjustment function group, page 5-36)
ocu
Heater Overcurrent Use (900-TC8, 900-TC16)
Conditions of Use: Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent

detection must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned.
Function: Configure this parameter to use the heater overcurrent alarm.
The PV rate of change calculation period can be set in units of 250 ms
(sampling period).
Table 5.DU
Selections
Default
on
ocl
Heater Overcurrent Latch (900-TC8, 900-TC16)

detection must be supported (two CTs). Alarm 1 must be assigned.
5-100
Function: When you configure this parameter to ON, the HS alarm is held
until any of the following conditions is satisfied:
Heater overcurrent detection is set to 50.0 A.
The controller power is cycled.
The latch is cancelled by the PF Key. (900-TC8) PF Setting = LAT:
Alarm Latch Cancel
The latch is cancelled by an event input. (Event Input Assignment 1 and
2 = LAT: Alarm Latch Cancel)
Note: The output is turned OFF when switching to the Initial Setting function
group, Communications function group, Advanced Setting function
group, or calibration function group.
Table 5.DV
Selections
Default
off
Related Parameters
Heater overcurrent detection 1, Heater overcurrent detection 2
(Adjustment function group, page 5-26)
Heater overcurrent hysteresis (Advanced Setting function group, page
5-100)
5-66)
HB ON/OFF: page 5-74, PF setting (Advanced Setting function group,
page 5-101)
och
Heater Overcurrent Hysteresis

(900-TC8, 900-TC16)

detection must be supported, and alarm 1 must be assigned. The Heater
Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON, and the Heater Overcurrent
Latch parameter must be set to OFF.
deviation from setting) for heater overcurrent detection.
Table 5.DW
Configurable Range
Units
Default
0.1 to 50.0
0.1
5-101
Related Parameters
pf
PF Setting
Conditions of Use: The PF Key must be supported (900-TC8)

Function: This parameter allows you to configure which function the PF Key
will have.
Table 5.DX
Set Value
Setting
Function
OFF: off
Disabled
Does not operate as a function key
RUN: run
RUN
Specifies RUN status.
STOP: stop
STOP
Specifies STOP status.
R-S: r-s
Reversing
RUN/STOP
operation
Specifies Reversing RUN/STOP operation status.
AT-2: at-2
100% AT
Execute/Cancel
Specifies reversing 100% AT Execute/Cancel

status
AT-1: at-1
40% AT
Execute/Cancel
Specifies reversing 40% AT Execute/Cancel

status
LAT: lat
Alarm Latch
Cancel
Specifies canceling alarm latches
A-M: a-m
Auto/Manual
Specifies reversing Auto/Manual status
PFDP: pfdp
Monitor/Setting Specifies the monitor/setting item display. Select

Item
the monitor/setting item using the
Monitor/Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters
When AT cancel is specified, it means that AT is cancelled regardless of whether the AT currently being
executed is 100% AT or 40% AT.
Alarms 1 to 3, heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent latches are cancelled.
For details on auto/manual operations using the PF Key, refer to Performing Manual Control
Related Parameters
Monitor/setting item 1 to 5 (Advanced Setting function group, page
5-102)
5-102
pfd*
Monitor/ Setting Item * (*: 1 to 5)
Conditions of Use: The PF Setting parameter must be configured to PFDP.

Function: When you configure the PF Key parameter to Monitor/Setting
Item it enables using the function key to display monitor/setting items. The
items that will be displayed are configured using the Monitor/Setting Item 1 to
5 parameters. The settings are listed in the following table.
Table 5.DY
Remarks
Set Value Parameter
Monitor/Setting Symbol
Disabled
---
PV/SP/Multi-SP
Can be set. (SP)
---
PV/SP/MV
Can be set. (SP)
---
PV/SP/Soak time remain
Can be set. (SP)
---
Can be set.
Integral time (I)
Can be set.
Derivative time (D)
Can be set.
Alarm value 1
Can be set.
al-1
Can be set.
al 1h
Can be set.
al il
10
Alarm value 2
Can be set.
al-2
11
Can be set.
al2h
12
Can be set.
al2l
13
Can be set.
al-3
14
Alarm value 3
Can be set.
al3h
15
Can be set.
al3l
Note: The MV for heating and cooling control is set in the MV Display
Selection parameter.
Related Parameter
PF Setting (page 5-101), MV Display Selection (page 5-103) (Advanced
spdp
5-103
PV/SP Display Screen Selection
Conditions of Use: The No. 3 display must be supported (900-TC8)

Function: This parameter allows you to configure what will be displayed on
the PV/SP Screen No. display and the order of the display. The default is 4.
Note: A 2- level display is set at the time of shipping from the factory (set
value = 0). A 3- level display is activated if parameters are initialized (set
value =4).
Table 5.DZ
Set Value
Display Contents
Only PV/SP is displayed (with no No. 3 display).
PV/SP/Multi-SP and PV/SP/MV are displayed in order
PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Multi-SP are displayed in order
Only PV/SP/Multi-SP is displayed.
PV/SP/MV is displayed
PV/SP/Multi-SP and PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed in order
PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed in order
Only PV/SP/Soak time remain is displayed.
The MV for heating and cooling control is configured in the MV Display Selection parameter.
Related Parameter
Process Value Set Point (Operation function group, page 5-8)
MV Display Selection (Advanced Setting function group, page 5-103)
odsl
MV Display Selection
Conditions of Use: The No. 3 display must be supported(900-TC-8). Heating

and cooling control must be used. The PV/SP Display Screen Selection
parameter must be set to 1, 2, 4, or 6, or the Monitor/Setting Item 1 to 5
parameter must be set to 2.
5-104
Function: This parameter allows you to select the MV display for PV/SP/MV
during heating and cooling control. Either heating MV or cooling MV can be
selected.
Table 5.EA
Selections
Default
o: MV (heating)
c-o: MV (cooling)
pvdp
PV Decimal Point Display
Conditions of Use: The input type must be set to temperature input.

Function: The display below the decimal point in the PV can be hidden for
temperature inputs. The PV decimals below the decimal point can be hidden
by setting the PV Decimal Point Display parameter to OFF. When this
parameter is set to ON, the display below the decimal point will appear
according to the input type setting.
Table 5.EB
Selections
Default
on:ON, off: OFF
ON
Related Parameter
pvst
5-105
PV Status Display Function
Function: The PV in the No. 1 display for the PV/SP, PV, or PV/Manual MV
Screen is alternately displayed in 0.5-second cycles with the control and alarm
status specified for the PV status display function.
Table 5.EC
Selections
Default
off: No PV status display

manu: MANU is alternately displayed during manual control.
stop: STOP is alternately displayed while operation is stopped.
alm1: ALM1 is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status.
off

alm: ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1, 2, or 3 is set to ON.
ha: HA is alternately displayed when a heater burnout alarm, HS alarm, or
heater overcurrent alarm is ON.
Related Parameter
Process value/set point, PV (Operation function group, page 5-8)
PV/MV (manual MV) (Manual Control function group, page 5-47)
5-106
svst
SV Status Display Function
Function: The SP, Blank, or Manual MV in the No. 2 display for the PV/SP,
PV, or PV/Manual MV Screen is alternately displayed in 0.5-second cycles
with the control and alarm status specified for the SV status display function.
Table 5.ED
Selections
Default
off: No SV status display

manu: MANU is alternately displayed during manual control.
stop: STOP is alternately displayed while operation is stopped.
off

alm: ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1, 2, or 3 is set to ON.
ha: HA is alternately displayed when a heater burnout alarm, HS alarm, or
heater overcurrent alarm is ON.
Related Parameter
Process value/set point, PV (Operation function group, page 5-8)
PV/MV (manual MV) (Manual Control function group, page 5-47)
d.ref
Display Refresh Period
Function: This parameter delays the display refresh period for monitor values.
Only display refreshing is delayed, and the refresh period for process values
used in control is not changed. This function is disabled by setting the
parameter to OFF.
Table 5.EE
Selections
Units
Default
OFF, 0.25, 0.5, 1.0
Second
0.25
ra 1m
5-107
Conditions of Use: Control output 1 must be supported. Relay or voltage

outputs (for driving SSR) must be used. The Control Output 1 ON/OFF
Count Alarm Set Value parameter must NOT be set to 0.
Function: This parameter monitors the number of times that control output 1
is turned ON and OFF. This function is not displayed when the set value is 0,
or when the control output is a linear (analog) output.
Table 5.EF
Monitor Range
Units
0 to 9999
100 times
ra2m

(900-TC8 & 900-TC16)

outputs (for driving SSR) must be used. The Control Output 2 ON/OFF
Count Alarm Set Value parameter must NOT be set to 0.
Function: This parameter monitors the number of times that control output 2
is turned ON and OFF. This function is not displayed when the set value is 0,
or when the control output is a linear (analog) output
Table 5.EG
Monitor Range
Units
0 to 9999
100 times
ra 1
Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count Alarm Set

Value (900-TC8, 900-TC16)

outputs (for driving SSR) must be used.
Function: An ON/OFF count alarm occurs when the ON/OFF counter
exceeds the value set for this parameter. It is possible to assign ON/OFF
5-108
count alarms to auxiliary outputs and to have them displayed on the screen.
This function is disabled when the set value is 0.
Table 5.EH
Configurable Range
Units
Default
0 to 9999
100 times
Related Parameter
Control output 1 ON/OFF count monitor (Advanced Setting function
group, page 5-107)
ra 2
Control Output 2 ON/OFF Count Alarm Set

Value (900-TC8, 900-TC16)

outputs (for driving SSR) must be used.
Function: An ON/OFF count alarm occurs when the ON/OFF counter
exceeds the value set for this parameter. It is possible to assign ON/OFF
count alarms to auxiliary outputs and to have them displayed on the screen.
This function is disabled when the set value is 0.
Table 5.EI
Configurable Range
Units
Default
0 to 9999
100 times
Related Parameter
Control output 2 ON/OFF count monitor (Advanced Setting function
group, page 5-107)
rac
ON/OFF Counter Reset
Conditions of Use: Control outputs 1 and 2 must be supported. Relay or

voltage outputs (for driving SSR) must used.
5-109
Function: This parameter resets the ON/OFF counter for specified control
outputs.
Table 5.EJ
Selections
Default
0: Disable the counter reset function

1: Reset the control output 1 ON/OFF counter
2: Reset the control output 2 ON/OFF counter
Note: After the counter has been reset, the count value will be automatically
returned to 0.
Related Parameter
Control output 1 ON/OFF count monitor, Control output 2 ON/OFF
monitor (Advanced Setting function group, page 5-107)
cmov
Move to Calibration Group
Conditions of Use: Initial Setting/Communications Protect parameter must

be set to 0.
Function: This parameter allows you to configure the Password to Move to
the Calibration function group.
Set the Password to Move to the Calibration function group. The
password is 1201.
Move to the Calibration function group either by pressing the M key or
the O key or by waiting for 2 seconds to elapse.
Related Parameter
Initial Setting/Communications Protect (Protect function group, page
5-4)
Function Group
This function group allows you to configure the controllers communication

parameters, enabling interface to a personal computer that is running the
controller configuration or monitoring software. The controller hardware must
support communications through a RS232 option module (900-TC8) or
RS485 option module (900-TC8, 900-TC16, and 900-TC32).
5-110
Figure 5.14
Power ON
Started in automatic mode.
Operation
Function Group
Press the
Key
Press the
Key
25
100
Press the
Key for at least
1 second. The display will flash.
Press the
Key
Control Stops
Communications
Setting
Function Group
Initial Setting
Function Group
Press the
Key
1 Operation function group entered for software reset.
psel
Protocol Setting
u-no
bps
len
sbit
Communications Stop Bits
prty
sdwe
Send Data Wait Time
Conditions of Use: The Communications function must be supported by the

controller.
Function: These parameters allow you to match the communications
specifications of the controller(s) with the personal computer which has the
appropriate configuration or communication software. If a 1:N connection is
being used (RS-485), ensure that the communications specifications for all
devices in the system are the same except for the unit number. Each device
needs an individual unit number for RS-485 communication.
5-111
Note: Each parameter is enabled when the controller power is reset.

Table 5.EK
Parameter
Symbol
Selection or Configurable Values
Settings
Default
Protocol Setting
psel
cwf, mod
900-TC or Modbus
cwf
u-no
099
099
bps
1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, or 57.6

(kbit/s)
1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, or

57.6 (kbit/s)
9.6
len
7, 8 (bit)
7, 8 (bit)
Stop Bits
sbit
1, 2
1, 2
prty
None, Even, Odd
None, Even, Odd
even
Send Data Wait Time
sdwt
099
099 (ms)
20
Related Parameters
Communications Writing (Adjustment function group, page 5-26)
5-112
Notes:
Chapter
Troubleshooting & Error Indication
Error Displays
When an error occurs, the error contents are shown on the controllers No. 1
or No. 2 display.
This section describes how to check error codes on the display, and the actions
to be taken to remedy the problems.
s.err
Input Error
Meaning
The input value has exceeded the control range (refer to Note).
Note: Control Range
Resistance thermometer (RTD), thermocouple input:
Temperature setting Lower-Limit 20 C to temperature setting
Upper-Limit + 20 C (Temperature setting Lower-Limit 40 F to
temperature setting Upper-Limit +40 F)
Analog input: 5% to +105% of scaling range
Action
Check the wiring of inputs for incorrect wiring polarity for improper or
incorrect connections, and short-circuits and check the Input Type.
If no abnormality is found in the wiring and Input Type, turn the controller
power OFF then back ON again.
If the display remains the same, the Controller must be replaced. If the display
is restored, then the probable cause is electrical noise affecting the control
system. Check for electrical noise. Reroute sensor wires away from high
sources of electrical noise. Use shielded sensor wire and ground the shield at
one end.
Note: With an RTD type input a break in the A, B, or B1 line is regarded by
the controller as a disconnection.
6-1
6-2
Operation at Error
After an error occurs, the error is displayed and the alarm output
functions as if the Upper-Limit has been exceeded.
If you configure the Input Error Output parameter in the Advanced
Setting function group to ON, the Alarm 1 output turns ON whenever
an input error occurs.
An error message is displayed when the PV, PV/SP, or PV/MV is
displayed.
The control output turns OFF when the manual MV, MV at stop, or
MV at PV error is configured, the control output corresponds to the
configured value.
[[[[
]]]]
Display Range Exceeded
Meaning
This is not an error, but rather, it is displayed if the process value (sensor
input) exceeds the display range when the control range is larger than the
display range.
The display ranges are shown below (with decimal points omitted).
When less than 1,999
When more than 9,999
[[[[
]]]]
Action
Control continues, allowing normal operation. The message is displayed when
the PV, PV/SP, or PV/MV is displayed.
6-3
Figure 6.1
Resistance Thermometer Input
(Except for models with a setting range of 199.9 to 500.0 C)
Thermocouple Input
Resistance Thermometer Input

Thermocouple Input
Control range
s.err display
Numeric display
Control range
s.err display
s.err display
[[[[ display
Numeric display
Input indication range
Analog Input
When Display Range < Control Range
Analog Input
When Display Range > Control Range
Control range
Control range
s.err display
[[[[ display
s.err display
]]]] display
Numeric display
s.err display
s.err display
Numeric display
s.err display
Display range
9999
1999
Display range
9999
1999
The display range is shown in numbers with decimal points omitted.
e333
AD Converter Error
Meaning
There is an error in internal circuits.
Action
First, turn the controller power OFF then back ON again. If the display
remains the same, the Controller must be repaired. If the display is restored,
then the probable cause is electrical noise affecting the control system. Check
for electrical noise.
Operation
The control outputs and alarm outputs turn OFF.
6-4
e111
Memory Error
Meaning
The controllers internal memory operation is in error.
Action
First, turn the controller power OFF then back ON again. If the display
remains the same, the Controller must be repaired. If the display is restored,
then the probable cause is electrical noise affecting the control system. Check
for electrical noise. (Refer to Actions under the Input Error section on page 6-1.)
Operation at Error
Control Output and Alarm Output turn OFF. (Current output is approx.
0 mA).
ffff
Current Value Exceeds
Meaning
This error is displayed when the Heater Current value (current from CT)
exceeds 55.0 A.
Action
Control continues, allowing normal operation. The error message is displayed
when the following items are displayed:
Heater Current 1 value monitor

Heater Current 2 value monitor
Leakage Current 1 monitor
Leakage Current 2 monitor
ct1
Heater Burnout Alarm (HBA)
ct2
Heater Short Alarm (HSA)
lcr1
Heater Overcurrent
6-5
lcr2
Meaning
When a Heater Burnout (HBA), a Heater Short Alarm (HSA) or Heater
Overcurrent occurs, the No. 1 display in the applicable function group flashes.
Action
When either HBA, HSA, or Heater Overcurrent is detected, the HA indicator
lights and the No. 1 display flashes for the applicable Heater Current 1 Value
Monitor, Heater Current 2 Value Monitor, Leakage Current 1 Monitor, or
Leakage Current 1 Monitor parameters in the Operation function group and
Adjustment function group. Control continues, allowing normal operation if
possible.
Troubleshooting
Checking Problems
If the Temperature Controller is not operating normally, check the following
points before requesting repairs. If the problem persists, contact your Rockwell
Automation representative for details on returning the product.
Table 6.A
Timing
Status
Meaning
Countermeasures
Page
Turning ON the
power for the first
time
Temperature unit
(C/F) is flashing.
ST (Self-Tuning) is in
progress (default
setting: ON).
This is not a product fault. The temperature 3-33

unit (C/F) flashes while ST (Self-Tuning) is
being performed
Temperature error is
large.
Input error
(S.Err display)
Input Type mismatch
Check the sensor type and reset the Input

Type correctly.
Thermometer is not
installed properly.
Check the thermometer installation location 2-17

and polarity and install correctly.
Communications are
not possible.
Non-recommended
adapter is being used.
Make sure that the connected device is not

faulty.
3-12
Section 1 of
Communications
Users Manual
6-6
Timing
Status
Meaning
Countermeasures
Page
During operation
Overshooting
Undershooting
Hunting
ON/OFF control is
enabled (default:
ON/OFF control
selected).
Select PID control and execute either ST

(self-tuning) or AT (Auto-Tuning).
When using self-tuning, turn ON the power
supply to the Temperature Controller and load
(heater, etc.) at the same time, or turn ON the
load power supply first. Accurate self-tuning and
optimum control will not be possible if the power
supply to the load is turned ON after turning ON
the power supply to the Temperature Controller.
3-30
Control cycle is longer

compared with the
speed of rise and fall in
temperature
Shorten the control cycle. A shorter control cycle

improves control performance, but a cycle of 20
ms minimum is recommended in consideration of
the service life of the relays.
3-17
Unsuitable PID
constant
Set appropriate PID constants using either of the

following methods.
3-30
Execute AT (autotuning).
Set PID constants individually using manual
settings.
Temperature is not
rising
HS alarm operation
fault
Use breeder resistance if the problem is due to

leakage current. Also investigate the errors
detected by the HS alarm function.
3-46
Specified operation is
unsuitable for required
control (default:
Reverse operation)
Select either forward or reverse operation

depending on the required control. Reverse
operation is used for heating operations.
3-17
Heater is burnt out or

deteriorated.
Check whether heater burnout or deterioration

have occurred. Also investigate the errors
detected by the Heater Burnout Alarm.
3-46
Insufficient heater
capacity
Check whether the heaters heating capacity is

sufficient.
Cooling system in
operation.
Check whether a cooling system is operating.
Peripheral devices have Set the heating prevention temperature setting to

heat prevention device a value higher than the configured temperature of
the Temperature Controller.
operating.
Output will not turn ON Set to STOP (default:
RUN)
Temperature Controller
will not operate
Set the RUN/STOP mode to RUN. If STOP is lit on

the display, control is stopped.
5-16
Specified operation is
unsuitable for required
control (default:
Reverse operation)
Select either forward or reverse operation

depending on the required control. Reverse
operation is used for heating operations.
3-17
A high hysteresis is
configured for ON/OFF
operation (default:
1.0C)
Set a suitable value for the hysteresis.
3-16
Set to STOP (default:

RUN)
Set the RUN/STOP mode to RUN. If STOP is lit on

the display, control is stopped.
5-16
Timing
Status
Meaning
During operation
(Continued)
Temperature error is
large
Input error (S.err
display)
Thermometer has burnt Check whether the thermometer has burnt out or
out or short-circuited.
short-circuited
Thermometer lead
wires and power lines
are in the same
conduit, causing noise
from the power lines
(generally, display
values will be
unstable).
Wire the lead wires and power lines in separate

conduits, or wiring using a more direct path.
Connection between
the Temperature
Controller and
thermocouple is using
copper wires.
Connect the thermocouples lead wires directly,

or connect a compensating conductor suitable for
the thermocouple.
Installation location of
thermometer is
unsuitable.
Check whether the location of the thermometer is

suitable.
Input shift is not

configured correctly
(default: 0C)
Set a suitable input shift. If input shift is not

required, configured the input shift value to 3.
4-1
Keys will not operate
Setting change protect

is ON.
Turn OFF setting change protect.
4-33
Cannot shift levels
Operations limited due

to protection.
Set the operation/adjustment protect, initial

setting/communications protect, and setting
change protect values as required.
4-33
Control is unstable
Terminal screws may

be loose.
Retighten terminal screws to the torque

recommended in Section 2 for your controller.
2-17
The internal
components have
reached the end of
their service life.
The Temperature Controllers internal electrolytic

capacitor depends on the ambient temperature,
and load rate. The structural life depends on the
ambient environment (shock, vibration). The life
expectancy of the output relays varies greatly
with the switching capacity and other switching
conditions. Always use the output relays within
their rated load and electrical life expectancy. If
an output relay is used beyond its life expectancy,
its contacts may become welded or burned.
Replace the Temperature Controller and all other
Temperature Controllers purchased in the same
time period.
After long service

life
Countermeasures
6-7
Page
6-8
Symptom: Cannot Communicate or a Communications Error

Occurs
Table 6.B
Meaning
Countermeasures
The communications wiring is not correct
Correct the Wiring
The communications line has become disconnected
Connect the communications line securely and tighten the screws.
The communications cable is broken.
Replace the cable.
The communications cable is too long.
The total cable length is 500 m maximum for RS-485 and 15 m maximum for
RS-232C communications.
The wrong communications cable has been used.
Use a shielded, AWG24 to AWG14 (cross-sectional area of 0.205 to

2.081 mm2) twisted-pair cable for the 900-TC8 or 900-TC16. Use a shielded,
AWG24 to AWG18 (cross-sectional area of 0.205 to 0.823 mm2) twisted-pair
cable for the 900-TC32.
More than the specified number os communications

devices are connected to the same communications path
for RS-485 communications
When 1: N RS-485 communications are used, a maximum of 32 nodes

(including the host node) can be connected.
An end node has not been configured at each end of the

communications line for RS-485 communications.
Set or connect terminating resistance at each end of the line. If the 900-TC8,
900-TC16, or 900-TC32 is the end node, use 120- (1/2-W) terminating
resistance.
The combined terminating resistance with the host device must be
at least 54 .
The specified power supply voltage is not

being supplied to the Controller.
Supply the specified power supply voltage.
The specified power supply voltage is not

being supplied to an Interface Converter
(such as the 900-CONVxx).
Supply the specified power supply voltage.
The same baud rate and communications

method are not being used by all of the Controllers, host
devices, and other devices on the same communications
line.
Set the same values for the baud rate, protocol, data length, stop bits, and
parity on all nodes.
The unit number specified in the command

frame is different from the unit number configured by the
Controller.
Use the correct unit number.
The same unit number as the Controller is

being used for another node on the same
communications line for RS-485 communications
Set each unit number for a unique node number.
There is a mistake in programming the host

device.
Use a line monitor to check the commands. Check operation using a sample
program.
The host device is detecting the absence of a response as

an error before it receives the
response from the Controller.
Shorten the send data wait time in the Controller or increase the response
wait time in the host device.
The host device is detecting the absence of a response as

an error after broadcasting a
command.
The Controller does not return responses for broadcast commands.
6-9
Table 6.B
Meaning
Countermeasures
The host device sent another command

before receiving a response from the Controller.
The response must always be read after sending a command (except for
broadcast commands).
The host device sent the next command too

soon after receiving a response from the
Controller.
After receiving a response, wait at least 2 ms before sending the next

command.
The communications line became unstable

when Controller power was turned ON or
interrupted, and the host device read the
unstable status as data.
Initialize the reception buffer in the host device before sending the first
command and after turning OFF the power to the Controller.
The communications data was corrupted

from noise from the environment.
Try using a slower baud rate.

Separate the communications cable from the source of noise.
Use a shielded, twisted-pair cable for the communications cable.
Use as short a communications cable as possible, and do not lay or loop
extra cable.
To prevent inductive noise, do not run the communications cable parallel
to a power line.
If noise countermeasures are difficult to implement, use an Optical Interface.
6-10
Notes:
Appendix
Specifications
For the setting ranges for each sensor input, refer to page A-9.
Table A.A
Technical/Control
Supply Voltage
100240V AC, 50/60 Hz 24V AC, 50/60 Hz/24V DC
Operating Voltage Range
85 to 110% of rated supply voltage
Power Consumption
900-TC16
7.5 VA
5 VA/3 W
900-TC8
10 VA
5.5 VA/4 W
900-TC32
5.5 VA
3 VA/2W
Recommended line fuse
Type: T2A, 250V AC, time lag, low shut-off capacity
Sensor Input
Temperature Input Type

Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W, PL II
Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100, JPt100
Infrared temperature sensor: 1070C, 60120C, 115165C, 140260C
Millivolt input: 0 to 50 mV

Sensor Input
Supported by 900-TC8 & 900-TC16: Controllers with Analog Inputs

Current input: 420 mA, 020 mA (Input impedance: 150 max.)
Voltage input: 15V, 05V, 010V (Input impedance: 1 M max.)
Control Output
Relay Output 900-TC16
Relay output:
SPST-NO, 250V AC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 100,000
operations
Min. applicable load: 5V, 10 mA
Triac (AC) output
SPST-NO, 250V AC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 1,000,000
operations
Load power supply voltage: 75250V AC
Leakage current: 5 mA max. (250V AC, 60 Hz)
900-TC8
Relay output:
operations
Triac (AC) output:
SPST-NO, 250V AC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 1,000,000
operations
Load power supply voltage: 75250V AC
Leakage current: 5 mA max. (250V AC, 60 Hz)
900-TC32
Relay output:
operations
Available from Little Fuse or Bussmann (part no. GDC-2A).

For the setting ranges for each sensor input, refer to page A-9.
Always connect an AC load to a Triac output. The output will not turn OFF if a DC load is connected.
A-1
A-2
Table A.A (Continued)

Technical/Control (Continued)
Control Output
(Continued)
Voltage Output
900-TC16
Output voltage 12V DC 15% (PNP), max. load current 21 mA, with
over-current protection circuit
900-TC8
Series B: Output voltage 12V DC +15%/20% (PNP), max. load

current 40 mA, with over-current protection circuit
Series B: Voltage Control Output 2: 12V DC +15%/20% (PNP),
max. load current 21 mA, with over-current protection circuit
900-TC32
Analog Current
Output
Auxiliary Output
Event Input
Supported by
900-TC8 & 900-TC16
Output voltage 12V DC 15% (PNP), max. load current 21 mA,

withover-current protection circuit
420 mA DC, 020 mA DC, Load: 600 max., Resolution: approx. 10,000
(900-TC16 and 900-TC8)
900-TC16
SPST-NO, 250V AC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 100,000 operations

900-TC8
SPST-NO, 250V AC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 100,000 operations

900-TC32
SPST-NO, 250V AC, 2 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 100,000 operations Min. applicable load:
5V, 10 mA
Contact
ON: 1 k max.; OFF: 100 k min.
Noncontact
ON: residual voltage 1.5V max.; OFF: leakage current 0.1 mA max.
Control Method
2-PID or ON/OFF control
Configuration Method
Digital setting using front panel keys, or 900 BuilderLite software
Hysteresis
Controllers with
Thermometer (Global)
Temperature
0.1999.9C or F)
(in units of 0.1C or F)
Controllers with Analog Inputs 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS)
Proportional Band (P)
Controllers with
Thermometer (Global)
Temperature
0.1999.9C or F)
(in units of 0.1 EU)
Controllers with Analog Inputs 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS)
0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS)
Integral Time (I)
03,999 s (in units of 1 s)
Derivative Time (D)
03,999 s (in units of 1 s)

When RT is ON: 0.0999.9 (in units of 0.1 s)
Control Period
0.5, 199 s (in units of 1 s)
Manual Reset Value
0.0%100.0% (in units of 0.1%)
Alarm Setting Range
1,9999,999 (decimal point position depends on Input Type)
Sampling Period
250 ms
Controller sources power to inputs: 5V DC @ 7 mA
Set NONE as the unit for controllers with 050 Millivolt Inputs.
A-3

Technical/Control (Continued)
Indication Accuracy
(ambient temperature of 23C)
Thermocouple :
(0.3% of indication value or 1 C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
(0.2% of indication value or 0.8 C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Analog input: 0.2% FS 1 digit max.
CT input: 5% FS 1 digit max.
Temperature Variation
Influence
Thermocouple (R, S, B, W, PL II)

(1% of PV or 10C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Other thermocouples:
(1% of PV or 4C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Voltage Variation Influence
*K thermocouple at 100C max: 10C max.

(1% of PV or 2 C, whichever is greater) 1 digit max.
Analog input: 1% FS 1 digit max.
General/Environmental
Insulation Rresistance
20 M min. (by 500V DC megger)
Dielectric Strength
2300V AC 50 or 60 Hz 1 min. (between terminals of different function)
Vibration
Operating 1055 Hz, 20 m/s2 (2 G) for 10 min. each in X, Y, and Z directions

Nonoperating
Shock
Protective Structure
1055 Hz,20 m/s2 for 2 hrs. each in X, Y, and Z directions
Operating 100 m/s2 (10 G) max., 3 times in each X, Y, Z axes directions.

Nonoperating
300 m/s2 (30 G) max., 3 times in each 3 axes, 6 directions.
Front
panel
IP66
Rear case IP20, terminals: IP00 (VDE 0106)

Memory Protection
EEPROM (non-volatile memory) (number of writes: 100,000)
Approximate Weight
in grams
(includes carton)
Total Unit
Adapter
Terminal Cover
900-TC8
260
100
1.6 per cover
900-TC16
150
10
10
900-TC32
90
10
Ambient Temperature
10+55 C (with no condensation or icing)

The indication of K thermocouples in the 2001,300C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of
100C or less, and U and L thermocouples at any temperature is 2C 1 digit maximum. The indication of B
thermocouples at a temperature of 400C or less is not specified.
The indication of R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200C or less is 3C 1 digit maximum.
Ambient temperature: 10C23C55C
Voltage range: 15+10% of rated voltage
A-4

General/Environmental (Continued)
Ambient Humidity
Relative humidity 2585% (no condensation)
Storage Temperature
25+65C (with no condensation or icing)
Altitude
2,000 m or less
Installation Environment
Installation Category II, Pollution Class 2 (IEC 61010-1 compliant)
Recommended Fuse
T2A, 250V AC, time lag, low shut off capacity
EMC
EMI
EN 61326
Radiated Interference Electromagnetic EN 55011 Group 1, class A

Field Strength
Noise Terminal Voltage
EN 55011 Group 1, class A
EMS
EN 61326
ESD Immunity
EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic Field Immunity
EN 61000-4-3
Burst Noise Immunity
EN 61000-4-4
Conducted Disturbance Immunity
EN 61000-4-6
Surge Immunity
EN 61000-4-5
Power Frequency Magnetic Field

Immunity
EN 61000-4-8
Voltage Dip/Interrupting Immunity
EN 61000-4-11
Standards & Certifications
UL61010-1, CSA22.2 No. 1010.1; ULus

IP66. Conforms to EN61326, EN61010-1
A-5
Heater Burnout Alarm (HBA), Heater Short Alarm (HSA), and

Heater Overcurrent Alarm
)
Table A.B
Max. Heater Current
50 Amps AC
Input Current Readout

Accuracy
5% FS 1 digit max.
HBA Setting Range
0.149.9 Amps (0.1 Amp units)

0.0 Amps:
Heater Burnout Alarm output turns OFF.
50.0 Amps:
Heater Burnout Alarm output turns ON.
Min. detection ON time: 100 ms
HSA Setting Range

0.0 Amps:
HS alarm output turns ON.
50.0 Amps:
HS alarm output turns OFF.
Min. detection OFF time: 100 ms
Heater Overcurrent
Alarm Setting Range

0.0 Amps: Heater overcurrent Alarm turns ON.
50.0 Amps: Heater overcurrent Alarm turns OFF.
Min. detection OFF time: 100 ms
When the Control Output 1 ON time is less than 100 ms, heater fault detection and heater current
measurement are not performed.
When the Control Output 1 OFF time is less than 100 ms, HS alarm and leakage current measurement are not
performed.
900-CPOEM1 USB-Serial Conversion Cable

Specifications
Table A.C
Item
Specifications
Applicable OS
Windows 2000/XP/Vista/to be compatible with Windows 7
Applicable Software
900 BuilderLite
Applicable Models
900-TC8, 900-TC16, & 900-TC32 Controllers (refer to Tables

1.B and 1.D)
USB Interface Rating
Conforms to USB Specification 1.1
DTE Speed
38,400 bps
Connector Specifications
Computer end: USB (type A plug)

Temperature Controller end: Serial
Power Supply
Bus power (5V DC supplied from USB host controller)
Current Consumption
70 mA
Ambient Operating
Temperature
055C (with no condensation or icing)
A-6
Table A.C
Item
Specifications
Ambient Operating
Humidity
10%80%
Storage Temperature
2060C (with no condensation or icing)
Storage Humidity
10%80%
Altitude
2,000 m max.
Weight
Approx. 100 g
Compatible Operating Environment

A personal computer that includes the following specifications is required.
USB port
Windows 2000/XP/Vista and to be compatible with Windows 7
Appearance and Nomenclature

Figure A.1 Appearance
(2,100 mm)
LED (SD)
250 mm
USB connector (type A plug)
1,765 mm
LED (RD)
Serial connector
Table A.D LED Indicator Display

Indicator
Color
Status
Meaning
SD
Yellow
Lit
Sending data from USB-Serial Conversion

Cable
Not lit
Not sending data from USB-Serial

Conversion Cable
Lit
Sending data from USB-Serial Conversion

Cable
Not lit
Not sending data from USB-Serial

Conversion Cable
RD
Yellow
A-7
Specifications
Table A.E
Item
Specifications
Model
900-CT1
900-CT2
Max. Continuous Current
50 A
120 A
Dielectric Strength
1000V AC (1 minute)
Vibration
50 Hz 98 m/S2
Approximate Weight
11.5 g
50 g
The maximum continuous CT detection/display current of the Bulletin 900 controller is 50 A.
Approximate External Dimensions

Dimensions are in millimeters. Dimensions are not intended to be used for
manufacturing purposes.
Note: To convert millimeters to inches, multiply by 0.0394.
Figure A.2 Cat. No. 900-CT1
21
2.8
10.5
25
5.
7.5
15
2-
3.8
5
40
10
Current Transformer (CT)
30
A-8
Figure A.3 Cat. No. 900-CT2

2.36
15
2-
de
pt
40
12
30
30
A-9
Sensor Input Setting

and Indication Ranges
Table A.F List of Global Temperature (GT) Input Types
Input Type
Resistance
Thermometer
Set
Specifications Value
Input Setting Range
Input Indication Range
Pt100
200850 (C)/3001,500 (F)
-220870 (C)/-3401540 (F)
199.9500.0 (C)/199.9900.0 (F)
-199.9520 (C)/-199.9940 (F)
0.0100.0 (C)/0.0210.0 (F)
-20.0120 (C)/-40250 (F)
199.9500.0 (C)/199.9900.0 (F)
-199.9520 (C)/-199.9940 (F)
0.0100.0 (C)/0.0210.0 (F)
-20.0120 (C)/-40250 (F)
2001,300 (C)/3002,300 (F)
-2201320 (C)/-3402340 (F)
20.0500.0 (C)/0.0900.0 (F)
-40520 (C)/-40940 (F)
100850 (C)/1001,500 (F)
-120870 (C)/-1401540 (F)
20.0400.0 (C)/0.0750.0 (F)
-40420 (C)/-40790 (F)
200400 (C)/300700 (F)
-220420 (C)/-340740 (F)
10
199.9400.0 (C)/199.9700.0 (F)
-199.9420 (C)/-199.9740 (F)
11
0600 (C)/01,100 (F)
-220620 (C)/-3401140 (F)
12
100850 (C)/1001,500 (F)
-120870 (C)/-1401540 (F)
13
200400 (C)/300700 (F)
-220420 (C)/-340740 (F)
14
199.9400.0 (C)/199.9700.0 (F)
-199.9...420 (C)/-199.9740 (F)
15
2001,300 (C)/3002,300 (F)
-2201320 (C)/-3402340 (F)
16
01,700 (C)/03,000 (F)
-201720 (C)/-403040 (F)
17
01,700 (C)/03,000 (F)
-201720 (C)/-403040 (F)
18
1001,800 (C)/3003,200 (F)
01820 (C)/03240 (F)
1070C
19
090 (C)/0190 (F)
-20130 (C)/-40270 (F)
60120C
20
0120 (C)/0240 (F)
-20160 (C)/-40320 (F)
115165C
21
0165 (C)/0320 (F)
-20205 (C)/-40400 (F)
140260C
22
0260 (C)/0500 (F)
-20300 (C)/-40580 (F)
050 mV
23
Either of the following ranges, by scaling: 5%... 105% of setting range. The
display shows - 1999 to 9999
1,9999,999
(numeric range with decimal point
199.9999.9
omitted).
24
02300 (C)/03200 (F)
-202320 (C)/-403240 (F)
PL-II
25
01300 (C)/02300 (F)
-201320 (C)/-402340 (F)
4...20 mA
Any of the following ranges, by scaling:
0...20 mA
-5%...105% of setting range. The

display shows -1999...9999 (numeric
range with decimal point omitted).
1...5 V
0...5 V
0...10 V
JPt100
Controller Type with

Thermocouple and Resistance Thermometer Multi-inputs
Thermocouple K
J
T
Infrared
(non-contact)
temperature
sensor
Millivolt input
Controllers with
Analog Inputs
Thermocouple W
Current Input
Voltage Input
-1,999...9,999
-199.9...999.9
-19.99...99.99
-1.999...9.999
A-10
The default is 5 (C/F) for Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance

Thermometer Universal Inputs and 0 for Controllers with Analog
Inputs.
The applicable standards for each of the above input ranges are as
follows:
K, J, T, E, N, R, S, B: JIS C1602-1995, IEC 584-1
L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985
U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710-1985
W: W5Re/W26Re, ASTM E988-1990
JPt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989
Pt100: JIS C 1604-1997, IEC 751
PLII: According to Platinel II Electromotive Force Table by
Engelhard Corp.
Control Range
Resistance thermometer and thermocouple input Temperature lower
limit -20 C to temperature upper limit +20 C, or temperature lower
limit -40 C to temperature upper limit +40 C
Infrared input: same as input indication range
Analog input: -5% to +105% of scaling range
Appendix
Parameter Operations List
Function Groups
Global Temperature input:Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance
Thermometer (RTD) and Millivolt (050) Inputs
Analog input:Controllers with Analog (e.g., 420 mA, 15V DC, etc.) Inputs
Table B.A Operation Function Group

Parameters
Characters
Setting (Monitor) Value
Display Default Unit

EU
Process Value
Temperature: According to indication

range for each sensor. Analog:
Scaling lower limit
-5% FS to Scaling upper limit+5% FS
Set Point
EU
None
Auto/Manual Switch
a-m
Multi-SP Set Point Setting
m-sp
03
sp-m
EU
ct1
0.055.0
ct2
0.055.0
lcr1
0.055.0
lcr2
0.055.0
Program Start
prst
RSET, STRT
Soak Time Remain
sktr
09999
RUN/STOP
r-s
RUN/STOP
Alarm Value 1
al-1
Alarm Value Upper-Limit 1
rset
strt
RSET
None
min or h
run
stop
RUN
None
19999999
EU
al1h
19999999
EU
Alarm Value Lower-Limit 1
al1l
19999999
EU
Alarm Value 2
al-2
19999999
EU
al2h
19999999
EU
al2l
19999999
EU
Alarm Value 3
al-3
19999999
EU
al3h
19999999
EU
al3l
19999999
EU
MV Monitor (heating)
5.0105.5 (standard)
0.0105.0 (heating/cooling)
MV Monitor (cooling)
c-o
0.0105.0
B-1
Set
Value
B-2
Table B.B Adjustment Function Group

Parameters
Characters
Display
Default
Unit
Adjustment Level Display
l.adj
AT Execute/Cancel
at
OFF, AT Cancel AT-2: 100%

AT Execute AT-1: 40% AT
Execute
off
at-2
at-1
OFF
None
cmwt
OFF, ON
off on
OFF
None
ct1
0.055.0
Heater Overcurrent Detection 1
oc1
0.050.0
ct2
0.055.0
Heater Overcurrent Detection 2
oc2
0.050.0
lcr1
0.055.0
HS Alarm 1
hs1
0.050.0
lcr2
0.055.0
HS Alarm 2
hs2
0.050.0
50.0
Heater Burnout Detection 1
hb1
0.050.0
0.0
Heater Burnout Detection 2
hb2
0.050.0
0.0
SP 0
sp-0
SP Lower-Limit to SP
Upper-Limit
EU
SP 1
sp-1
Upper-Limit
EU
SP 2
sp-2
Upper-Limit
EU
SP 3
sp-3
Upper-Limit
EU
Temperature Input Shift
ins
199.9999.9
0.0
C or F
Upper-Limit Temperature Input

Shift Value
insh
199.9999.9
0.0
C or F
Lower-Limit Temperature Input

Shift Value
insl
199.9999.9
0.0
C or F
Proportional Band
Universal input:
0.1999.9
8.0
C or F
Analog input: 0.1999.9
10.0
%FS
A
50.0
A
A
50.0
A
A
50.0
A
A
Integral Time
03,999
233
Second
Derivative Time
RT OFF: 03,999
40
Second
RT ON: 0.0999.9
40.0
Second
0.0199.99
1.00
None
Cooling Coefficient
c-sc
Set Value
B-3
Table B.B Adjustment Function Group

Parameters
Characters Setting (Monitor) Value
Dead Band
c-db
Manual Reset Value of-r

Hysteresis (heating)
Hysteresis (cooling)
hys
chys
Display
Default
Unit
Universal input: 199.9999.9
0.0
C or F
0.00
%FS
0.0100.0
50.0
1.0
C or F
0.10
%FS
1.0
C or F
0.10
%FS
min or h
Soak Time
soak
19,999
Wait Band
wt-b
Universal input: OFF, 0.1999.9
off
0.1 to
999.9
OFF
C or F
Analog input: OFF, 0.0199.99
off
0.01 to
99.99
OFF
%FS
MV at Stop
mv-s
5.0105.0 (standard)
0.0
MV at PV Error
mv-e
5.0105.0 (standard)
0.0
SP Ramp Set Value
sprt
OFF or 19,999
MV Upper-Limit
ol-h
MV Lower-Limit +0.1 /105.0 (standard)

105.0
MV Lower-Limit
ol-l
5.0 to MV Upper-Limit 0.1 (standard)

5.0 (standard)
105.0 (heating/
cooling)
MV Change Rate
Limit
orl
0.0...100.0 (0.0: MV Change Rate Limit

Disabled)
0.0
%/s
Extraction of Square
Root Low-cut Point
sqrp
0.0...100.0
0.0
off
OFF
1 to 9999
Set
Value
EU/s,
EU/min
Set NONE as the unit for controllers with 050 Millivolt Inputs.
B-4
Table B.C Initial Setting Function Group

Parameters
Characters
Input Type
in-t
Global
Temperature
(GT) Input
Display
0:Pt100
1:Pt100
2:Pt100
3:JPt100
4:JPt100
Default
Unit
None
None
5: K
6: K
7: J
8: J
9: T
10: T
11: E
12: L
13: U
14: U
15: N
16: R
17: S
18: B
19:1070 C
20:60120 C
21:115165 C
22:140...260 C
23:050 mV
24: W
25: PLII
Analog Input
0: 420 mA
1: 020 mA
2: 1 V
3: 0 V
4: 010V
Scaling Upper-Limit
in-h
Scaling Lower-Limit +19,999
100
None
Scaling Lower-Limit
in-l
1,999 to scaling Upper-Limit 1
None
Decimal Point
dp
Universal input: 01
None
Analog input: 03
None
None
EU
Temperature Unit
d-u
C, F
SP Upper-Limit
sl-h
SP Lower-Limit + 1 / input range

Lower-Limit (temperature)
1300
SP Lower-Limit + 1 / scaling
Upper-Limit (analog)
100
c f
Set Value
B-5

Parameters
Characters
SP Lower-Limit
sl-l
Display
Default
Unit
Input range Lower-Limit to SP

Upper-Limit 1 (temperature)
200
EU
Scaling Lower-Limit to SP Upper-Limit

1 (analog)
PID ON/OFF
intl
ON/OFF 2-PID
onof
pid
ON/OFF
None
Standard or
Heating/Cooling
s-hc
Standard or heating/cooling
send
h-c
Standard
None
ST
st
OFF, ON
off on
ON
None
Program Pattern
ptrn
OFF, STOP, CONT
off
stop
cont
OFF
None
Control Period
(Heating)
cp
0.5 or 199
0.5
1 to 99
20
Second
0.5 or 199
0.5
1 to 99
20
Second
Reverse operation, direct operation
or-r
or-d
Reverse
operation
None
Control Period (Cooling) c-cp

Direct/Reverse
Operation
orev
Set Value
B-6

Parameters
Characters
Alarm 1 Type
alt1
0:Alarm function OFF
Display
Default
Unit
None
0.2
C or F
0.02
%FS
1:Upper- and Lower-Limit alarm

2:Upper-limit alarm
3:Lower-limit alarm
4:Upper- and Lower-Limit range alarm
5:Upper- and Lower-Limit alarm with
standby sequence
6:Upper-limit alarm with standby
sequence
7:Lower-limit alarm with standby
sequence
8:Absolute-value Upper-Limit alarm
9:Absolute-value Lower-Limit alarm
10:Absolute-value Upper-Limit alarm
11:Absolute-value Lower-Limit alarm
12:LBA (Loop Burnout Alarm)
13: PV change rate alarm
Alarm 1 Hysteresis
alh1
Set Value
B-7

Parameters
Characters
Alarm 2 Type
alt2
Same settings as the alarm 1 type.
Display
Default
Unit
None
0.2
C or F
0.02
%FS
Set Value
NOTE: The 12: LBA (Loop Burnout

Alarm) setting cannot be used.
Alarm 2 Hysteresis
alh2
Alarm 3 Type
alt3
Same settings as the alarm 2 type
None
Alarm 3 Hysteresis
alh3
0.2
C or F
0.02
%FS
OFF
None
off
sp
sp-m
pv
mv
c-mv
Transfer output type
tr-t
OFF:OFF
SP:Set point
SP-M:Ramp set point
PV:Process value
MV:Manipulated variable (heating)
C-MV:Manipulated variable (cooling)
Transfer Output
Upper-Limit
tr-h
Transfer Output
Lower-Limit
tr-l
Linear Current Output
o1-t
4-20: 420 mA
0-20: 020 mA
4-20
None
Number of Multi-SP
Uses
ev-m
02
None
Event Input
Assignment 1
ev-1
NONE: None
STOP: RUN/STOP
MANU: Auto/manual switch
PRST: Program start
DRS: Invert Direct/Reverse Operation
AT-2: 100% AT Execute/Cancel
WTPT: Setting Change Enable/Disable
LAT: Alarm Latch Cancel
none
stop
manu
prst
drs
at-2
at-1
wtpt
lat
NONE
None
Event Input
Assignment 2
ev-2
NONE: None
STOP: RUN/STOP
MANU: Auto/manual switch
PRST: Program start
DRS: Invert Direct/Reverse Operation
WTPT: Setting Change Enable/Disable
none
stop
manu
prst
drs
at-2
at-1
wtpt
lat
STOP
None
4-20
0-20
B-8

Parameters
Characters
Display
Default
Unit
Extraction of Square
Root Enable
sqr
OFF, ON
off
on
OFF
None
Move to Advanced
amov
19999,999
None
Set Value
Set None as the unit for analog inputs

Initial Setting function group
PRST (Program Start) can be configured even when the Program Pattern parameter is configured to OFF, but the function will be disabled.
Table B.D
Setting (Monitor) Range
Default (Transfer Output

Upper/Lower-Limits)
Unit
Set Point
SP Upper-Limit/Lower-Limit
EU
SP Upper-Limit/Lower-Limit
EU
PV
Temperature: Sensor setting range Lower-Limit

to sensor setting range Upper-Limit
Input setting range upper/Lower-Limit
EU
Analog: Scaling Lower-Limit to scaling

Upper-Limit
Scaling upper/Lower-Limit
EU
MV Monitor (Heating)
Standard: 5.0105.0
Heating/cooling: 0.0105.0
100.0/0.0
MV Monitor (Cooling)
0.0105.0
100.0/0.0
Initialized when the transfer output type is changed.

Initialized if the Input Type, temperature unit, scaling upper/Lower-Limit, or SP upper/Lower-Limit is changed
when the transfer output type is SP, ramp SP, or PV.
(When initialized by the initializing settings, it is initialized to 100.0/0.0.)
Table B.E Manual Control Function Group

Parameters
Characters
Manual MV

5.0105.0 (standard)
Display
Default
Unit
0.0
Set Value
When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is configured to ON, the setting range will be the MV lower limit
to the MV upper limit
B-9
Monitor Setting Item Function Group

The contents displayed vary depending on the Monitor/Setting Value 1 to 5
Table B.F Advanced Setting Function Group
Parameters
Characters
Parameter Initialization init
Display
Default
Unit
OFF, FACT
off
fact
OFF
None
off on
OFF
None
s m
None
Multi-SP Use
mspu
OFF, ON
SP Ramp Time Unit
spru
S:
M:
Standby Sequence
Reset
rest
Condition A, condition B
a b
Condition A
None
HB ON/OFF
hbu
OFF, ON
off on
ON
None
Auxiliary Output 1
Open in Alarm
al1n
N-O:
N-C:
Open in alarm
Close in alarm
n-o
n-c
N-O
None
Auxiliary Output 2
Open in Alarm
al2n
N-O:
N-C:
Open in alarm
Close in alarm
n-o
n-c
N-O
None
Auxiliary Output 3
Open in Alarm
al3n
N-O:
N-C:
Open in alarm
Close in alarm
n-o
n-c
N-O
None
Heater Burnout Latch
hbl
OFF, ON
off on
OFF
None
Heater Burnout
Hysteresis
hbh
0.150.0
0.1
ST Stable Range
st-b
0.1999.9
15.0
C or F
alfa
0.001.00
0.65
None
AT Calculated Gain
at-g
0.1...10.0
0.8
None
AT Hysteresis
at-h
Universal input: 0.1...999.9
0.8
C or F
Analog input: 0.01...999.9
0.20
%FS
EU/second
EU/minute
Limit Cycle MV
Amplitude
lcma
5.0...50.0
20.0
inf
0.0999.9
0.0
Second
Additional PV Display
pvad
OFF, ON
off on
OFF
None
MV Display
o-dp
OFF, ON
off on
OFF
None
Automatic Display
Return Time
ret
OFF or 199
off
1 to 99
OFF
Second
Alarm 1 Latch
a1lt
OFF, ON
off on
OFF
None
Alarm 2 Latch
a2lt
OFF, ON
off on
OFF
None
Alarm 3 Latch
a3lt
OFF, ON
off on
OFF
None
Move to Protect
function group Time
prlt
130
Second
Input Error Output
sero
OFF, ON
OFF
None
off on
Set Value
B-10

Parameters
Characters
Display
Default
Unit
Cold Junction
Compensation Method
cjc
OFF, ON
off on
ON
None
MB Command Logic
Switching
rlrv
OFF, ON
off on
OFF
None
PV Color Change
colr
Orange, Red, Green
org
RED
None
Red to Green: When ALM1 is lit
red
grn
r-g
Green to Red: When ALM1 is lit
g-r
Red to Green to Red

Within PV stable band: Green
Outside stable band: Red
r-g.r
Green to Orange to Red

Outside stable band: Green, Red
g-o.r
Orange to Green to Red

Outside stable band: Green, Red
o-g.r
5.0
C or F
5.00
%FS
PV Stable Band
pv-b
Alarm 1 ON Delay
a1on
0999 (0: ON Delay disabled)
Second
Alarm 2 ON Delay
a2on
Second
Alarm 3 ON Delay
a3on
Second
Alarm 1 OFF Delay
a1of
0999 (0: OFF Delay disabled)
Second
Alarm 2 OFF Delay
a2of
Second
Alarm 3 OFF Delay
a3of
Second
Input Shift Type
istp
INS1:
Temperature input
1-point shift
ins1
INS1
None
INS2:
Temperature input
2-point shift
ins2
MV at Stop and Error

Addition
mvst
OFF, ON
off on
OFF
None
Auto/Manual Select
Addition
amad
OFF, ON
off on
OFF
None
RT
rt
OFF, ON
off on
OFF
None
HS Alarm Use
hsu
OFF, ON
off on
ON
None
HS Alarm Latch
hsl
OFF, ON
off on
OFF
None
HS Alarm Hysteresis
hsh
0.150.0
0.1
Set Value
B-11

Parameters
Characters
LBA Detection Time
lba
LBA Level
lbal
LBA Band
Control Output 1
Assignment
lbab
out1
Default
Unit
09999
(0: LBA function disabled)
Second
8.0
C or F
10.00
%FS
3.0
C or F
0.20
%FS
When Control Output 1 is a

voltage (SSR) output:
NONE: No assignment
O:
C-O:
ALM1: Alarm 1
ALM2: Alarm 2
ALM3: Alarm 3
P.END: Program end output
RALM: Control output ON/OFF
count alarm
None
NONE
None
When Control Output 1 is a linear

analog output:
NONE: No assignment
O:
C-O:
Display
none
o
c-o
alm1
alm2
alm3
p.end
ralm
none
o
c-o
none
o
c-o
alm1
alm2
alm3
p.end
ralm
Control Output 2
Assignment
out2
NONE: No assignment
O:
C-O:
ALM1: Alarm 1
ALM2: Alarm 2
ALM3: Alarm 3
P.END: Program end output
RALM: Control output ON/OFF
count alarm
Auxiliary Output 1
Assignment
sub1
Same as Control Output 1 (except

fixed as a relay output)
ALM1
None
Auxiliary Output 2
Assignment
sub2
Same as Control Output 1
ALM2
None
Auxiliary Output 3
Assignment (900-TC8)
sub3
Same as Control Output 1
ALM3
None
Character Select
csel
OFF, ON
off on
ON
None
Soak Time Unit
t-u
M: Minutes; H: Hours
m h
None
Alarm SP Selection
alsp
SP-M:
SP:
sp-m
sp
SP-M
None
Manual MV Limit
manl
OFF, ON
off on
ON
None
Ramp set point

Set point
Set Value
B-12

Parameters
Characters
PV Rate of Change
Calculation Period
pvrp
1...999
Automatic Cooling
csca
OFF, ON
Heater Overcurrent Use 0cu

Heater Overcurrent
Latch
Default
Unit
Sampling
period
off on
OFF
None
OFF, ON
off on
ON
None
ocl
OFF, ON
off on
OFF
None
Heater Overcurrent
Hysteresis
och
0.1...50.0
0.1
PF Setting
pf
OFF: OFF
RUN: RUN
STOP: STOP
R-S: RUN/STOP
AT-2: 100% AT execute/cancel
AT-1: 40% AT execute/cancel
A-ML Auto/manual
PFDP: Monitor/Setting Item
A-M
None
pfd1
0: Disabled
1: PV/SP/Multi-SP
2: PV/SP/MV
3: PV/SP/Soak time remain
4: Proportional band (P)
5: Integral time (I)
6: Derivative time (D)
7: Alarm value 1
8: Alarm value upper limit 1
9: Alarm value lower limit 1
10: Alarm value 2
13: Alarm value 3
None
pfd2
0...15, same as Monitor Setting

Item 1
None
pfd3

Item 1
None
pfd4

Item 1
None
pfd5

Item 1
None
Display
off
run
stop
r-s
at-2
at-1
lat
a-m
pfdp
Set Value
B-13

Parameters
Characters
PV/Display Screen
Selection
spdp
MV Display Selection
odsl
PV Decimal Point
Display
pvdp
PV Status Display
Function
pvst
SV Status Display
Function
svst
Display Refresh Period
d.ref
Control Output 1
ON/OFF Count Monitor
Display
0: PV/SP
1: PV/SP/Multi-SP, PV/SP/MV
2: PV/SP/MV, PV/SP/Multi-SP
3: PV/SP/Multi-SP
4: PV/SP/MV
5: PV/SP/Multi-SP, PV/SP/
Soak Time Remain
6: PV/SP/MV, PV/SP/Soak
Time Remain
7: PV/SP/Soak Time Remain
Default
Unit
None
O: MV (Heating)
C-O: MV (Cooling)
o
c-o
None
OFF, ON
off on
ON
None
OFF: OFF
MANU: Manual
STOP: Stop
ALM1: Alarm 1
ALM2: Alarm 2
ALM3: Alarm 3
ALM: Alarm 1 to 3 OR status
HA: Heater alarm
off
manu
stop
alm1
alm2
alm3
alm
ha
OFF
None
OFF: OFF
MANU: Manual
STOP: Stop
ALM1: Alarm 1
ALM2: Alarm 2
ALM3: Alarm 3
ALM: Alarm 1 to 3 OR status
HA: Heater alarm
off
manu
stop
alm1
alm2
alm3
alm
ha
OFF
None
OFF, 0.25, 0.5, 1.0
.25
Second
ra1m
0....9999
100 times
Control Output 2
ON/OFF Count Monitor
ra2m
0....9999
100 times
Control Output 1 ON/

OFF Count Alarm Set
Value
ra1
0....9999
100 times
Set Value
B-14

Parameters
Characters
Control Output 2 ON/

OFF Count Alarm Set
Value
ra2
ON/OFF Counter Reset
rac
Move to Calibration
function group
cmov
Display
Default
Unit
0....9999
100 times
0: Disable the counter reset

function.
1: Reset the control output 1
ON/OFF counter.
2: Reset the control output 2
ON/OFF counter.
None
19999,999
None
Set Value
Set None as the unit for analog inputs (23: 0 to 50 mV).

The setting range depends on whether control output 1 is a current output or voltage output (for driving SSR).
P.END (program end output) can be configured even when the program pattern is configured to OFF, but the
Turns ON when either the control output 1 or 2 ON/OFF count alarm is ON.
Table B.G Protect Function Group

Parameters
Characters
Default
Unit
19999,999
None
oapt
03
None
icpt
Initial
Setting/Communications
Protect
02
None
Move to Protect function pmov

group
Operation/Adjustment
Protect
Display
Setting Change Protect
wtpt
OFF, ON
off on
OFF
None
PF Key Protect
pfpt
OFF, ON
off on
OFF
None
Parameter Mask Enable
pmsk
OFF, ON
off on
ON
None
Password to Move to
Protect function group
prlp
19999,999
None
Set value
Table B.H Communications Function Group

Parameters
Characters
Setting (monitor) value
Display
Default
Unit
Protocol Setting
psel
900-TC, Modbus
cwf
mod
900-TC
None
Communications Unit
No.
u-no
099
None
Communications Baud
Rate
bps
1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, or

57.6
9.6
kbps
Communications Data
Length
len
7, 8
Bit
1.2 2.4
4.8 9.6
19.2 38.4
57.6
Set value
B-15
Table B.H Communications Function Group

Parameters
Characters
Setting (monitor) value
Communications Stop
Bits
sbit
1, 2
prty
None, Even, Odd
Send Data Wait Time
sdwt
099
Display
none
even
odd
Default
Unit
Bit
Even
None
20
ms
Set value
B-16
Setup Function Group

Diagrams
This diagram shows all of the function groups. To move to the advanced
setting function group and calibration function group, you must enter
passwords. Some parameters are not displayed depending on the protect
function group configuration and the conditions of use.
Figure B.1 All Function Groups
Power ON
Start in Manual Mode
Start in Automatic Mode

Press the O Key or the
PF Key for at least 1 second.
Operation
Function Group
Press the
a-m
1
Manual
Mode
Adjustment
Function Group
O Key for less than 1 second.

least 3 seconds while a-m
is displayed. ( a-m will
flash after 1st second.)
PF Key
5
Monitor/Setting
Function Group
Manual Control
Function Group
Press the PF Key

Press the
O Key for at
least 1 second.
Control Stops
Press the
least 1 second.
25
100

least 3 seconds.
(Display will flash after 1st second.)
Protect
Function Group
100
Initial Setting
Function Group
O Key for at
25
Protect the
O + M Keys
for at least
c
3 seconds.
(Display will
flash after 1st
second.)
Protect the
O + M Keys
for at least
1 second.
Communications
Setting
Function Group
Press the
O Key for less than 1 second.
Note: The time taken to move

to the Protect level can
be adjusted by changing
the Move to protect level
time setting.
Input the password

while amoV is displayed.
(Set Value - 169)
Advanced Setting
Function Group
Control in Progress
Input Password
Control Stopped
Calibration
Function Group
Not Displayed for Some Models

Function Group Change
You can return to the operation level by executing a software reset. When the PF Setting parameter is
crossovered to A-M for a Controller with a PF Key (900-TC8)
It is not possible to move to other levels from the calibration level by operating the keys on the front
panel. It can be done only by first turning OFF the power. When the PF Setting parameter is configured to PFDP
for a Controller with a PF Key (900-TC8).
From the manual control level, key operations can be used to move to the operation level only.
When the PF Setting parameter is confingured to A-M for a Controller with a PF Key (900-TC8 only).
When the PF Setting parameter is configured to PFDP for a Controller with a PF Key (900-TC8 only) From the
manual control function group, key operations can be used to move to the operation function group only.
B-17
This section describes the parameters configured in each level. Pressing the M
Key at the last parameter in each level returns to the top parameter in that
level.
Parameter Flow
PF Key
Power ON
Starting in manual mode.
Manual Function Group

Press the PF Key
for at least 1 s.
(See note 1.)
Adjustment
Press the O
Key or the PF
PID
25 Control Key for at least
only
1 s.

PV/MV
PF Key (See note 2.)

Other than the Auto/Manual Switch display
Starting in
automatic
mode.
Initial Setting Function Group

Press the
O Key for
at least 1 s.
Press the O Key less than 1 s.
in-t Input Type

5
M
in-h
Function Group
0.0 Input Shift Value parameters.
2-point shift
M
Limit
insl Lower
Temperature
0.0 Input Shift Value
off
0.0
8.0
M
Burnout
hb1 Heater
Detection 1
M
i
M
d
M
Overcurrent
oc1 Heater
Detection 1
50.0
0.0
M
oc2
50.0
M
lcr1
0.0
0.0
M
hs1
0.0
Leakage Current 1
Monitor
Manual Reset Value

Clear the offset during
50.0 stabilization of P or PD
control.
HS Alarm 1
M
hys Hysteresis (Heating)
1.0
Leakage Current 2
Monitor
HS Alarm 2
M
wt-b
M
sp-0
M
mv-s
SP 0
SP 2
M
sp-3 SP 3
105.0
M
ol-l
MV Upper Limit
rset
M
sktr Soak Time Remain
M
MV Lower Limit
orl MV Change Rate Limit

0.0
M
sqrp
0.0
Extraction of Square Root

Low-cut Point
M
Value
al3h Alarm
Upper Limit 3
M
Value
al3l Alarm
Lower Limit 3
displaying and modioapt Restricts

fying menus in operation, ad-
0 justment, and manual control

function groups.
M Initial Setting/
Protect:
icpt Communications
This restricts movement
1 to the initial setting, communications,
off operating the front panel keys.
M
st ST (Self-tuning)
on
M
ptrn
M
20
M
c-cp
M
orev Direct/Reverse Operation
or-r
M
alt1
Press the O Key

less than 1 s.
Communications
Alarm 1 Type
2
C
M
alh1
0.2
Alarm 1
Hysteresis
Setting:
psel Protocol
Switches between
cwf 900-TC and

Modbus.
M
u-no Communications Unit No.
1
M
Communications
bps Baud Rate
9.6
900-TC only
M
len Communications
Data Length
7
M
prty Communications Parity
Set the ON/OFF

output cycle.
Control Period (Cooling)
20
M
Mask Enable:
pmsk Parameter
Displayed only when a parameon ter mask is set.
control output to ON/OFF

output
cp Control Period (Heating)
M
sbit Communications
Stop Bits
M
Password to Move to Protect
prlp Function
Group: Password setting
For input type of

temperature, standard control, or PID
Program Pattern
off When assigning PID or
M
Key Protect
pfpt PF
Restricts PF key operation
off (900-TC8 and 900-TC16 only)
Standard or
Heating/Cooling
stnd
The time taken to move to the protect function Displayed only for models with communications.
can be adjusted by changing the "Move to
Changes are effective after cycling power or after
protect function group time" setting.
a software reset.
function group.
Limit the set point

SP Lower Limit
onof
M
s-hc
M
o MV Monitor (Heating)
Press the O and M Keys for at least 1 s.
Move to Protect Function Group:

Displayed only when a password
SP Upper Limit
M
cntl PID ON/OFF
M
c-o MV Monitor (Cooling)
M
sl-l
-200
M
Press the O and M Keys for
at least 3 s.
Temperature Unit
C, F
For input type of
temperature
1300
0.0
M
sl-h
0.0
and advanced setting function groups.
M
Change Protect:
wtpt Setting
Protects changes to setups by
-5.0
M
al-3 Alarm Value 3
M
prst Program Start
Operation/Adjustment Protect:
off
M
Alarm Value
al2l Lower Limit 2
0
C
0 is set. Restricts moving to protect
M
sprt SP Ramp Set Value
M
ol-h
0.0
pmov
MV at PV Error
Alarm Value
Upper Limit 2
Decimal Point
0 For input type of analog
M
d-u
M
Current 2
lcr2 Leakage
Monitor
0.0
SP used by
multi-SP
0
C
M
mv-e
SP 1
M
sp-2
MV at Stop
0.0
M
sp-1
Wait Band
off
50.0
C
0.0
1.0
0.0
M
hs2
Heater Current 2 Value

Monitor
M
soak Soak Time
M
al2h
0
M
Current 1
lcr1 Leakage
Monitor
M Hysteresis settings
chys Hysteresis (Cooling)
0.0
M
of-r
Heater Overcurrent
Detection 2
50.0
M
lcr2
M
ct2
M
al-2 Alarm Value 2
0
0.0
Derivative Time
Heating/cooling
M
c-db Dead Band
M
Current 1 Value
ct1 Heater
Monitor
PID settings
M
Value
al1l Alarm
Lower Limit 1
M
dp
M
Point During
sp-m Set
SP Ramp
Integral Time
1.00
Heater Burnout
Detection 2
M
Value
al1h Alarm
Upper Limit 1
0
M
c-sc Cooling Coefficient
0.0
M
hb2
M
m-sp Multi-SP
Set Point Setting
40
Heater Current 2
Value Monitor
Added when auto/manual select addition is ON.
Press the
O Key
for at
least 3 s.
M
al-1 Alarm Value 1
0
M
Auto/Manual Switch
a-m PID
control only.
233
0.0
M
ct2
M
p Proportional Band
run
C
Set either of these parameters.
AT Execute/Cancel
r-s
1-point shift
M
Upper Limit
Set either
insh Temperature
of these
off
M
Current 1
ct1 Heater
Value Monitor
0.0
C
M
cmwt Communications
Writing
ins Temperature Input Shift
Process Value
Added when Additional
PV display is ON.
M
Value/
25 Process
Set Point
M
at
25
M
in-l Scaling Lower Limit
Adjustment Function
Group Display
Displayed only
l.adj once when entering
Adjustment
Function Group
Scaling Upper Limit
100
RUN/STOP
even
M
sdwt
Send Data Wait Time
20
When the PF Setting parameter is configured to A-M for a Controller with a PF Key (900-TC8 and 900TC-16).
When the PF Setting parameter is configured to PFDP for a Controller with a PF Key (900-TC8 and 900-TC16).
B-18
Monitor/Setting Item Level

25
Monitor/Setting
Item Display 1
PF
(900-TC8 and 900-TC16 only)

Monitor/Setting
Item Display 2
Monitor/Setting
Item Display 3
PF
Monitor/Setting
Item Display 4
PF
Monitor/Setting
Item Display 5
PF
Note: The monitor/setting items to be displayed is set in the Monitor/Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters (advanced setting function group).
alt2
Advanced Setting Function Group
Alarm 2 Type
0.2
M
alh3
0.2
M
mspu Multi-SP Uses
M
a2lt Alarm 2 Latch
M
spru
M
a3lt Alarm 3 Latch
SP Ramp Time Unit
M
Standby Sequence
rest Reset
M
to Protect
prlt Move
Function Group Time
M
sb1n
M
sero Input Error Output
off
M
tr-h
Linear output
M
sb2n
100.0
M
Output
tr-l Transfer
Lower Limit
M
sb3n
M
o1-t Linear Current Output
n-o
M
hbu
Linear output
M
of Multi-SP Uses
ev-m Number
Two SPs: 1
M
ev-1
none
M
ev-2
off
M
colr PV Change Color
HB ON/OFF
red
M
Burnout
hbh Heater
Hysteresis
0.1
C
0.65
tect is set to 0.
0.8
Move by setting password (169).
M
at-h AT Hysteresis
0.8
M
a1on Alarm 1 ON Delay
M
M
M
a1of Alarm 1 OFF Delay
0
M
0
M
Cycle MV
lcma Limit
Amplitude
20.0
M
inf Input Digital Filter
0.0
M
pvad Additional PV Display
off
M
o-dp
5.0
M
at-g AT Calculated Gain
0 ting/communications pro-
M
pv-b PV Stable Band
M
alfa
M Move to Advanced Setting

Group
amov Function
Displayed when initial set-
M
st-b ST Stable Range
15.0
off
M
MB Command
rlrv Logic Switching
Auxiliary Output 3
Open in Alarm
off
Event Input
Assignment 2
M
of Square
sqr Extraction
Root Enable
on Method
on
Event Input
Assignment 1
stop
M
Cold Junction
cjc Compensation
Auxiliary Output 2
M
hbl Heater Burnout Latch
1 Four SPs: 2
0.1
M
0
MV Display
M
Display
ret Automatic
Return Time
M
lbal LBA Level
M
lbab LBA Band
3.0
M
rt RT
off
off
Control Output 2
Assignment
M
odsl MV Display Selection
Auxiliary Output 1
Assignment
M
Decimal Point
pvdp PV
Display
none
M
sub1
alm1
M
sub2
Auxiliary Output 2
Assignment
M
sub3
alm3
"PV/SP" Display
Screen Selection
on
M
PV Status Display
pvst Function
off
alm2
Auxiliary Output 3
Assignment
(900-TC8 and
900-TC16 only)
M
csel Character Select
on
M
t-u Soak Time Unit
m
M
alsp Alarm SP Selection
sp-m
M
MV
manl Manual
Limit Enable
off
off
Automatic Cooling
M
Overcurrent
ocu Heater
Use
on
M
Overcurrent
ocl Heater
Latch
off
M
och
0.1
M
out2
M
csca
off
M
pfd5
M
spdp
M
at Stop and Error
mvse MV
Addition
M
Select
amad Auto/Manual
Addition
M
pfd4 Monitor/Setting Item 4
M
Output 1
out1 Control
Assignment
M
Rate of Change
pvrp PV
Calculation Period
ins1
M
8.0
M
istp Input Shift Type
off
off
(900-TC8
M and 900-TC16 only)

0
M
lba LBA Detection Time
off
n-o Open in Alarm
0.0
4-20
Auxiliary Output 1
n-o Open in Alarm
Transfer Output
Upper Limit
M
hsh HS Alarm Hysteresis
PF Setting
(900-TC8 and
M
1
off
tr-t Transfer Output Type
pf
a-m 900-TC16 only)
M
hsl HS Alarm Latch
off
Alarm 3
Hysteresis
HS Alarm Use
on
off
off
M
alt3 Alarm 3 Type
hsu
off
off
M
2
alh2 Alarm
Hysteresis
a1lt Alarm 1 Latch
init Parameter Initialization
Heater Overcurrent
Hysteresis
M
SV Status Display
svst Function
off
M
Refresh
d.ref Display
Period
0.25
M
Output 1
ra1m Control
ON/OFF Count
0 Monitor
M
ra2m
Control Output 2
ON/OFF Count
0 Monitor
M
ra1
Control Output 1
ON/OFF Count
0 Alarm Set Value
M
Output 2
ra2 Control
ON/OFF Count
0 Alarm Set Value
M
Counter
rac ON/OFF
Reset
0
M
to Calibration
cmov Move
Function Group
0
Appendix
Calibration
Parameter Structure
The Bulletin 900 Controller is correctly calibrated before it is shipped from the
factory, and normally need not be calibrated by the user. If, however, it must
be calibrated by the user, use the parameters for calibrating temperature input
and analog input.
Note: Rockwell Automation cannot ensure the results of calibration by the
user. Also, factory calibration data is overwritten with the users settings
and the factory default calibration settings cannot be returned after user
calibration.
To execute user calibration, enter the password 1201 at the Move to
Calibration function group parameter in the Advanced Setting function
group. The mode will be changed to the calibration mode, and adj will
be displayed.
The Move to Calibration function group parameter may not be
displayed when the user is doing the calibration for the first time. If this
happens, configured the Initial/Communications Protect parameter in
the Protect function group to 0 before moving to the Advanced Setting
function group.
The calibration mode is ended by turning the controller power OFF.
The parameter calibrations in the calibration mode are structured as
shown in Figure C.1.
C-1
C-2
Calibration
Figure C.1 Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Universal

Inputs
Advanced Setting
Function Group
adj
30
Moves automatically according to input type.

Thermocouple or Infrared
Temperature Sensor
Platinum Resistance
Thermometer
0: Pt100
1: Pt100
2: Pt100
3: JPt100
4: JPt100
5: K
7: J
11: E
12: L
15: N
6: K
8: J
9, 10: T
13, 14: U
16: R
17: S
18: B
Analog Input
19: K140F/60C
20: K240F/120C
21: K280F/140C
22: K440F/220C
24: W
25: PL II
23:0 to
50 mV
p390
p280
t 54
t 24
c 54
p200
p140
t -6
t -6
t -6
p10
p10
c700
c700
e20c
9387
4543
e26b
93d7
4543
b9a5
2988
br13
Publication 900-UM007D-EN-E -January 2011
ba13
c400
bias
bias
35b8
no
0200
c400
296e
str
e220
29be
35b8
b9as
2988
Calibration
C-3
Controllers with Analog Inputs (900-TC8 & 900-TC16)

Figure C.2
Advanced Setting
Function Group
adj
30
Moves automatically according to input type.
Current Input
0: 4 to 20 mA
1: 0 to 20 mA
Voltage Input
2: 1 to 5 V
3: 0 to 5 V
4: 0 to 10 V
a 20
1v 5
2v10
1v 1
2v 1
c8e7
4677
c7c3
sac0
b104
4ad9
str
no
When calibration has been performed after purchase, the user calibration
information shown in the following illustration will be displayed when moving
to the calibration level.
Figure C.3
.adj
30
A Dot is Displayed
Registering Calibration
Data
The new calibration data for each item is temporarily registered. It can be
officially registered as calibration data only when all items have been calibrated
to new values. Therefore, be sure to temporarily register all items when you
perform the calibration. When the data is registered, it is also recorded that
user calibration has been performed.
C-4
Calibration
Prepare separate measuring devices and equipment for calibration. For details
on how to handle measuring devices and equipment, refer to the respective
instruction manuals.
User Calibration
Calibrating Input
The 900-TC8, 900-TC16, and 900-TC32 are correctly calibrated before they
are shipped from the factory, and normally need not be calibrated by the user.
If, however, they must be calibrated by the user, use the parameters for
calibrating temperature input and analog input. Rockwell Automation,
however, cannot ensure the results of calibration by the user. Also, the factory
calibration data is overwritten with the latest user calibration results. The
default calibration settings CANNOT be restored after user calibration.
Perform user calibration with care.
When the user calibrates the Bulletin 900 Controller, the Input Type currently
selected in parameters is calibrated.
The following 26 Input Types can be calibrated:
Thermocouple: 16 types
Non-contact temperature sensor: 4 types
Analog input: 1 type
Platinum resistance thermometer: 5 types
Controllers with Analog Inputs (900-TC8 and 900-TC16):

Current input: 2 types
Voltage input: 3 types
Registering Calibration Data

The new calibration data for each item is temporarily registered. It can be
officially registered as calibration data only when all items have been calibrated
to new values. Therefore, be sure to temporarily register all items when you
calibrate the Bulletin 900 Controller.
When calibration data is registered, it is registered regardless of whether or not
the Bulletin 900 Controller has been calibrated by the user.
Prepare separate measuring devices and equipment for calibration. For details
on how to handle measuring devices and equipment, see the respective sensor
manufacturers instruction manuals.
Calibration
Calibrating Thermocouples
C-5
Calibrate according to the type of thermocouple, thermocouple 1 group (Input

Types 5, 7, 11, 12, 15), and thermocouple 2 group (Input Types 6, 8, 9, 10, 13,
14, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25).
When calibrating, do not cover the bottom of the controller. Also, do not
touch the input terminals (pin numbers 4 and 5 on the 900-TC16, 19 and 20
on the 900-TC8, and 11 and 12 on the 900-TC32) or the compensating
conductor on the controller.
Preparations
Figure C.4 Set the Cold Junction Compensator
900-TC8
1
900-TC8
STV
Input Power Supply

2
19
Cold Junction
Compensator
20
0 C/32 F
Compensating Conductor
900-TC16
9
900-TC16
STV
Input Power Supply

10
4
Cold Junction
Compensator
0 C/32 F
900-TC32
1
900-TC32
STV
Input Power Supply

2
11
Cold Junction
Compensator
12
0 C/32 F
C-6
Calibration
Set the cold junction compensator designed for compensation of

internal thermocouples to 0C. However, make sure that internal
thermocouples are disabled (tips are open).
In the above figure, STV refers to a standard DC current/voltage
source.
Use the compensating conductor designed for the selected
thermocouple. However, note that when thermocouples R, S, E, B, W
or PLII, or a non-contact temperature sensor is used, the cold junction
compensator and the compensating conductor can be substituted with
the cold junction compensator and the compensating conductor for
thermocouple Type K.
Connecting the Cold Junction Compensator Correct process values
cannot be obtained if you touch the contact ends of the compensating
conductor during calibration of a thermocouple. Accordingly,
short-circuit (enable) or open (disable) the tip of the thermocouple
inside the cold junction compensator as shown in the figure below to
create a contact or non-contact state for the cold junction compensator.
Figure C.5 Connecting the Cold Junction Compensator
Enable
900-TC8
900-TC16
or
900-TC32
Disable
Cold Junction Compensator
Short-Circuit
0 C/ 32 F

900-TC8
900-TC16
or
900-TC32
0 C/ 32 F
Open
This example describes how to calibrate the Bulletin 900 Controller when a
thermocouple input is currently selected.
1. Connect the power supply.
2. Connect a standard DC current/voltage source (STV), precision digital
multimeter (DMM), and contact junction compensator (e.g., zero
controller as in the figure below) to the thermocouple input terminals
(refer to Figure C.6 below).
Calibration
C-7
Figure C.6 Example, Zero Controller

900-TC8
900-TC16
900-TC32
STV
20/5/12
19/4/11
DMM
Leave Open
Zero
Controller
OUTPUT
INPUT
Compensating conductor of currently

selected thermocouple.
Use the K thermocouple compensating
conductor for:
E, R, S, B, W, and PLII thermocouples and
the non-contact temperature sensor
3. Turn the power ON.

4. Move to the Calibration function group. This starts the 30-minute timer.
This timer provides an approximate timer for aging. After 30 minutes,
the No. 2 display changes to 0. You can advance to the next step in this
procedure even if 0 is not displayed.
Figure C.7
adj
30
5. Press the M key to set the Bulletin 900 Controller to the state below.
The No. 2 display at this time displays the currently entered count value
entered in Hexadecimal. Set the STV as follows:
Input Types 5, 7, 11, 12, 15: Set to 54 mV.
Input Types 6, 8, 9, 10, 13, 14, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25: Set to
24 mV.
Figure C.8
Input Types
5, 7, 11, 12, 15:
t-54
b9a5
Input Types
6, 8, 9, 10, 13,
14, 16, 17, 18,
19, 20, 21, 22:
t- 24
e220
Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press
the D key to temporarily register the calibration setup. If the count
C-8
Calibration
value is outside the specified range, the Number 2 display will flash and
the count value will NOT be temporarily registered.
6. Press the M key to set the Bulletin 900 Controller to the state below. Set
STV to 6 mV. Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully
stabilize, then press the D key to temporarily register the calibration
setup. If the count value is outside the specified range, the Number 2
display will flash and the count value will NOT be temporarily
registered.
Figure C.9
t--6
2988
7. Press the M Key. The display changes as shown above.. Set the STV to
700 mV.
the D Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count
value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and
the count value will not be temporarily registered.
Figure C.10
c700
-
ba13
8. Press the M Key. The display changes as shown on the left.Set the STV
to 400 mV. Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize,
then press the D Key to temporarily register the calibration settings.
If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will
flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered
Figure C.11
c400
4
29be
9. When the M Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left.
Figure C.12
bias
35b8
Calibration
C-9
10. Change the wiring as follows

Figure C.13
Open in Non-connected State
STV
DMM
Short-Circuit
Zero
Controller
OUTPUT
INPUT
Compensating conductor of currently

selected thermocouple.
Use the K thermocouple compensating
conductor for:
E, R, S, B, W, and PLII thermocouples and
an infrared temperature sensor
Disconnect the STV to enable the thermocouple of the cold junction

compensator. When doing this, be sure to disconnect the wiring on the STV
side.
11. Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press
the D Key to temporarily register the calibration settings.
Figure C.14
str
no
The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not
complete. Press the U Key. The No. 2 display changes to yes. Release
the key and wait two seconds or press the M Key. This stores the
temporarily registered calibration data to EEPROM. To cancel the
saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EEPROM, press the
M Key (while no is displayed in the No. 2 display) without pressing the
U Key.
13. The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF
the D key to temporarily register the calibration setup.
C-10
Calibration
15. Press the M key. The No. 2 display changes to the state below. Note
that the data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not
complete.
Figure C.15
str
no
16. Press the U key. The No. 2 display changes to yes. Release the key and
wait 2 seconds or press the M key. This stores the temporarily
registered calibration data to EEPROM. To cancel storage of
temporarily registered calibration data to memory, press the M key
without pressing the U key.
17. The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF.
Calibrating 050 mV
Analog Input
This example describes how to calibrate when 050 mV input (Input Type
23) is currently selected on a Bulletin 900-TC8, 900TC16, or 900-TC32
Controller supporting Global Temperature (GT) inputs.
Figure C.16
900-TC8
1
900-TC8
Input Power Supply

2
900-TC16
- 19
STV
+ 20
DMM
900-TC32
1
Input Power Supply
Input Power Supply
10
STV
STV
11
DMM
5 +
DMM
12 +

2. Connect an STV and DMM to the analog input terminals, as shown in
the figures above.
Calibration
C-11

4. Move to the Calibration function group. This starts the 30-minute aging
timer. This timer provides an approximate timer for aging. After 30
minutes, the No. 2 display changes to 0. You can advance to the next
step in this procedure even if 0 is not displayed.
Figure C.17
adj
30
5. Press the M key to set the Bulletin 900 to the state below. The No. 2
display at this time displays the currently entered count value entered in
Hexadecimal. Set the STV to 54 mV.
Figure C.18
t-54
b9a5
the D key to temporarily register the calibration settings.
flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered.
7. Press the M key to set the Bulletin 900 to the state below. Set STV to
6mV.
Figure C.19
t--6
2988
the D key to temporarily register the calibration setup. If this count
9. Press the M key. The No. 2 display changes to the state below. Note
that the data to be temporarily registered is not displayed when it is not
entirely prepared. Press the U key. The No. 2 display changes to yes.
Release the key and wait 2 seconds or press the M key. This stores the
temporarily registered calibration data to EEPROM. To cancel the
M key (while no is displayed in the No. 2 display) without pressing the
U key.
C-12
Calibration
Figure C.20
str
no
10. The calibration mode is ended by turning the controller power OFF.
Calibrating Platinum
Resistance Thermometers
This example describes how to calibrate the Bulletin 900 Controller when it is
connected to a platinum resistance thermometer.
Figure C.21
900-TC8
1
900-TC8
Input Power Supply

2
900-TC16
9
A 18
B 19
B 20
6-dial
900-TC16
Input Power Supply

10
A 3
B' 4
6-dial
B 5
900-TC32
900-TC32
Input Power Supply

2
A 10
B' 11
6-dial
B 12
When calibrating a platinum resistance thermometer use wires of the same

thickness as those used to connect the Bulletin 900 Controller.
2. Connect a precision resistance box (called 6-dial in this manual) to the
platinum resistance thermometer input terminals.
4. Move to the Calibration function group. This starts the 30-minute aging
timer. This timer provides an approximate timer for aging. After
30 minutes, the No. 2 display changes to 0. You can advance to the next
step in this procedure even if 0 is not displayed.
Calibration
C-13
Figure C.22
adj
30
5. Press the M key to display the count value for each Input Type. The
No. 2 display at this time displays the currently entered count value in
Hexadecimal. Set the 6-dial as follows:
Input Type 0: 390
Input Type 1, 2, 3 or 4: 280
Figure C.23
Input Type
0:
p390
e20c
Input Type
1, 2, 3, 4:
p280
e26b
the D key to temporarily register the calibration setup. If this count
7. Press the M Key to display the count value for each input type. The No.
2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in
hexadecimal.Set the 6-dial as follows:
Input type 0: 200
Input type 1, 2, 3 or 4: 140
Figure C.24
p200
93a7
p140
e26b
the D key to temporarily register the calibration setup.
When the M key is pressed, the status changes as shown in Figure
C.25. Set the 6-dial to 10 .
the D Key to temporarily register the calibration settings.If this count
C-14
Calibration
complete. Press the U Key. The No. 2 display changes to yes. Release
the key and wait two seconds or press the M Key. This stores the
temporarily registered calibration data to EEPROM.To cancel the
M Key (while no is displayed in the No. 2 display) without pressing the
U Key.
11. The calibration mode is quit by turning the power OFF.
Figure C.25
str
no
Calibrating Analog Input

(e.g., 420 mA Analog
Input)
Calibrating an Analog Current Input (900-TC8 & 900-TC16)

In this example, calibration is shown for a Controller with an Analog current
Input (Input Type 0 or 1).
2. Connect an STV and DMM to the current input terminals, as shown in
the following diagram.
Figure C.26
900-TC8
900-TC16
1
Input Power Supply
9
Input Power Supply
10
STV
19
STV
DMM
20 +
DMM
5 +

4. Move to the calibration function group.
This starts the 30-minute aging timer. This timer provides an
approximate timer for aging. After 30 minutes have elapsed, the No. 2
display changes to 0. You can advance to the next step in this procedure
even if 0 is not displayed.
Calibration
C-15
Figure C.27
adj
30
5. When the M key is pressed, the status changes as shown in Figure C.28.
The No. 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in
hexadecimal. Set the STV to 20 mA.
flash and the count value will NOT be temporarily registered.
Figure C.28
a-20
c8e7
Set the STV to 1 mA.
flash and the count value will NOT be temporarily registered.
Figure C.29
a--1
4677
complete.
Press the U key. The No. 2 display changes to yes. Release the key and
registered calibration data to EEPROM.
To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to
EEPROM, press the M key (while no is displayed in the No. 2 display)
Figure C.30
str
no
8. The calibration mode is ended by turning the controller power OFF.
C-16
Calibration
Calibrating an Analog Voltage (e.g., 15V DC) Input (900-TC8 &

900-TC16)
In this example, calibration is shown for a Controller with an Analog Voltage
Input (Input Type 2, 3, or 4).
2. Connect an STV and DMM to the voltage input terminals, as shown in
the following diagram.
Figure C.31
900-TC8
900-TC16
1
Input Power Supply
Input Power Supply

2
10
STV
19
STV
DMM
20 +
DMM
5 +

Figure C.32
adj
30
4. Move to the calibration function group.

This starts the 30-minute aging timer. This timer provides an
approximate timer for aging. After 30 minutes have elapsed, the No. 2
display changes to 0. You can advance to the next step in this procedure
even if 0 is not displayed.
5. When the M key is pressed, the status changes as shown in the figure
below.
The No. 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in
hexadecimal. Set the STV as follows:
Input Type 2 or 3: 5V
Input Type 4: 10V
Calibration
C-17
Figure C.33
Input Type
2 or 3:
1v- 5
Input Type 4:
c7c3
2v10
b104
below.
Set the STV to 1V.
Figure C.34
Input Type
2 or 3:
1v- 1
5ac0
Input Type
4:
2v- 1
4ad9
below.
complete.
Press the U key. The No. 2 display changes to yes. Release the key and
registered calibration data to EEPROM.
To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to
EEPROM, press the M key (while no is displayed in the No. 2 display)
Figure C.35
str
no
8. The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF.
C-18
Calibration
After calibrating input, make sure to check indication accuracy to make

sure that the Bulletin 900 Controller has been correctly calibrated.
Checking Indication
Accuracy
Operate the Bulletin 900 Controller in the PV/SP monitor mode.

Check the indication accuracy at the Upper- and Lower-Limits and
mid-point.
Checking Accuracy of a Thermocouple or Non-Contact

Temperature Sensor
Preparation: The following figure shows the required device
connection. Make sure that the Bulletin 900 Controller and cold
junction compensator are connected by a compensating conductor for
the thermocouple that is to be used during actual operation. For the
non-contact temperature sensor, connect a K thermocouple, and
configured the Input Type to the K thermocouple.
Figure C.36
900-TC8
1
900-TC8
Input Power Supply

2
- 19
STV
+ 20
Compensation Conductor
900-TC16
9
900-TC16
Input Power Supply

10
STV
900-TC32
1
900-TC32
Input Power Supply

2
- 11
+ 12
STV
Calibration
C-19
Operation: Make sure that the cold junction compensator is at 0C, and
configured STV output to the voltage equivalent to the starting power
of the value to be checked. The cold junction compensator and
compensation conductor are not required when an external cold
junction compensation method is used.
Checking Indication Accuracy of a Platinum Resistance

Thermometer
Preparation: The following figure shows the required device
connection:
Figure C.37
900-TC8
1
900-TC8
Input Power Supply

2
A 18
B' 19
6-dial
B 20
900-TC16
9
900-TC16
Input Power Supply

10
A 3
B' 4
6-dial
B 5
900-TC32
1
900-TC32
Input Power Supply

2
A 10
B' 11
6-dial
B 12
Operation: Set the 6-dial to the resistance equivalent to the check value.
C-20
Calibration
Analog Input (900-TC & 900-TC16)

Preparation: The following figures show the required device
connection:
Figure C.38 Controller with a Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer
Multi-input (Analog Input)
900-TC8
1
900-TC8
Input Power Supply

2
19
+ 20
900-TC16
9
STV
900-TC16
Input Power Supply

10
4
+ 5
STV
Figure C.39 Current Input for a Controller with an Analog Input
900-TC8
1
900-TC8
Input Power Supply

2
19
+ 20
900-TC16
STV
900-TC16
Input Power Supply

10
+ 3
4
STV
Figure C.40 Voltage Input for a Controller with an Analog Input

900-TC8
900-TC8
1
Input Power Supply

2
19
+ 20
900-TC16
STV
900-TC16
Input Power Supply

10
4
+ 5
STV
Operation
Set the STV output to the voltage or current equivalent to the check
value.
Appendix
Glossary
Adaptive Tuning: Used to continuously monitor and optimize PID constants

while the controller operates. Three tuning algorithms are used to recalculate
the PID constants within 500 ms after the process value stabilizes at set point:
step-response method, disturbance tuning, and hunting tuning.
Anti-Reset Wind-Up (ARW): A feature of PID controllers that prevents the
integral (auto-reset) circuit from operating when the temperature is outside the
proportional band.
Alpha (): This represents the temperature coefficient of the change in
electrical resistance of a material. For each C in temperature the electrical
resistance changes. It is the defining parameter for platinum resistance
temperature detectors (RTD sensors). The unit of measure is ohms/ohms/C.
Analog: Data collected and represented by continuously variable quantities,
such as voltage measurement or temperature variation.
Auto-Tuning: This feature automatically calculates then resets the PID values
based on temperature control performance over a sampled period. In some of
the controllers, auto-tuning also optimizes the settings for fuzzy logic control
values.
CE: A marking on products that comply with European Union requirements
pertaining to safety and electromagnetic compatibility.
Celsius: A temperature scale in which water freezes at 0C and boils at 100C
at standard atmospheric pressure. The formula to convert Fahrenheit
temperatures to Celsius is as follows: F = (1.8 x C) +32.
Cold Junction Compensation: Electronic means of compensating for the
ambient temperature at the cold junction of a thermocouple so it maintains a
reference to 0C.
D-1
D-2
Glossary
Contact Output: Relay control outputs are often available in these contact
forms:
Form A Contact (SPST-NO): Single-pole, single-throw relays use the
normally open and common contacts to switch power. The contacts
close when the relay coil is energized and open when power is removed
from the coil.
Form B Contact (SPST-NC): Single-pole, single-throw relays use the
normally closed and common contacts. These contacts open when the
relay coil is energized and close when power is removed from the coil.
Form C Contact (SPDT): Single-pole, double-throw relays use the
normally open, normally closed, and common contacts. The relay can
be wired as a Form A or Form B contact.
Control Action: The control output response relative to the difference
between the process variable and the set point. For reverse action (usually
heating), as the process decreases below the set point, the output increases. For
direct action (usually cooling), as the process increases above the set point, the
output increases.
Control Mode: The type of control action used by the controller can include
ON/OFF, time-proportioning, PD, and PID. Other combinations and
refinements are used.
CSA: Canadian Standards Association is an independent testing laboratory
that establishes commercial and industrial standards, as well as tests products
and certifies them.
C-UL: This symbol appearing in literature and marked on products indicates
Canadian recognition of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. approval of particular
product classes. The C-UL approval may stand in place of Canadian Standards
Association certification. All references to C-UL are based on prior listing or
recognition from the original UL file.
Dead Band: The time period in a control system between a change in stimuli
and any measurable response in the controlled variable. In the deadband,
specific conditions can be placed on control output actions. Operators select
the dead band width. It is usually above the heating proportional band and
below the cooling proportional band.
Derivative: The rate of change in a process variable which forms the D in a
PID control algorithm. This control action anticipates the rate of change of
the process and compensates to minimize overshoot and undershoot.
Derivative control is an instantaneous change of the control output in the
same direction as the proportional error. This is caused by a change in the
process variable (PV) that decreases over the derivative time.
Glossary
D-3
Deviation: A departure of a controlled variable from a command such as set

point.
Deviation Indication: A system of indication in which a departure of a
detected value from the set point is indicated.
DIN (Deutsches Institut fr Normung): A German standards agency that
sets world-recognized engineering and industrial standards.
DIN 43760: The standard that defines the characteristics of a 100 platinum
RTD having a resistance vs. temperature curve specified by a = 0.00385 per
degree.
Drift: A gradual change over a long period of time that affects the reading or
value. Changes in ambient temperature, component aging, contamination,
humidity, and line voltage all contribute to drift.
Droop: Controllers using only proportional control can settle at a value below
the actual set point once the system stabilizes. This offset is corrected with the
addition of Integral control in the control algorithm.
Electromagnetic Compatibility: To conform with CEs EMC requirements,
equipment or a system must operate without introducing significant
electromagnetic disturbances to the environment or be affected by
electromagnetic disturbances.
Electromagnetic Interference: There are many possible sources for
electromagnetic interference (EMI) in an industrial control setting. It can
originate as electrical or magnetic noise caused by switching AC power on
inside the sine wave. EMI interferes with the operation of controls and other
devices.
Electromechanical Relay: A power switching device that completes or
interrupts a circuit by physically moving electrical contacts into contact with
each other. These are used primarily for ON/OFF control operation.
Event: A programmable ON/OFF output signal. Events can control
peripheral equipment or processes, or act as an input for another control loop.
Event input boards are an option for most Rockwell controllers.
Fahrenheit: A temperature scale that has 32 at the freezing point and 212 at
the boiling point of water at sea level. To convert Fahrenheit to Celsius,
subtract 32 from F and multiply the remainder by 0.556.
Full Indication: A system of indication in which a detected value is indicated
with a setting range.
D-4
Glossary
Fuzzy Logic: A rule-based control algorithm that enables control devices to

make subjective judgments in a way similar to human decision-making. Within
a process controller, fuzzy logic uses some basic information about the system,
which is input by the user, to emulate the way an expert operator who was
manually controlling the system would react to a process up set.
Heat Sink: An object that conducts and dissipates heat away from an object in
contact with it. Solid-state relays usually use a finned aluminum heat sink to
dissipate heat.
Hot Junction and Cold Junction: If a thermocouple is generating a voltage,
this means that there is a temperature difference between the two ends of the
thermocouple. The hot end is the one that makes contact with the temperature
process being controlled. The cold end is at the sensor input terminals.
Hunting: Oscillation of the process temperature between the set point and
the process variable. Derivative control is used in the control algorithm to
reduce hunting.
Hysteresis (Dead Band): A temperature band between the ON and OFF of
an output in the ON/OFF control action. No heating or cooling takes place.
The band occurs between the ON and OFF points.
Infrared: The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum with wavelengths
ranging from one to 1000 microns. These wavelengths are ideal for radiant
heating and non-contact temperature sensing.
Input Digital Filter: A device used to sample the input slower than the scan
rate to allow the controller to monitor an input that changes very rapidly and
still have sufficient information from the process to control it.
Input Scaling: The ability to scale input readings (% of full scale) to the
engineering units of the process variable.
Input Type: The type of device used to provide a signal of temperature
change. These include thermocouples, RTDs, linear or process current, or
voltage inputs.
Integral Action (I): Control action that eliminates offset, or droop, between
set point and actual process temperature. This is the I in the PID control
algorithm.
Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS): A Japanese agency that establishes and
maintains standards for equipment and components. Its function is similar to
Germanys Deutsches Institut fr Normung.
Linearity: A measure of the deviation of an instruments response from a
straight line.
Glossary
D-5
Loop Break Alarm: This alarm indicates a problem in the control loop, e.g., a
sensor has become disconnected or a problem has developed with the final
control element.
Manipulated Variable: The final output percentage (0100%) that will be
sent to a control element. This percentage can be related to a valve position, a
420 mA signal, or the amount of ON time from a pulsed control output.
Manipulated Variable Limiting: A control option used when the process
cannot handle the full output of the heater or final control device. To limit the
manipulated variable, the user programs the controller so that it never sends a
100% output to the final control element.
Manual Mode: A selectable mode that has no automatic control aspects. The
user sets the output levels.
Multiple Set Points: Two or more set points independent from each other
which can be configured in the temperature controller.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): The United
States organization that establishes specifications and ratings for electrical
components and apparatus. Conformance by manufacturers is voluntary.
However, Underwriters Laboratories will test products to NEMA ratings for
operating performance and enclosure ratings.
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST): Formerly the
National Bureau of Standards, this United States agency is responsible for
establishing scientific and technical standards.
NEMA 4X: This enclosure rating specification certifies that a controllers
front panel resists water washdown and is corrosion-resistant in indoor usage.
Normal Action: A control action which will increase the control output if the
process value is higher than the set point. This action is suitable for a cooling
system.
Offset: A controlled deviation (the difference in temperature between the set
point and the actual process temperature) remaining after a controlled system
reaches its steady state. The offset (droop) is created by the correlation
between the thermal capacity of the controlled system and the capacity of
heating equipment.
ON/OFF Control Action: A control action which turns the output fully on
until the set point is reached, and then turns off. Also called two-position
control action.
Overshoot: The number of degrees by which a process exceeds the set point
temperature.
D-6
Glossary
Process Variable: The parameter that is controlled or measured, such as

temperature, relative humidity, flow, and pressure.
Proportional Band: The range of temperature in which a manipulated
variable is proportionate to any deviation from the set point.
Proportional Control Action (P): A control action in which the manipulated
variable is proportionate to any deviation from the set point.
Proportional Period: A cycle of ON and OFF operations of the output relay
in a time-division proportional control action.
Proportional Control Plus Derivative Function (PD): A
time-proportioning controller that has a derivative function. The derivative
function monitors the rate at which a systems temperature is either increasing
or decreasing and adjusts the cycle time of the controller to minimize
overshoot or undershoot.
Proportioning Control with Integral and Derivative Functions (PID): A
time-proportioning controller that has integral and derivative functions. The
integral function automatically raises the stabilized system temperature to
match the set point temperature to eliminate the difference caused by the
time-proportioning function. The derivative function monitors the rate of rise
or fall of the system temperature and automatically adjusts the cycle time of
the controller to minimize overshoot and undershoot. Also called
three-mode control.
Range: The difference between the lower and Upper-Limits of a
measurement quantity.
Rate Action (D): The controller senses the rate of change of temperature and
provides an immediate change of output to minimize the eventual deviation.
Remote Set Point: A remote set point allows a controller to receive its set
point from a source other than itself.
Reset (Auto Reset) Action: There is a manual adjustment that can be applied
to the offset by changing the configured value dial or moving the offset screw
on the control panel. The auto-reset function automatically adjusts the
configured value to eliminate offset.
Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD): A coil of wire, usually platinum,
whose resistance increases linearly with a rise in temperature. RTDs generally
have a higher accuracy rating than thermocouples.
Reverse Action: A control action in which the output power will be inversely
proportional to the deviation. An increase in the process variable will cause a
decrease in the output power, making this action suitable for a heating system.
Glossary
D-7
Serial Communications: A method of transmitting information between

devices by sending all bits serially over a communication channel. RS-232 is
used for point-to-point connections of a single device, usually over a short
distance. RS-485 communicates with multiple devices on a single, common
cable over longer distances.
Set Point: The value configured on the process or temperature controller to
control the system.
Soft Start: A method of applying power gradually over a period of seconds to
controlled devices such as heaters, pumps and motors. This lengthens the
service life of the load by limiting in-rush current to inductive loads.
Solid-State Relay (SSR): A switching device with no moving parts that
completes or interrupts a circuit electrically.
Thermal Response: The time required for the response curve of the
temperature sensor to rise to a specified percentage level (usually either 63% or
90%).
Thermocouple Sensor: A device that converts heat to electricity. Usually
made of two wires, each of a different metal or alloy. The wires are joined at
one end, known as the hot end. The hot end makes thermal contact with the
process to be controlled. The cold end terminals are connected to the sensor
input. Voltages are created at both the hot and cold ends. The controller
measures the cold end temperature to determine the hot end temperature.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL): This independent testing laboratory
establishes commercial and industrial standards, as well as tests and certifies
products in the US. They also offer testing to Canadian Standards Association
requirements with products bearing the cUL marking.
Undershoot: This is the amount by which the process variable falls below the
set point before it stabilizes.
Zero Cross Switching: Used in solid-state relays, this action provides output
switching only at or near the zero-voltage crossing point of the AC sine wave.
It reduces electromagnetic interference and high inrush currents during initial
turn-on.
D-8
Glossary
Notes:
Index
Numerics
2PID control
Communications function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

setting level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
parameter operation list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
2PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16, 3-25
Control outputs - wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-ii
Controllers with Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-i
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-i
Additional PV display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
Cooling coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15, 5-36
Adjustment level parameter operation list . . . . . . . . . . . B-2, B-3

Advanced function setting level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
parameter operation list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9, B-11
Alarms
Current Transformer
calculating detection current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Alarm 1 type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59, 5-61-62, 5-64-66, 5-68, 5-73

Alarm 2 type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59, 5-63, 5-73
installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Current Value Exceeds (error display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Alarm delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Alarm hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Alarm outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Dead band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Alarm value 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16-18
Decimal point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33, 5-42, 5-49, 5-52, 5-54
alarm delays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Derivative time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30, 3-39, 5-22, 5-25, 5-35

Dimensions, approximate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Analog input
Detection current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
Analog input (voltage input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10, 5-52
Direct/reverse operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

Display Range Exceeded (error display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
AT (Autotuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Auto control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Auto/manual
Ehanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-ii
example operating procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Error displays
select addition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Current Value Exceeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Automatic return of display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Display Range Exceeded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
HB Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Heater Burnout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Bulletin 900-TC8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-ii
HS Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Bulletin 900-TC16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-ii
Input Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Bulletin 900-T32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-ii
Memory Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
C
Calibration
analog input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
platinum resistance thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12
thermocouples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14
voltage input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
Checking indication accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-18
Event Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
F
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
G
General/Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
H
HB Error (error display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
HBA (heater burnout alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
switching between auto and manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23,

4-53
manual control level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
moving to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
error display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Manual reset value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
MB command logic switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82..89
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Memory Error (error display). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7, 2-10, 2-13
Heater current value monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
MultiSP (set point 0 to 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19, 5-10
HS alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46, A-5
MV at PV error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76, 5-87
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
MV at stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75, 5-87
error display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
MV lower limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
MV monitor (OUT1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
(OUT1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
MV monitor (OUT2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
(OUT2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
MV upper limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42, 5-43, 5-44
Initial setting level

parameter operation list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4, B-5, B-7
setup examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Initial/communications protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
ON/OFF contol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Input digital filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
executing ON/OFF control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Input error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Operation level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15, 3-27, 5-23, 5-49
Input Error (error display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Input shift values, how to calculate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Option units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Input Types
Output functions assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
default values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13, A-9
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Integral time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Output limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
P
Parameter initialize. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Parameter operation list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
adjustment level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2, B-3
LBA (loop burnout alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
manual control level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
operation level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
detection time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49, 4-50
advanced function setting level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9, B-11
level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49, 4-50
communications setting level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
Lower limit temperature input shift value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
initial setting level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4, B-5, B-7

protect level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Manipulated variable display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
PF Key - Using to move to the Manual Control Level. . . . . 4-59
Manual Control Level
PID / ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
PID constants (AT, ST, manual setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Precautions, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Program end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Shifting input values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Program patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
simple program function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66, 4-73
Proportional band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30, 5-22, 5-25, 5-35
controlling start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Protect level parameter operation list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
PV display
soak time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
color change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
SP ramp alarm operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
stable band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
SP ramp set value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41, 5-47
PV/M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1, A-7, B-1
PV/SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15, 5-8, 5-11, 5-79
USB-Serial Conversion Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
ST (selftuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56, 5-57, 5-75
RT (robust tuning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36, 5-88
Standby sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Run/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Standby sequence reset method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
S
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
ST stable range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
support software port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Scaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Temperature input shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7, 5-34
Scaling lower limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49, 5-52
Transfer output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Scaling upper limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49, 5-52

Selecting PID control or ON/OFF control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Sensor input setting ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Set point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
scaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Set point 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Upperlimit temperature input shift value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Set point 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
USB-Serial Conversion Cable Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Set point 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
User calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Set point during SP ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29, 5-10

Setting heating and cooling control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Setting output specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Setting scaling upper and lower limits (analog input) . . . . . 4-10
Setting the PID / ON/OFF parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Setting the set point upper limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Setting the SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Setting the SP upper and lower limit values . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Setting the upper and lower limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Setting up the option units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Setup levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
HBA (heater burnout alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
HS alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
moving to advanced function setting level . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
hysteresis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
LBA detection time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
V
Voltage input calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16
W
Wait band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Back Cover

Supersedes Publication 900-UM007C-EN-D - October 2008
2011 Rockwell International Corporation. Printed in the U.S.A.

900 TC8

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

900 TC8

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Temperature Controllers

Important User Information

Safety Signal Words

Identifies information about practices or circumstances

Attention statements help you to:

Identifies information that is critical for successful

European Communities (EC) Directive Compliance

Low Voltage Directive

Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-i

I/O Configurations & Main Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Publication 900-UM007D-EN-E - January 2011

Publication 900-UM007D-EN-E - January 2011

PV Change Rate Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Shifting Input Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Publication 900-UM007D-EN-E - January 2011

Switching 100% AT Execute/Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Publication 900-UM007D-EN-E - January 2011

Leakage Current 2 Monitor (900-TC8, 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . .

Publication 900-UM007D-EN-E - January 2011

Alarm Type for Alarm 2 (900-TC8 & 900-TC16) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

Heater Short Alarm (HSA) Hysteresis

Publication 900-UM007D-EN-E - January 2011

Parameter Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Publication 900-UM007D-EN-E - January 2011

Calibrating an Analog Voltage (e.g., 15V DC) Input

Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

Publication 900-UM007D-EN-E - January 2011

Conventions Used in This

Loop Burnout Alarm

Note: For additional definitions of terms used in this manual, refer to

Publication 900-UM007C-EN-E - January 2011

Publication 900-UM007C-EN-E - January 2011

OUT2 CMW MANU

OUT2 CMW MANU

ALM indicator was changed to SUB indicator

Number of displays: 2 (PV and SV)

Number of displays: 3 (PV, SV, and MV)

Display Segments PV: 11 segments, SV: 11

Publication 900-UM007C-EN-E - January 2011

TC/Pt universal input Analog input

TC/Pt universal input

Terminals 16...20 were changed and 1...15 were not.

No change for terminal layout

Publication 900-UM007C-EN-E - January 2011

100 to 240 VAC

Number of terminals: 14 (1 to 14)

Removal using screws

No change for body removal

No change for body removal

900-TC8, 900-TC16, &

The following types of thermocouple input

Input range for E thermocouple: 0...600 C

Input range increased for E thermocouple:

Thermocouple: 0.5% PV or 1C,

Thermocouple: 0.3% PV or 1C,

Input sensor types for thermocouple inputs

Publication 900-UM007C-EN-E - January 2011

900-TC8, 900-TC16, &

The following types of thermocouple input

Input range for E thermocouple: 0...600 C

Input range increased for E thermocouple:

Thermocouple: 0.5% PV or 1C,

Thermocouple: 0.3% PV or 1C,